Basic DAC 6000 (V3 (1) .1) Operation, Rev 1

Basic DAC 6000 (V3.
1)
Operation
Training Manual
chstraining@motorola.com
1-888-436-4678 (Option 5)
www.motorola.com/broadband
Copyright 2006 by Motorola, Inc.
All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form or by any means or used to make any derivative
work (such as translation, transformation, or adaptation) without written permission from Motorola, Inc.
Motorola reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes in content from time to time
without obligation on the part of Motorola to provide notification of such revision or change.
Motorola provides this documentation without warranty of any kind, either implied or expressed, including,
but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Motorola
may make improvements or changes to the products described in this manual at any time.
MOTOROLA and the stylized M logo are registered trademarks of Motorola, Inc.
Contents
Introduction
Audience ........................................................................................................................... i
Prerequisites .................................................................................................................... i
Objectives ......................................................................................................................... i
Materials ............................................................................................................................ i
Agenda .............................................................................................................................. ii
Day 1 ........................................................................................................................... ii
Day 2 ........................................................................................................................... ii
Day 3 ........................................................................................................................... iii
Day 4 ........................................................................................................................... iii
Day 5 ........................................................................................................................... iii
Section 1 Digital Addressable System Overview

An Introduction to Digital Technology .......................................................................... 1-2
Digital Signal Conversion and Compression ............................................................... 1-2
Digital Television Delivery System Overview ............................................................... 1-3
Digital Headend Facility and Customers Home .......................................................... 1-4
Digital Addressable System Overview .......................................................................... 1-6
Business System ......................................................................................................... 1-6
Basic DAC 6000/RADD 6000 Functions ..................................................................... 1-6
DAC 6000 Compatible Hardware ................................................................................ 1-6
ML 570 G3 Hardware Platform .................................................................................... 1-6
DAC 6000 Operating Software .................................................................................... 1-7
KeyList Server (KLS) ................................................................................................... 1-7
Learning Exercise 1 ......................................................................................................... 1-8
Section 2 Data Communications and Networking Principles

Local Area Network (LAN) Overview ............................................................................. 2-2
Ethernet Description ........................................................................................................ 2-2
Protocols ........................................................................................................................... 2-3
Addressing Schemes ...................................................................................................... 2-4
MAC Address .............................................................................................................. 2-4
IP Address ................................................................................................................... 2-5
Address Classifications ............................................................................................... 2-6
IP Broadcast Addresses .............................................................................................. 2-7
UDP Ports .................................................................................................................... 2-7
Basic DAC 6000 (V3.1) Operation, Rev. 1.2

ii Contents
Data Transports ................................................................................................................ 2-8

MPEG-2 Compression Transport ................................................................................. 2-8
Transport Stream Organization .................................................................................... 2-9
Program Association Table (PAT) ......................................................................... 2-9
Program Map Table ............................................................................................... 2-10
Packetized Elementary Streams (PES) ................................................................. 2-11
Learning Exercise 2 .......................................................................................................... 2-12
Section 3 Manage System and Users

Start the GUI and Log On to the Controller Application ............................................... 3-2
Log Off the DAC 6000 ....................................................................................................... 3-3
Help Screens ..................................................................................................................... 3-4
Manage Users ................................................................................................................... 3-5
Define a Group ............................................................................................................. 3-6
Add and Configure a New User Group .................................................................. 3-6
Change Permissions for a User Group ................................................................. 3-8
Define Users ................................................................................................................ 3-10
Add a New User .................................................................................................... 3-10
Change an Existing User ....................................................................................... 3-11
Change a Password ..................................................................................................... 3-13
Define Remote Users ................................................................................................... 3-14
Add a New Remote User ....................................................................................... 3-14
Change an Existing Remote User ......................................................................... 3-15
Delete a Remote User ........................................................................................... 3-15
Remote Dial-In Login Sample ...................................................................................... 3-17
Manage the System .......................................................................................................... 3-19
Shut Down the DAC 6000 Application Software .......................................................... 3-19
Shut Down the System ................................................................................................ 3-20
Manage a Site .................................................................................................................... 3-21
Display Site Information ............................................................................................... 3-21
Open a System Window .............................................................................................. 3-22
Display the System hosts File ..................................................................................... 3-23
Sample Hosts File ........................................................................................................ 3-23
Edit Files Using emacs .................................................................................................... 3-25
Compare Text Files .......................................................................................................... 3-26
PING ................................................................................................................................... 3-27
Sample of a Successful PING Operation ..................................................................... 3-27
Lab Exercise 3 (Step-by-step) ......................................................................................... 3-28
Add a Group ................................................................................................................. 3-28
Add and Test a User .................................................................................................... 3-28
Add a Remote User ...................................................................................................... 3-29
Shut Down the DAC 6000 Application and Restart it ................................................... 3-29
Shut Down the System and Restart it .......................................................................... 3-30

Contents iii
View the hosts file and ping the OM ............................................................................ 3-30

Add an OM to the hosts file and ping it ....................................................................... 3-31
Lab Exercise 3 .................................................................................................................. 3-32
Add a Group ................................................................................................................ 3-32
Add and Test a User .................................................................................................... 3-32
Add a Remote User ..................................................................................................... 3-32
Shut Down the DAC 6000 Application and Restart it .................................................. 3-32
Shut Down the System and Restart it ......................................................................... 3-32
View the hosts file and ping the OM ............................................................................ 3-33
Add an OM to the hosts file and ping it ....................................................................... 3-33
Section 4 Business System Overview

Business System Overview ............................................................................................ 4-2
Manage Business Systems ............................................................................................. 4-2
Add a Business System .............................................................................................. 4-2
Change a Business System ........................................................................................ 4-7
Delete a Business System .......................................................................................... 4-7
Display Business System Services and Programs ..................................................... 4-9
Display Business System Packages ........................................................................... 4-12
Display Objects/Resources ......................................................................................... 4-13
Add a Business System Port ....................................................................................... 4-14
Change a Business System Port ................................................................................. 4-17
Delete a Business System Port ................................................................................... 4-18
Command Summary ........................................................................................................ 4-19
Business System Interface Logger (bsilog) .................................................................. 4-20
Report Functions ............................................................................................................. 4-21
BSITL Report Functions .............................................................................................. 4-24
Real-Time Business System Interface Logger .............................................................. 4-26
Define Business System Port ...................................................................................... 4-27
Lab Exercise 4 .................................................................................................................. 4-28
Define Business System Port ...................................................................................... 4-28
Section 5 Define and Configure Devices

Manage Devices ............................................................................................................... 5-2
Define Device Locations ................................................................................................. 5-3
Add a Device Location ................................................................................................. 5-3
Change a Device Location .......................................................................................... 5-4
Delete a Device Location ............................................................................................ 5-4
Define RADD ..................................................................................................................... 5-5
Add a RADD ................................................................................................................ 5-5

iv Contents
Change a RADD .......................................................................................................... 5-6

Delete a RADD ............................................................................................................. 5-7
Display Object Load Status .......................................................................................... 5-7
Reboot RADD .............................................................................................................. 5-8
Define OM 1000 Communications Settings ................................................................... 5-9
Add an OM 1000 .......................................................................................................... 5-9
Display Stream Configuration Status ........................................................................... 5-12
Define IRT Communication Settings .............................................................................. 5-13
Add an IRT 1000/2000 ................................................................................................. 5-13
Set IRT Insertion Parameters ...................................................................................... 5-15
Assign Services to Decrypting TSODAs ...................................................................... 5-15
Authorize an IRT 1000/2000 ........................................................................................ 5-16
Assign a Service .......................................................................................................... 5-17
Modify Assigned Services ............................................................................................ 5-18
Delete Assigned Services ............................................................................................ 5-18
Flush & Fill ................................................................................................................... 5-19
Rebuild & Download Program Queues ........................................................................ 5-19
Re-Acquire TSODA Addresses .................................................................................... 5-20
Display IRT 1000/2000 Services Status ...................................................................... 5-21
Define an MPS ................................................................................................................... 5-23
Add an MPS ................................................................................................................. 5-23
View Message Insertion Parameters ........................................................................... 5-25
Flush & Fill ................................................................................................................... 5-25
Re-Acquire ACP Addresses ......................................................................................... 5-25
Configure MPS Output Ports ....................................................................................... 5-27
Display MPS Status ..................................................................................................... 5-29
Reboot MPS ................................................................................................................. 5-30
Configure MPS Input Ports .......................................................................................... 5-31
Assign Services to Decrypting ACPs ........................................................................... 5-37
Route Services ............................................................................................................. 5-39
Clear Output Mplex ................................................................................................ 5-43
Route PIDs ................................................................................................................... 5-43
Change a PID Route Source ................................................................................. 5-43
Add a PID Route .................................................................................................... 5-45
Rebuild & Download Program Queues ........................................................................ 5-45
Define a SEM ..................................................................................................................... 5-47
Add a SEM ................................................................................................................... 5-47
View Message Insertion Parameters ........................................................................... 5-49
Flush & Fill ................................................................................................................... 5-49
Re-Acquire ACP Addresses ......................................................................................... 5-49
Configure SEM Output Ports ....................................................................................... 5-50
Display SEM Queuing Status ....................................................................................... 5-54
Reboot SEM ................................................................................................................. 5-56

Contents v
Configure SEM Input Ports .......................................................................................... 5-57

Re-Acquire Configuration ............................................................................................ 5-62
Route Services ............................................................................................................ 5-63
Clear Output Mplex ............................................................................................... 5-67
Route PIDs .................................................................................................................. 5-67
Add a PID Route ................................................................................................... 5-67
Change a PID Route Source ................................................................................ 5-69
Transport Stream Pass-Through ................................................................................. 5-71
Rebuild & Download Program Queues ....................................................................... 5-73
Define an Upconverter Device ........................................................................................ 5-74
Add an Upconverter Device ........................................................................................ 5-74
Define a Modem Bank ...................................................................................................... 5-76
Add a Modem Bank ..................................................................................................... 5-76
Define an RPD 1000/2000 ................................................................................................ 5-78
Configure Demod Boards ............................................................................................... 5-79
Add a Demod Board .................................................................................................... 5-79
Define a Router ................................................................................................................ 5-83
Add a Router ............................................................................................................... 5-83
Define CMTS Frequencies .......................................................................................... 5-85
Define IP Address Ranges .......................................................................................... 5-87
Define the KeyList Server ............................................................................................... 5-88
Obtain Group Config Request ........................................................................................ 5-91
View Unit KeyList ............................................................................................................. 5-92
Add an OM 1000 to the Database ............................................................................... 5-94
Flush & Fill ................................................................................................................... 5-94
Re-Acquire ACP Addresses ........................................................................................ 5-95
Assign Services to Decrypting TSODAs ..................................................................... 5-95
Display MPS Device Status ......................................................................................... 5-96
Retrieve an RPD and Define a Demod Board ............................................................. 5-96
Add a Digital Upconverter to the Database ................................................................. 5-96
Add an Analog Upconverter to the Database .............................................................. 5-97
Lab Exercise 5 .................................................................................................................. 5-98
Add an OM 1000 to the Database ............................................................................... 5-98
Flush & Fill ................................................................................................................... 5-98
Re-Acquire ACP Addresses ........................................................................................ 5-98
Assign Services to Decrypting ACPs .......................................................................... 5-98
Display MPS Device Status ......................................................................................... 5-98
Retrieve an RPD and Define a Demod Board ............................................................. 5-98
Add a Digital Upconverter to the Database ................................................................. 5-99
Add an Analog Upconverter to the Database .............................................................. 5-99

vi Contents
Section 6 Manage Plants & Device Linkage

Define and Manage Plants ............................................................................................... 6-2
Carrier Definition Table (CDT) ......................................................................................... 6-2
Define/Duplicate a Carrier Definition Table ................................................................. 6-3
This window displays the following fields: .............................................................................. 6-6
Define a Headend ............................................................................................................. 6-8
Headend Characteristics .............................................................................................. 6-8
Add a Headend ............................................................................................................ 6-8
Define a Downstream Plant ............................................................................................. 6-11
Downstream Plant Characteristics ............................................................................... 6-11
Add a Downstream Plant ............................................................................................. 6-12
Change a Downstream Plant ....................................................................................... 6-18
Delete a Downstream Plant ......................................................................................... 6-19
Display Plant Associations ........................................................................................... 6-19
Move a Downstream Plant ........................................................................................... 6-21
Define a DOCSIS Set-top Gateway (DSG) Plant ............................................................ 6-23
Add a DSG Plant .......................................................................................................... 6-23
Define an RF Upstream Plant .......................................................................................... 6-31
RF Upstream Plant Characteristics .............................................................................. 6-31
Add an RF Upstream Plant .......................................................................................... 6-31
Change an RF Upstream Plant .................................................................................... 6-37
Delete an RF Upstream Plant ...................................................................................... 6-37
Define an IP-Return Upstream Plant ............................................................................... 6-38
Add an IP-Return Upstream Plant ............................................................................... 6-38
Define a Telco Upstream Plant ........................................................................................ 6-43
Telco Upstream Plant Characteristics .......................................................................... 6-43
Add a Telco Upstream Plant ........................................................................................ 6-43
Define Device Linkage ..................................................................................................... 6-48
Add a Device Linkage .................................................................................................. 6-49
Add a Headend ............................................................................................................ 6-51
Add a Device to a Downstream Plant .......................................................................... 6-52
View Device Linkages .................................................................................................. 6-53
Lab Exercise 6 .................................................................................................................. 6-54
Add a Headend ............................................................................................................ 6-54
Add a Device to a Downstream Plant .......................................................................... 6-54
View Device Linkages .................................................................................................. 6-54

Contents vii
Section 7 Schedule Services and Programs

Service Providers and Sources Overview ..................................................................... 7-2
Define a Service Provider ................................................................................................ 7-2
Add a Service Provider ................................................................................................ 7-3
Define a Source ................................................................................................................ 7-4
Add a Source ............................................................................................................... 7-6
Build Source Name Table ................................................................................................ 7-6
Build Source Names .................................................................................................... 7-6
Define a Digital Service ................................................................................................... 7-7
Digital Program Epoch .................................................................................................... 7-19
Define Digital Programs .................................................................................................. 7-19
Verify Service Connectivity ............................................................................................. 7-30
View Current Program Queuing Information ......................................................... 7-32
View Current Program Queuing Count ................................................................. 7-33
View Last Program Queuing Information .............................................................. 7-35
View Channel Information ..................................................................................... 7-38
Define an Analog Service ................................................................................................ 7-39
Configuring EAS .............................................................................................................. 7-44
Edit Emergency Alert Tunables ................................................................................... 7-44
Adding an EAS Service ............................................................................................... 7-46
Define a Package Provider .............................................................................................. 7-49
Add a Package Provider .............................................................................................. 7-49
Define a Package ............................................................................................................. 7-50
Add a Package ............................................................................................................ 7-50
Delete a Digital Service from the Database ................................................................ 7-57
Delete Source Information from the Database ............................................................ 7-57
Build the Virtual Channel Map ..................................................................................... 7-57
Add a Source to the Database .................................................................................... 7-58
Add a Digital Service to the Database ......................................................................... 7-58
Assign a Service to Decrypting TSODA ...................................................................... 7-59
Add a Virtual Channel to the Lineup ............................................................................ 7-59
Add a Digital PPV Program to the Database .............................................................. 7-60
Add an Analog Source to the Database ...................................................................... 7-61
Add an Analog Service to the Database ..................................................................... 7-61
Define a Package Provider .......................................................................................... 7-62
Define a Package ........................................................................................................ 7-62
Lab Exercise 7 .................................................................................................................. 7-64
Delete a Digital Service from the Database ................................................................ 7-64
Delete Source Information from the Database ............................................................ 7-64
Build the Virtual Channel Map ..................................................................................... 7-64
Add a Source to the Database .................................................................................... 7-64
Add a Digital Service to the Database ......................................................................... 7-64

viii Contents
Assign a Service to Decrypting TSODA ....................................................................... 7-64

Add a Digital PPV Program to the Database ............................................................... 7-65
Add an Analog Source to the Database ....................................................................... 7-65
Add an Analog Service to the Database ...................................................................... 7-66
Define a Package Provider .......................................................................................... 7-66
Define a Package ......................................................................................................... 7-66
Section 8 Manage Channel Maps

Channel Maps Overview .................................................................................................. 8-2
Virtual Channel Maps (VCMs) Overview ........................................................................ 8-3
Manage Virtual Channel Maps ......................................................................................... 8-3
Add a VCM ................................................................................................................... 8-4
Duplicate a VCM .......................................................................................................... 8-12
Build a Virtual Channel Map ........................................................................................ 8-16
Change a Virtual Channel Lineup ................................................................................ 8-19
Duplicate, Edit and Build a VCM .................................................................................. 8-19
Lab Exercise 8 .................................................................................................................. 8-21
Change a Virtual Channel Lineup ................................................................................ 8-21
Duplicate, Edit and Build a VCM .................................................................................. 8-21
Section 9 Manage Terminals

Terminal Overview ............................................................................................................ 9-2
Define Terminals in the Database ................................................................................... 9-2
Add a Terminal ............................................................................................................. 9-6
Authorize IPPV Events ................................................................................................. 9-8
Authorize Services for a Terminal ................................................................................ 9-9
Authorize a Terminal for a PPV Program ..................................................................... 9-10
Authorize a Package .................................................................................................... 9-12
Authorize Objects/Resources ...................................................................................... 9-13
Configure Transmission Parameters ........................................................................... 9-16
Initialize a Terminal ...................................................................................................... 9-18
Cold Initialize a Terminal .............................................................................................. 9-18
Refresh a Terminal ....................................................................................................... 9-20
Disconnect a Terminal ................................................................................................. 9-20
Clear a PIN ................................................................................................................... 9-21
Factory Reset ............................................................................................................... 9-22
Display Terminal Attributes .......................................................................................... 9-22
Clear Orphan Purchases ............................................................................................. 9-24

Contents ix
Define Multicast 16 Address Sets .................................................................................. 9-24

Convert Terminal Type .................................................................................................... 9-27
Define Terminal Attributes .............................................................................................. 9-30
Lab Exercise 9 .................................................................................................................. 9-37
Retrieve a terminal from the Database ........................................................................ 9-37
Disconnect and Reactivate a DCT .............................................................................. 9-37
Delete and Re-Authorize the VIP Package on a terminal ........................................... 9-38
Initialize a DCT ............................................................................................................ 9-38
Learning Exercise 9 ......................................................................................................... 9-39
Section 10 CableCARD/Host Support

CableCARD/Host Description ......................................................................................... 10-2
Copy Control Information (CCI) ................................................................................... 10-2
Copy Protection Management System (CPMS) .......................................................... 10-3
CableCARD/Host Pairing Information Screen ............................................................. 10-3
DAC 6000 Support for CableCARD/Host ....................................................................... 10-5
DAC 6000 Operations to Support CableCARD/Host ..................................................... 10-6
Add the CPMS IP Address into the hosts File ............................................................. 10-6
Define Terminal (CableCARD/Host) ............................................................................ 10-7
Terminal CableCARD/Host Report ................................................................................. 10-12
Section 11 Manage Operations

Manage Operations .......................................................................................................... 11-2
Define Operations ............................................................................................................ 11-2
Edit Refresh Operation Window .................................................................................. 11-6
Edit Poll Operation Windows ....................................................................................... 11-10
Purchase Poll Operation ....................................................................................... 11-10
Edit Chronic Non-Responding Tunable ....................................................................... 11-14
Edit Chronic Non-Responding Poll Operation Window ............................................... 11-15
Edit Flush and/or Fill Operation Window ..................................................................... 11-16
Control Operations .......................................................................................................... 11-17
Display Detail Operations Window .............................................................................. 11-21
Display Operation Statistics Window (Refresh or Global Auth Refresh) ..................... 11-24
Display Operation Statistics Window (Poll) ................................................................. 11-26
Learning Exercise 11 ....................................................................................................... 11-28
Lab Exercise 11 (Step-by-step) ....................................................................................... 11-29
Define Operations Purchase Poll ............................................................................. 11-29
Define Operations Diagnostic Poll ............................................................................ 11-29
Control Operations Purchase Poll & Diagnostic Poll ................................................ 11-30
Manage Reports Terminal Code Object ................................................................... 11-30
DCT App Code Modules Diagnostic ......................................................................... 11-30
Lab Exercise 11 ................................................................................................................ 11-31
Define Operations Purchase Poll ............................................................................. 11-31

x Contents
Define Operations Diagnostic Poll ............................................................................ 11-31

Control Operations Purchase Poll & Diagnostic Poll ................................................ 11-31
Manage Reports Terminal Code Object ................................................................... 11-31
DCT App Code Modules Diagnostic ......................................................................... 11-31
Section 12 Downloading Overview

Downloading Overview .................................................................................................... 12-2
Components of a Download Data Stream ................................................................... 12-2
Download Control Messages ....................................................................................... 12-2
Object Modules for Core Terminals ............................................................................. 12-3
Object Modules for Advanced Terminals ..................................................................... 12-3
Object Attributes ........................................................................................................... 12-4
Methods of Targeting Terminals for Downloads ........................................................... 12-5
Decoder Conditional ..................................................................................................... 12-5
Background Service ..................................................................................................... 12-5
OM 1000 ................................................................................................................ 12-5
Virtual Channel Map .............................................................................................. 12-5
Object Modules Types .................................................................................................. 12-5
Base Platform/Firmware ............................................................................................... 12-5
Applications .................................................................................................................. 12-5
Monolithic ..................................................................................................................... 12-6
Code Suite ................................................................................................................... 12-6
Object Assignment Options ............................................................................................ 12-6
Include Object (Core Terminals) .................................................................................. 12-6
Include Delete (Core Terminals) .................................................................................. 12-6
Delete Object (Both) ..................................................................................................... 12-6
Purge Object (Core Terminals) .................................................................................... 12-6
Include Base Platform (ASTB Terminals) .................................................................... 12-7
Include Base Platform Upgrade (ASTB Terminals) ..................................................... 12-7
Include ASTB Application Data Object (ASTB Terminals) ........................................... 12-7
Include Code Suite (Both) ............................................................................................ 12-7
Enable Object (Core Terminals) .................................................................................. 12-7
Disable Object (Core Terminals) .................................................................................. 12-7
Steps to Download to Terminals ..................................................................................... 12-8
Step 1 Add the Source(s) .............................................................................................. 12-9
Step 2 Add the Background Service(s) ....................................................................... 12-11
Step 3 - Add the Background Service(s) to the Virtual Channel Map(s) ..................... 12-17
Step 4 - Build the Virtual Channel Map(s) ...................................................................... 12-20
Step 5 Add / Load the Software Object(s) ................................................................... 12-22
Optional Step - Viewing the Objects Loaded onto the DAC 6000 ............................... 12-25
Step 6 Display the Software Object(s) Attributes ....................................................... 12-25
Step 7 - Download the Software Object(s) to the RADD 6000(s) ................. 12-28
Optional Step - Display Object Load Status ................................................................ 12-30

Contents xi
Step 8 Add the Code Suite(s) [if desired] ................................................................... 12-32

Step 9 Download the Code Suite(s) to the RADD(s) [if required] ............................ 12-38
Step 10 - Define the Decoder Conditional(s) [if required] ............................................ 12-41
Define Decoder Conditional ........................................................................................ 12-41
Step 11 - Assign the Software Object(s) ........................................................................ 12-43
Step 12 - Load the Object Assignment(s) to the RADD 6000(s) ..................... 12-51
Methods to Check, Monitor and Control a Download .................................................. 12-52
Display Object Load Status ......................................................................................... 12-52
Display Detail Assignment ........................................................................................... 12-54
Control Operations ...................................................................................................... 12-56
DCT 2500 Download Lab ................................................................................................. 12-57
Step 1 - Add the Sources ............................................................................................ 12-57
Step 2 - Add Background Services ............................................................................. 12-57
Step 3 - Add the Background Services to the Virtual Channel Map ........................... 12-59
Step 4 - Build the Virtual Channel Map ....................................................................... 12-60
Step 5 Add/Load the Software Objects .................................................................... 12-60
Step 6 Display the Software Objects Attributes ....................................................... 12-61
Step 7 - Download the Software Objects to the RADD 6000 ...................................... 12-63
Step 8 Add the Core Code Suite .............................................................................. 12-64
Step 9 Download the Core Code Suite to the RADD ............................................... 12-65
Step 10 - Define the Decoder Conditional ................................................................... 12-66
Step 11 - Assign the Software Objects ........................................................................ 12-66
Step 12 - Load the Object Assignments to the RADD 6000 ....................................... 12-67
Check, Monitor and Control the Downloads ................................................................. 12-67
Control Operations ...................................................................................................... 12-68
Step 1 - Add the Sources ............................................................................................ 12-69
Step 2 - Add Background Services ............................................................................. 12-69
Step 3 - Add the Background Services to the Virtual Channel Map ........................... 12-70
Step 4 - Build the Virtual Channel Map ....................................................................... 12-71
Step 5 Add/Load the Software Objects .................................................................... 12-72
Step 6 Display the Software Objects Attributes ....................................................... 12-72
Step 7 - Download the Software Objects to the RADD 6000 ...................................... 12-75
Step 8 Add the Advanced Code Suite ...................................................................... 12-76
Step 9 Download the Advanced Code Suite to the RADD ....................................... 12-77
Step 10 - Define the Decoder Conditional ................................................................... 12-78
Step 11 - Assign the Software Objects ........................................................................ 12-78
Step 12 - Load the Object Assignments to the RADD 6000 ....................................... 12-79
Check, Monitor and Control the Downloads ................................................................. 12-80

xii Contents

Control Operations ....................................................................................................... 12-82
Section 13 OCAP Overview

OCAP Overview ................................................................................................................ 13-2
OCAP Server Connectivity ........................................................................................... 13-2
OCAP Downloads ............................................................................................................. 13-3
Steps to Configure a OCAP Common Download on the DAC ..................................... 13-3
Steps to Configure an OCAP Application Download on the DAC ............................... 13-3
Add a Common OCAP Object ......................................................................................... 13-4
Assign the OCAP Object .................................................................................................. 13-7
Load the OCAP Common Object Assignment to the RADD 6000(s) ...................... 13-13
Methods to Check, Monitor and Control a Download ................................................... 13-15
Add an Application OCAP Object ................................................................................... 13-17
Add the OCAP Suite ......................................................................................................... 13-22
Assign the OCAP Object .................................................................................................. 13-24
Load the OCAP Application Object Assignment to the RADD 6000(s) ....................... 13-29
Methods to Check, Monitor and Control a Download ................................................... 13-31
Section 14 System Maintenance

Recommended Activities ................................................................................................. 14-2
Daily - Backup Database Files ..................................................................................... 14-2
Prepare for Database Backups ............................................................................. 14-2
Schedule Automatic Database Backups ............................................................... 14-4
Disable Automatic Database Backups .................................................................. 14-5
Perform a Manual Database Backup .................................................................... 14-6
Verify a Backup ..................................................................................................... 14-6
Check Timestamp of a Tape ................................................................................. 14-6
Daily Restore Database Backup Tape to Spare DAC (if applicable) ........................ 14-7
Weekly - Optimize Database (DB Maintenenace) ....................................................... 14-7
Schedule an Automatic DB Maintenance .............................................................. 14-8
Disable Automatic DB Maintenance ...................................................................... 14-9
Perform a Manual DB Maintenance ...................................................................... 14-10
Weekly - Clean the Tape-Drive Heads ........................................................................ 14-10
DAT Tape Drive ..................................................................................................... 14-10
Monthly - Perform a DAC 6000 System Backup .......................................................... 14-11
Monthly - Perform a DAC 6000 UKL Backup ............................................................... 14-12
Other Procedures ............................................................................................................. 14-12
Check Scheduled Operations/Scripts .......................................................................... 14-12

Contents xiii
Appendix A Linux Command Summary
Appendix B Generate Reports

Reports Overview ............................................................................................................ B-2
Available Reports ........................................................................................................ B-2
Select and Display a Report ........................................................................................ B-8
Print a Report .............................................................................................................. B-9
Save a Report .............................................................................................................. B-9
Appendix C Manage Time Zones

Define Time Zone Window .............................................................................................. C-2
Add a User Defined Time Zone ................................................................................... C-4
Copy Time Zone ............................................................................................................... C-5
Assign DAC Time Zone ................................................................................................... C-7
Display Time Zone Information ...................................................................................... C-8
Terminal Attributes .......................................................................................................... C-11
Display Time Zone Information ...................................................................................... C-14
Glossary
Acronym List .................................................................................................................... 1
Definitions of Terms ........................................................................................................ 11

Introduction
Audience
The intended audience for this course is personnel who are responsible for operating and
maintaining the DAC 6000 digital addressable controller system.
Prerequisites
Before attending this course, participants should have experience with and a working
knowledge of:
PC Operations
Cable Addressability Theory
Objectives
This training course provides five days of theory, operations, and maintenance of the Motorola
DAC 6000 digital addressable controller. In addition to classroom theory and instructor-led
discussions, lab exercises are used to reinforce the learning process.
Materials
During the course, you will be provided the following materials:
Basic DAC 6000 (V3.1) Operation Training Manual
Various handouts
Course Completion Certificate
Basic DAC 6000 (V3.1) Operation, Rev 1.2

0-ii Introduction
Agenda
The training materials, software, and hardware are continually being updated and improved.
As a result, the content and/or structure of this course change to reflect these improvements.
Day 1
Topic
Registration/Introduction/Agenda Review
Section 1: Digital Addressable System Overview
Section 2: Data Communications and Networking Principles
Section 3: Manage System and Users
Section 4: Business System Overview
Day 1 Review/Questions and Answers
Day 2
Topic
Review of Day 1
Section 5: Define and Configure Devices
Section 6: Manage Plants & Device Linkage
Section 7: Schedule Services and Programs

Introduction 0-iii
Day 3
Topic
Review of Day 2
Section 7: Schedule Services and Programs (continued)
Section 8: Manage Channel Maps
Section 9: Manage Terminals
Section 10: CableCARD/Host Support
Day 4
Topic
Review of Day 3
Section 11: Manage Operations
Section 12: Downloading Overview
Section 13: OCAP Overview
Day 5
Topic
Review of Day 4
Section 14: Operating Recommendations
Final Lab
Course Completion Certificate

Section 1
Digital Addressable System Overview
After completing this section of the course, you will be able to:
Name the benefits associated with digital technology
Define the functions of the DAC 6000/RADD 6000
Identify the devices contained in the digital headend
Trace the digital signal path through the system, from the uplink facility to the customer site
and back to the addressable controller

1-2 Digital Addressable System Overview
An Introduction to Digital Technology

The digital television delivery is a system designed to provide customers with increased
channel capacity beyond what is currently available using standard analog technology. Recent
advancements in digital technology enable cable system operators to provide:
Increased channel capacity through digital compression. This feature enables
supporting multiple video programming services in the space allotted for each 6
MHz-wide channel.
A combination of traditional (analog) services and new (digital) services
Efficient bandwidth usage
Significantly more viewing options
Improved picture quality and consistency due to robustness of the digital signal
Enhanced CD-quality digital audio services
Interactive/Electronic Program Guide (I/EPG)
Video On Demand (VOD)
A network platform for future customer-driven products and services
Digital Signal Conversion and Compression

During the analog-to-digital conversion process, signals are converted into bits (1, 0). These
bits correspond to a particular voltage in time. The digital television signal is comprised of
information data in the form of a string of bits (such as 11001010...), where 1 represents a high
voltage state and 0 represents a low voltage state. The strings of bits are then digitally
compressed into a small spectrum using a complex mathematical algorithm.
Digital compression is the process of reducing the storage space and/or transmission data rate
necessary to store and/or transmit information represented in a digital format. Common digital
compression methods include suppressing long strings of 1s or 0s, delta transmission (only
sending information about the difference between signals sampled at two successive periods of
time), and, for video applications, matching the characteristics of picture quality to the
limitations of the human eye.
The digital signals are encoded and encrypted for secure transmission over a conventional cable
television distribution system.

Digital Addressable System Overview 1-3
Digital Television Delivery System Overview

A digital television delivery system consists of an uplink facility, a satellite, a
downlink/headend facility, the distribution system, and the customer site.
Figure 1-1 Digital System Uplink/Downlink Diagram
1 At the uplink facility, channel programming signals are processed (encoded, encrypted,
compressed, etc.) for satellite transmission.
2 From a geostationary orbit 22,300 miles above Earth, a communications satellite receives
the signals in the C-band range of 5.9 to 6.4 GHz or Ku-band range of 14.0 to 14.5 GHz.
Using directional antennas, the signals are relayed to digital headend facilities in a range of
either 3.7 to 4.2 GHz (C-band) or 11.7 to 12.2 GHz (Ku-band). A transponder on-board the
satellite handles the frequency conversion.
3 At the local digital headend facility, an Earth Station Antenna (ESA) receives the signals.
A Low-Noise Block downconverter (LNB) downconverts the digital signal to L-band (950
to 1450 MHz) and routes it to the signal processing equipment in the digital headend.

Digital Headend Facility and Customers Home

Each digital headend receives programming and access control signals from the satellite via an
earth station antenna. The signals are downconverted using a low-noise block downconverter
(LNB), then processed for distribution to customers. Signal processing equipment used in the
headend facility and the customers home can consist of the following:
SmartStream Device Manager (SDM) - enables setting default configurations for
headend devices over a local area network (LAN). The SDM acts as a server. You use
the SDM to download firmware, assign IP addresses and set start-up parameters for
various headend devices. In addition to configuration capabilities the SDM is used to
monitor the status of the headend devices.
Ethernet Hub - provides a communications path for devices interconnected on a LAN
(for example, the headend LAN).
Digital Satellite Receiver (DSR) - receives a Quadrature Phase Shift-Key (QPSK)
modulated L-band input from an LNB and transcodes the signal to an ASI signal. The
DSR also decrypts the satellite signal.
SmartStream Encryptor Modulator - can receive Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI)
input(s) from satellite receiver(s) and encrypt, modulate (64/256 QAM) and upconvert
the signal(s) for output to the cable system.
Modular Processing System (MPS) [B configuration] or Integrated Receiver
Transcoder (IRT 1000/2000) - receives a Quadrature Phase Shift-Key (QPSK)
modulated L-band input from an LNB and transcodes the signal to a 64/256 QAM, 6
MHz-wide signal. The MPS or IRT also decrypts the satellite signal and then can
re-encrypt the signal to secure it for cable distribution.
Commander 6/8 Upconverter (C6/8U) - receives a 64/256 QAM-modulated IF input
and upconverts it to RF for transmission to customers.
Billing/Business System - a computer system that has a database of subscribers, their
services and their terminals. It generates subscriber bills and is physically connected to
the DAC 6000 typically using a modem. The Billing/Business System sends
instructions to the DAC 6000 for it to execute (i.e. authorize a service for a subscriber
terminal).
Digital Addressable Controller (DAC 6000) - addresses and controls headend
equipment and terminals. The DAC 6000 authorizes terminals for services and collects
purchases from two-way set-top terminals.
KeyList Server (KLS) - verifies terminals and authenticates purchases. Its primary role
is to ensure system security.
Remote Addressable DANIS/DLS (RADD 6000) - is a headend device that works in
conjunction with the DAC 6000 to manage terminals. It executes various real-time
message operations such as polling and downloads to terminals.

Out-of-Band Modulator (OM 1000) - converts the control data digital input stream to
an RF output signal that is transmitted to customer terminals over an out-of-band
(OOB) cable frequency between 71 129 MHz. The OOB data stream can also include
other types of information, such as guide data and downloadable objects.
Analog System - provides scrambled and unscrambled analog services to both analog
and digital terminals. The analog system is comprised of a separate analog addressable
controller and analog headend equipment.
Note: The analog controller addresses analog terminals only. The digital addressable
controller addresses digital terminals only.
RF Combiner - combines multiple input streams from headend devices onto a single
RF output.
Diplex Filter - High Low Band Pass Filter used for RF Return.
Modem - on the transmitting side, it converts a digital signal into an analog signal for
transmission over telephone lines. On the receiving side, it converts the analog signal
back to a digital signal. The name modem is derived from modulation/demodulation.
Modems are used at the headend location to support the communication of purchases
from DCTs using STARFONE modules.
Return Path Demodulator (RPD 1000/2000) - receives, demodulates, and processes
RF upstream data from terminals and returns data to the NC 1500.
Network Controller (NC 1500) - acts as an IP gateway between two networks. They are
the application server network and Operations Administration Maintenance and
Provisioning network (OAM&P). The NC 1500 is used in digital cable networks that
support interactive communications such as video on demand (VOD).
Digital Consumer Terminal (DCT) - decompresses and decrypts digital signals, and
unscrambles analog signals, then presents them for viewing. DCTs can be one-way,
two-way. Two-way means communication is supported not only out to a DCT but also
back from that DCT.
CableCARD/Host - the host (set-top or integrated TV) provides generic cable tuning
and decoding capabilities. The removable CableCARD security module provides the
cable operators proprietary conditional access support and network messaging.
Copy Protection Management System (CPMS) a Motorola subsystem that supports
requests for the creation of copy protection validation messages intended for
CableCARD modules.

Digital Addressable System Overview

The digital addressable system consists of the following:
Business System
Digital Addressable Controller (DAC 6000)
Remote Addressable DANIS/DLS (RADD 6000)
KeyList Server (KLS)
Business System
Serial RS-232 and/or TCP interface to the DAC 6000
WireLink 600 & 700 series command support
Basic DAC 6000/RADD 6000 Functions

Authorizes video and audio services and operating features for DCTs.
Facilitates secure delivery of services.
Provides an interface to business systems for provisioning and inventory management.
- Business System Interface (BSI)
Maintains a database of terminal and headend equipment operating parameters.
Manages service databases and automated scheduling of services, including
subscriptions, IPPV and call-ahead pay-per-view (CAPPV).
Collects impulse transactions from terminals and transmits them to the business system.
Monitors the terminal population.
Supports virtual channels in the digital multiplex.
DAC 6000 Compatible Hardware

HP PL ML 570 (Three 3.6 GHz), HP PL ML 570 (Dual 2.7 GHz), HP PL ML 530
(Dual 3 GHz), Compaq Proliant ML570 (700 MHz)
ML 570 G3 Hardware Platform

Three Intel XeonTM 3.66GHz-1MB CPUs
5GB PC2-3200R memory
Four 36GB 15K RPM Ultra320 hard drives
Smart Array 6402 caching RAID controller

36/72GB DAT drive

Three 10/100/1000 NICs
Redundant fans and power supplies
HP 17 LCD monitor
4 year warranty
DAC 6000 Operating Software

Operating System: SUSE Linux Enterprise Version
Databases: Sybase System 12.5 High Performance SQL-Based Engine
Graphical User Interface (GUI): OSF/Motif and X-Windows Environment
Networking Protocols: TCP/IP, UDP/IP, SNMP

Occupies 1 rack unit in a standard equipment rack
Provides data and keys to encrypt and decrypt the digital cable signals

Learning Exercise 1
Circle the letter that corresponds to the most correct answer for each statement.
1 The SEM V8 is capable of doing all of the following operations except:
a. Decryption
b. Encryption
c. Modulation
d. Upconversion
2 The DCT (with STARVUE) upstream frequency range is:
a. 8 to 15 MHz
b. 50 to 1000 MHz
c. 8 to 12 MHz
d. 10 to 25 MHz
3 The SDM is used to:

a. establish and maintain communication between the headend and the DAC 6000
b. configure headend equipment
c. multiplex information between headend equipment
d. assign encryption keys
4 Which device is not connected to the Ethernet network?

a. MPS
b. DAC 6000
c. OM 1000
d. C6/8U
5 The RADD performs all of the following tasks except:

a. Downloads platform code to DCTs
b. Transmits initialization commands to DCTs
c. Transmits polls to two-way DCTs
d. Downloads platform code to headend devices

6 One of the DAC 6000 functions is:

a. upconverting an IF signal to an RF signal
b. acting as an IP gateway between two networks
c. authorizing video and audio services for DCTs
d. decrypting incoming multiplexes
7 Encryption key distribution and authentications are handled by the:

a. KLS 1000
b. RPD 1000/2000
c. OM 1000
d. IRT 1000/2000
8 The digital video signal does not pass through which device?
a. RADD 6000
b. IRT 1000/2000
c. C6/8U
d. Both A and C
9 Which digital headend devices handle the in-band (QAM) signal?

a. MPS or IRT and OM
b. MPS or IRT and C6/8U
c. MPS or IRT and KLS
d. MPS or IRT and RPD
10 The output of the OM 1000 is:

a. 64 QAM, 44 MHz IF
b. 64 QAM, 50-1000 MHz IF
c. QPSK, 71-129 MHz
d. QPSK, 950 to 1450 MHz

Section 2
Data Communications and Networking
Principles
Explain the addressing scheme for Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP) and User Datagram Protocol (UDP)
Identify a Media Access Control (MAC) address
Describe the use of Packet Identifiers (PIDs) in MPEG packets

2-2 Data Communications and Networking Principles
Local Area Network (LAN) Overview

Local area networks enable multiple devices to be interconnected for the purposes of
communicating and exchanging data. A device with the proper software communicates across
the network by placing data in a packet, somewhat like an electronic envelope, and then
addressing that packet to a specific destination (device) on the network.
Communications software on both the source and destination devices facilitates delivery of
these packets. Once a packet reaches its destination, the device reads the address and receives
the data contained in the packets.
Many devices in the digital headend are connected to an Ethernet hub, which enables them to
exchange commands and data with other equipment on the LAN. To ensure the integrity of the
data, and to make sure data is routed to the correct destination, several types of standard data
exchange protocols are used.
In the digital headend, data is routed to and from equipment by means of requests, replies, and
messages.
Ethernet Description
Ethernet is one of the most popular cabling and signaling network schemes in use today. It is
the hardware protocol that enables devices connected in a LAN to communicate. Xerox
Corporation developed the original Ethernet specification, and then they developed a second
version (Ethernet II) in cooperation with Digital Equipment Corporation and Intel Corporation.
The International Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) used Ethernet to develop the
802.3 standard.
Frames of data are moved between ports entirely by electronic logic. Ethernet hardware
ensures that only one device on the network can communicate at a time. It uses Carrier Sense
Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD).
Carrier Sense Multiple Access - A device (or station) checks the wire to see if any
other device is already sending data. If idle, the device can begin to send data.
Collision Detection - If two or more devices try to communicate at the same time, a
collision occurs. Random delay periods before re-transmission are enacted.
Figure 2-1 Ethernet Frame Description

Data Communications and Networking Principles 2-3
Preamble A series of alternating 1s and 0s used by the Ethernet

receiver to acquire bit synchronization.
Start of Frame (SoF) Two consecutive 1 bits used to acquire byte alignment.
Destination Address MAC address of the intended receiver. The broadcast
address is all ones.
Source Address The unique Media Access Control (MAC) address of the
sending station.
Type/Length of Field (LoF) For IEEE 802.3 this is the number of bytes of data, which
can be a maximum of 1500. For Ethernet I and II this is
the type of packet. Types codes are > 1500 to allow both
to coexist. The type code for IP packets is 0x800.
Data This field can be 46 (minimum) to 1500 (maximum) bytes
long. Short packets must be padded to 46 bytes.
Frame Check Sequence (FCS) A 32-bit Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) calculated using
the contents of the addresses, type/LOF, and data fields.
Protocols
Protocols are standard sets of procedures that enable network devices to communicate with one
another. Software networking protocols can run above the Ethernet protocol, for example,
Internet Protocol (IP). Additional software protocols can also run above IP, such as
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and User Datagram Protocol (UDP).
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) - a software protocol used to
transport data packets via Ethernet to various devices interconnected in a LAN. TCP/IP is
typically used as a data transport protocol because it provides end-to-end reliability for
hosts. The TCP/IP software focuses most of its reliability control in the transport of data,
including the detection/recovery of datagram loss; the transmission duplicate packets;
time-outs; acknowledgments; flow control; and checksums.
Figure 2-2 TCP Packet Diagram

User Datagram Protocol/Internet Protocol (UDP/IP) - a transmission protocol that

creates a single packet. It does not provide error correction capabilities. UDP uses port
numbers so that several applications can use UDP at one time. It requires no pre-established
connections. It is similar to postal services in that it does not guarantee delivery because
there is no mechanism to verify that the datagram was received.
Source Port (16 Bits) Destination Port (16 Bits)
Length (16 Bits) Checksum (16 Bits)
Data
Figure 2-3 UDP Packet Diagram
Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) - used to transfer file remotely.

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) - a network management protocol. The
specification is comprised of three parts: SNMP protocol, Management Information Base
(MIB), and the Specification for Management Information (SMI). Three basic ingredients
are administration, monitoring, and control of devices on the network.
TELNET - a standard remote login protocol that provides a remote terminal connection.
TELNET provides many remote terminal services, including the ability to run programs
remotely and the interactive access to the remote operating system and system calls. A
TELNET session also allows virtual terminal service that emulates different terminal types.
PING - a utility for testing the viability of a network connection. A failed PING to an IP
address indicates that there is a network connection problem.
Addressing Schemes
Each network element or device is assigned a unique address.
MAC Address
The Media Access Control (MAC) address is the proprietary serial number assigned to each
Ethernet network device to identify it on the network for upstream/downstream
communications. With Ethernet devices, this address is permanently set when the device is
manufactured.
Each device has a unique MAC address, so that it will be able to exclusively grab packets off
the wire meant for it. If MAC addresses are not unique, there is no way to distinguish between
two stations. Devices on the network watch network traffic and look for their own MAC
address in each packet to determine whether they should decode it or not. Special
circumstances exist for broadcasting to every device.

MAC addresses are exactly 6 bytes in length, and are usually written in hexadecimal. Each
manufacturer of Ethernet devices applies for a certain range of MAC addresses they can use.
The first three bytes of the address determine the manufacturer.
Sample MAC address (in hexadecimal):

XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX
Sample MAC address for Motorola BCS:
00:20:40:00:F2:1A
\______/ \_______/
Motorola CHS Unique
Figure 2-4 Sample MAC Address
Note: The colons may be omitted, but generally make the address more readable.
IP Address
IP address is a 32-bit identifier written in dotted-decimal notation. It is typically displayed in a
format of four decimal integers separated by periods. Each field represents 8 of the 32 bits and
can contain values ranging from 0 to 255. An example of an IP address is:
Sample IP address:
163.1.50.10
Figure 2-5 Sample IP Address
Currently, there are five classes of IP addresses. Classes help define the amount of networks
and hosts to be supported. An IP address consists of 2 parts: the network address (NetID) and
the host address (HostID).

Address Classifications
There are five classes of IP addresses. The most commonly used class is Class B.
Address Network Range Host Range

Classification
Class A 1. 126.* 0.0.1 255.255.254

Class B 128.0. 191.255. 0.1 - 255.254
Class C 192.0.0. 223.255.255. 1 - 254
Class D 224. 239. N/A
Class E N/A N/A
* 127 is used for software loop-back.
Figure 2-6 IP Address Classifications with Network and Host Ranges
Figure 2-7 IP Address Classifications

IP Broadcast Addresses
Broadcast messages are messages that are addressed to every host on the network. A host will
process both messages with its unique IP address and those with a valid broadcast address. A
message can be broadcast to all hosts within a subnet and to all subnets within a network.
To broadcast a message to all hosts on all subnets in a specified network, the host and the
subnet portions of the address contain all ones. To broadcast to all hosts within a single subnet,
the host portion contains all ones
Network = 163.104. Subnet = .3
Broadcast address to use to address all hosts on all subnets = 163.104.255.255
Broadcast address to use to address all hosts on the .3 subnet only = 163.104.3.255
Figure 2-8 Example IP Broadcast Addresses
UDP Ports
UDP ports are used to identify from where the datagram was sent and to where it will be
routed. The UDP header consists of the following four fields:
Source Port (Calling Port Number)
Destination Port (Called Port Number)
Length
CheckSum (for the UDP header)
UDP port assignments for standard Motorola BCS equipment are as follows:
Device UDP Port Number
DAC 6000 51
IRT 1000/2000 54
NC 1500 56
OM 1000 57
RPD 1000/2000 58
MPS/SEM 60
RADD 6000 61
CS 1000 65
Figure 2-9 UDP Port Assignments
Note: During the OM 1000 configuration process, you are required to set up UDP ports.

Data Transports
MPEG-2 Compression Transport

The Motion Pictures Expert Group (MPEG) is the organization that produces standards for the
transmission of digital video programs. MPEG2 is an international standard for delivering
compressed digital video. It defines the structure by which a collection of video, audio, and
data streams are multiplexed together for transmission over an access network, or stored in a
bulk-storage device for subsequent play-back.
MPEG-2 is a flexible packet-based structure that enables the evolution to a switched
architecture. Digital video compression maps directly into the MPEG-2 transport format.
MPEG-2 packets are formed to carry audio, video, and data. Packets are assigned unique
packet identification (PID) numbers.
188 Bytes
4 Bytes 184 Bytes

Header Payload/Data
(Includes PID #)
Figure 2-10 Sample MPEG-2 Packet
The PID number assignment enables a device to identify the information stream to which it
belongs. A PID number is assigned in the packet header, and all packets from the same stream
have the same PID number.
The PID0 stream provides multiplex definition information for a transport multiplex. It carries
the Program Association Table (PAT). The PAT contains all services in the multiplex and the
PID numbers of the service control channel for all data streams that construct each service.
PID1 is the control stream that points to data streams containing access control information for
the high-speed transport multiplex (HSTM). PID1 also carries the Conditional Access Table
(CAT). The CAT contains the PID numbers for all Entitlement Management Messages (EMM)
streams in the multiplex, as well as the provider ID associated with each EMM stream.

Transport Stream Organization
Program Association Table (PAT)
The Program Association Table (PAT) relates program numbers (MPEG Service
numbers) to their Program Map Table (PMT) Program Identification (PID).
The first column (Prog#) represents the MPEG Service number (this is also known as
the program number). The second column (PMT PID) represents the PMT PID, which
uniquely identifies the map table for each program.
Figure 2-11 Program Association Table (PAT)

Program Map Table
Each program has a PMT, which contains information about each elementary portion of
the program.
The Packet ID shows the PMT PID number, which uniquely identifies the map table for
a program.
The Program box shows for which program information is displayed.
The Type column shows if each Packetized Elementary Stream (PES) contains video,
primary audio, secondary audio, or data.
The PES PID column shows the Program Identification (PID) number of each
Packetized Elementary Stream that belongs to the program.
Figure 2-12 Program Map Table (PMT)

Packetized Elementary Streams (PES)
The following figure relates the Program Association Table (PAT) and Program Map
Table (PMT) described on the previous pages to the Packetized Elementary Streams
that make up programs.
Each PMT PID shown in the PAT (left side of the figure) represents a PMT.
Each PES PID shown in the PMT (center of the figure) represents a single PES.
Packetized Elementary Streams (PES) are the building blocks of programs. They
provide the video, audio, and text streams that combine to create a program.
Figure 2-13 Packetized Elementary Streams (PES)

Learning Exercise 2
T = true statement F = false statement
1 An example of a valid MAC address is 00:20:40:00:F2:1A.
2 The Class C IP network address range is 194.0.0 - 223.255.255.
3 PID 0 stream contains the Program Association Table (PAT).
4 UDP port number 54 is the assigned port for an OM 1000.
5 The Ethernet (hardware) frame destination and source address

are MAC addresses.
6 The UDP/IP protocol is more reliable than TCP/IP.
7 Ethernet hardware uses CSMA/CD.
8 TELNET is a standard protocol used to transfer files remotely.
9 A MAC address is a 6 byte identifier.
10 An IP address is a 32 bit identifier.

Section 3
Manage System and Users
After completing this segment of the training course, you will be able to:
Perform the steps necessary to log on to or off of the DAC 6000 (Main Menu)
Create a group
Add a user to the DAC 6000 database
Add a remote user to the DAC 6000 database
Shutdown the DAC 6000 application and the system using the GUI
Edit the hosts file

3-2 Manage System and Users
Start the GUI and Log On to the Controller Application

To start the GUI and log on:
1 Position the cursor in the gray area of the window and click the left mouse button. The
Root Menu is displayed.
2 Select Start GUI. The DAC 6000 Login window is displayed.

Manage System and Users 3-3
3 In the User Name field, type your user name and then press the Tab key.
4 In the Password field, type your password and then click Accept to start the application.
The DAC 6000 Main Menu is displayed.
Log Off the DAC 6000

To log off the DAC 6000:
1 In the DAC 6000 Main Menu, click Log Out.
2 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes.

Help Screens
Pressing any of the Help buttons will launch an instance of the mozilla browser which will
display a help page appropriate for the current DAC 6000 GUI screen. The help pages are
released as a series of HTML files based on the DAC 6000 operators manuals from the
Technical Publications group. The HTML files are installed on the DAC 6000 in the directory
$HOME/Documents/WebHelp. The DAC 6000 install/upgrade scripts load a single zip file
containing all the HTML files, and unzip it into the above directory. Some of the help pages
contain links to other pages in the help set. Click on the link to follow it to the referenced page.
Click on the browser's back button to return to the original page. Some pages have a link
labeled "Show" in the upper left corner of the page. Clicking on the "Show" link will bring up a
help task bar at the top of the page and a Table of Contents navigation pane at the left of the
page. Every help page in the help set is accessible from the Table of Contents navigation pane.
The Contents pane can be changed to an Index pane or a Search pane by clicking on buttons in
the help task bar.

Manage Users
The DAC 6000 enables you to control access to your system by managing user group
permissions. Each user group has a set of permissions that you can change through the Manage
Users option on the Manage Controller option of the DAC 6000 Main Menu.
You can change, add, and delete existing groups and users to create a user database that
matches your specific needs. For example, you can create a group named operators, specify
the functions for that group through the User Permissions window, and then add users to that
group who perform only those functions.
The DAC 6000 has four default user groups. The four case-sensitive group names and their
login names are:
System Group Default Login Name
system supervisor1
operation operator1
dispatch dispatcher1
factory factory1
Note: The supervisor user and the group name (system) and its associated permissions cannot
be deleted.
In the DAC 6000 Main Menu, click Manage Controller to display the Manage Controller
window.

Define a Group
The Define Group function enables you to:
Add a user group and configure permissions for that group.
Configure permissions for an existing group of users.
Add and Configure a New User Group

To add a new group:
1 In the Manage Controller window, click Manage Users.
2 In the Manage Users window, click Define Group to display the Define Group window:

This window contains the following fields:

Name This 40 character alphanumeric field identifies the group.
Define This option displays the Define Permissions window. The default for
Permissions new groups is no permissions.
3 Click Add to enable the Name field, and then type the new group name.
4 Click Accept to enable Define Permissions.
5 Click Define Permissions to display the Define Permissions window:

The permissions displayed on this window correspond directly to the operational windows
of the DAC 6000 GUI. If you disable a permission in this window, that permission is
disabled for any user defined as part of the group identified in the Name field of this
window.
There are three levels for the permissions list. Disabling a higher level permission also
disables all permissions controlled by it. For example, if you disable Manage Terminals, all
of the operations that can be accessed through the Manage Terminals window are also
disabled.
If you enable Manage Terminals and disable Define Terminal, any operation on the Manage
Terminals window will be accessible except Define Terminal and any operation that can be
accessed through Define Terminal.
6 Click the button next to a function to enable/disable it. When the button is dark, the
permission is enabled (on). Use the scroll bar to view the list of permissions.
7 Click Accept to update the database and redisplay the Define Group window.
Change Permissions for a User Group

To change permissions for a user group:
1 In the Manage Users window, click Define Group to display the Define Group window:

2 Click Select and then click Name to display the Zoom: System Group Names window:
3 Click the System Group Name to be modified and then click Accept to display the Define
Group window with the Name field enabled.
5 Click Define Permissions to display the Define Permissions window.
6 Click the button next to a function to enable or disable it. When the button is dark, the
permission is enabled (on).
7 Click Accept to update the database.

Define Users
You can add a new user or change information for an existing user through the Define User
window. Each user must be associated with a user group and issued a password.
Add a New User

To add a new user:
1 In the Manage Controller window, click Manage Users.
2 In the Manage Users window, click Define User to display the Define User window.
This window displays the following fields:
Name This 40-character alphanumeric field identifies the user.

Password This 40-character alphanumeric field identifies a password for this user.
Confirm This field enables you to confirm the password by typing it again.
Password
Group Name This 40-character alphanumeric field identifies the group that includes
this user.

3 Click Add to enable the Name field.

4 Type the new user name in the Name field.
5 Type a password for the new user in the Password field.
6 Type the password again in the Confirm Password field.
7 Click Group Name to display the Zoom: System Group Names window:
8 Click on the System Group Name to which you are adding this user and then click Accept
to display the Define User window.
10 Click Exit.
Change an Existing User

To change information for an existing user:
1 In the Manage Users window, click Define User to display the Define User window.
2 Click Select and then click Name to display the Zoom: User Names window:

3 Click the name of the user to be changed and then click Accept. The Define User window
is displayed.
4 Click Accept.
5 Click Change and make the changes to the user password or group selection.
7 Click Exit.
Note: You cannot change the group assigned to supervisor1.

Change a Password
To change your password:
1 Click Change Password to display the Change Password window.
2 Type the current password in the Old Password field and then press the Tab key to move
the cursor to the New Password field.
3 Type the New Password and then press the Tab key to move the cursor to the Confirm
Password field.
4 Type the new password again.
5 Click Accept to update the database and save the changes.

Define Remote Users

Each administrator and operator that requires remote logon access through a modem is assigned
user name and password from the Define Remote User window, which also provides the
capability to change an assigned password or delete a remote user. The password assigned from
the Define Remote User window is maintained in the database in encrypted format, which can
only be deciphered by the system.
DAC 6000 remote access through a modem is implemented with a text-based utility. The utility
is a DAC 6000 platform security enhancement that adds required secondary logon verification
after the initial operating system logon is completed. Escape to the Linux shell with Ctrl+C is
prohibited until the remote logon is also completed. The remote user is permitted three attempts
at system logon; after the third attempt fails, the logon session terminates and the failed logon
is recorded in a file in the DAC 6000.
Add a New Remote User

To add a new remote user:
1 In the Manage Controller window, click Define Remote Users to display the Define
Remote User window.
Name This 40-character alphanumeric field identifies the remote user.

Password This 40-character alphanumeric field identifies a password for this
remote user.

Confirm This field enables you to confirm the password by typing it again.
Password
2 Click Add to enable the Name field.

3 Type the remote user name in the Name field.
4 Type a password for the remote user in the Password field.
5 Type the password again in the Confirm Password field.
Change an Existing Remote User

To change an existing remote users password:
1 In the Manage Users window, click Define Remote User to display the Define Remote
User window.
2 Click Select and then click Name to display the Zoom: Remote Users Name field.
3 Click on the name of the remote user to be changed and then click Accept. The Define
Remote User window is displayed.
4 Click Accept.
5 Click Change and make the changes to the password.
7 Click Exit.
Delete a Remote User

To delete a remote user:
1 In the Manage Users window, click Define Remote User to display the Define Remote
User window.
2 Click Select and then click Name to display the Zoom: Remote Users Name field.

3 Click on the name of the remote user to be deleted and then click Accept. The Define
Remote User window is displayed.
4 Click Accept.
5 Click Delete. The system displays the following pop-up window:
6 Click Yes to delete the remote user.

7 Click Exit.

Remote Dial-In Login Sample

SCO OpenServer(TM) Release 5 (dac6000) (tty1A)
login: acc4000d
Password:
Last successful login for acc4000d: Mon Apr 26 13:56:44 2004 on tty1a
Last unsuccessful login for acc4000d: Tue Jan 18 17:26:50 2000
SCO OpenServer(TM) Release 5
(C) 1976-2000 The Santa Cruz Operation, Inc.

(C) 1980-1994 Microsoft Corporation
All rights reserved.
For complete copyright credits,

enter "copyrights" at the command prompt.
Tue Apr 27 16:55:21 EDT 2004
DAC login: jdoe@motorola.com

Password:
Login valid
Please enter the reason for the login.
Multiple lines are allowed; a blank line terminates entry.
> testing dialin capability
>
Terminal type is vt100
dac6000:/home/acc4000d% cd scripts
dac6000:/home/acc4000d/scripts% viewlog
(Note: Type viewlog to view the log file where remote user activity is recorded.)
Tue Apr 27 16:57:13 EDT 2004
DAC login: jdoe@motorola.com

Password:
Login valid

Please enter the reason for the login.

> viewing log
>
-----/home/acc4000d/data/.histlogin/.dac.1.log
2004-04-20 06:42:35.235 Login Attempt: tsmith@motorola.com - valid Motorola user, no lock-out file
2004-04-20 06:42:48.659 Login Success: tsmith@motorola.com - post upgrade assistance
2004-04-20 08:48:20.531 Login Success: tsmith@motorola.com - I'm back in
2004-04-20 09:43:30.746 Login Attempt: l - invalid username/password
2004-04-20 09:46:09.118 Login Success: tsmith@motorola.com - Getting upgrade files
2004-04-20 14:16:04.677 Login Attempt: g - valid Motorola user, no lock-out file
2004-04-20 14:16:08.087 Login Success: g - iiorgfuidsrgdrg
2004-04-20 14:31:06.373 Logout: g - checking on radd fill
2004-04-23 14:24:14.859 Login Success: tsmith@motorola.com - checking backup dac upgrade
2004-04-23 14:38:40.840 Logout: tsmith@motorola.com - pmts look ok
2004-04-26 12:49:31.571 Login Success: tsmith@motorola.com - post upgrade examination
2004-04-26 12:51:13.189 Logout: tsmith@motorola.com - done finished looking.
2004-04-26 12:57:19.551 Login Success: tsmith@motorola.com - check out gs_hboe irt status
2004-04-26 13:02:16.205 Logout: tsmith@motorola.com - I suspect that this is the backup DAC
2004-04-27 15:56:22.966 Login Attempt: jdoe@motorola.com - valid Motorola user, no lock-out file
2004-04-27 15:56:50.603 Login Success: jdoe@motorola.com - testing dialin capability
2004-04-27 15:57:49.881 Login Attempt: jdoe@motorola.com - valid Motorola user, no lock-out file
2004-04-27 15:58:11.091 Login Success: jdoe@motorola.com - viewing log
dac6000:/home/acc4000d/scripts% exit
dac6000:/home/acc4000d/scripts% logout
Please enter logout comments.
> goodbye
>
Logging out of dac6000...
<Your 'MODEM' connection has terminated>

Manage the System

Manage System options enable you to shut down only the DAC 6000 software application, or
shut down the entire DAC 6000 system.
Shut Down the DAC 6000 Application Software

To shut down the DAC 6000 application software:
1 In the Manage Controller window, click Manage System to display the Manage System
window.
2 In the Manage System menu, click Shutdown DAC 6000 to display the Shutdown
DAC 6000 prompt:
3 Click Yes to shut down the DAC 6000 application software.

An xterm window appears. You can monitor the application shutdown in the Logger
window. When the shut down is complete, the Logger window disappears.
To restart the DAC 6000 application, type start_acc& and then press ENTER in the xterm
window. You need to be in the /home/acc4000d/scripts directory.

Shut Down the System

To perform a system shut down:
1 In the Manage System window, click Shutdown System to display the Shutdown System
window:
Reboot This option reboots the system.

System NOW
Shutdown This option shuts down the system after the number of minutes entered in
System the Minutes Until field.
Minutes Until This field indicates the number of minutes that the controller waits until
shutting down. Enter a 0 if you want to perform an immediate shutdown.
2 Click an option on the Shutdown System window.

3 Enter a time in the Minutes Until field if selecting Shutdown System.
4 Click Accept.

Manage a Site
The Manage Site options enable you to display site information and open a system window.
Display Site Information

To display site information:
1 In the Manage Controller window, click Manage Site to display the Manage Site window:
2 In the Manage Site window, click Display Site Information to display the Display Site
Information window:
This window displays whether your system is a cable system or wireless system.

Open a System Window

To open a system window:
1 Click Open System Window to display an xterm window:
2 To close the system window, type exit at the prompt and then press ENTER.
When you open a system/xterm window, you are in the Linux operating system environment.
To work in the Linux environment you will need to know some Linux commands. Appendix A
in this manual is a short list of Linux commands.
Note: Linux is case sensitive.

Display the System hosts File

The hosts file contains the device name and associated IP address of all headend equipment
connected to the DAC 6000. Within the hosts file, all lines must be either comment lines or
data lines and each line must be terminated with a CR or a CR-LF. To enter a comment on a
line insert a # character before the comment. Data lines describe hosts using up to three fields
separated by any number of spaces or tabs.
First Field = IP address of network device
Second Field = Host name of network device
Third Field = Aliases for host (optional)
When you verify/edit the file, you will see lines similar to the ones below indicating IP
addresses, host names, aliases and comments for headend devices. Note that comments are for
informational purposes and are not used as values by the computer. When editing the hosts
file make sure you do not duplicate an IP address or an error will occur. It is also
recommended that the host name should be typed in both lower and uppercase letters so that it
can be resolved by either lower or uppercase entries.
To display the system hosts file, type cat /etc/hosts and then press ENTER. To edit the hosts
file, type emacs /etc/hosts and then press ENTER.
Sample Hosts File

#
# hosts This file describes a number of hostname-to-address
# mappings for the TCP/IP subsystem. It is mostly
# used at boot time, when no name servers are running.
# On small systems, this file can be used instead of a
# "named" name server.
# Syntax:
#
# IP-Address Full-Qualified-Hostname Short-Hostname
#
#127.0.0.1 localhost
# CPMS
165.137.106.11 cpms
# DAC 6000
165.137.104.10 dac6000 DAC6000
165.137.105.10 netcard2 NETCARD2
165.137.106.10 netcard3 NETCARD3
# IRTs
165.137.104.20 irt01 IRT01
# KLSs
165.137.105.40 kls001 KLS001
# MPSs
165.137.104.80 mps01 MPS01
# NCs
165.137.104.70 nc01 NC01
# OMs
165.137.104.30 om001 OM001

# PortServers
165.137.106.100 portserver PORTSERVER
# RADDs
165.137.106.200 radd001 RADD001
165.137.255.255 radd001BA #RADDs Broadcast Address
# DSG RADDs
165.137.104.222 radd002
224.10.10.100 radd002BA
# RPDs
165.137.104.60 rpd01 RPD01
# SEMs
165.137.104.90 sem01 SEM01
#
170.170.170.172 ecc sandiego # Encryption Control Center (ECC)

Edit Files Using emacs

The emacs editor is a graphical application. When adding a new headend device that will
interface with the DAC across the Ethernet network, it will be necessary to add an entry for it
in the hosts file. To invoke the application, open a System Window and then type emacs at the
prompt.
The emacs editor main menu consists of the following:

File, Edit, Options, Buffers, Tools & Help
Note: Always copy any file you intend to modify before making any changes. The Linux
command to copy is "cp {original file} {new file}." When copying the file, rename it to
something you can easily identify. For example, copy to a file of the same name but
with your initials as the extension. [cp hosts hosts.yih]

Compare Text Files

After you edit a file, it is recommended that you compare the original file to the edited file to
ensure that the edit was successful. One Linux command to compare the text is the diff
command. This command compares the content of two text files, and then displays all lines
that differ between the two files. If the two files are identical, then no output is displayed.
Command: diff file 1 file 2
Response: n1cn2 n1 = line numbers that differ in file 1

c = compare
a = append
d = difference
n2 = line numbers that differ in file 2
< text line from file 1 < (less than symbol) indicates text lines
belonging to file 1
-----
> text line from file 2 > (greater than symbol) indicates text lines
belonging to file 2
Example
Command: diff hosts hosts.bak

Response: 27d26
<165.137.104.61 rpd02 RPD02

PING
To do a quick check to confirm DAC to Headend device network connectivity, one can issue
the ping command. In a system window, type ping [host name or IP address]. To stop the
ping operation hold down both the Ctrl and C keys on the keyboard. A failed PING to an IP
address indicates that there is a possible network connection problem.
Sample of a Successful PING Operation
acc4000d@dac6000: /etc$ ping irt01

PING irt01 (165.137.104.20): 56 (84) bytes of data.
64 bytes from irt01 (165.137.104.20) : icmp_seq = 0 ttl = 255 time = 2.02 ms
-------irt01 ping statistics--------
4 packets transmitted, 4 received, 0% packet loss, time 3003ms
rtt min/avg/max/mdev = 0.315/0.750/2.025/0.736 ms

Lab Exercise 3 (Step-by-step)
Add a Group
To add a group to the database:
1 In the Main Menu, click Manage Controller.
2 Click Manage Users.
3 Click Define Group.
4 Click Add.
5 Type CSR in the Name field.
7 Click Define Permissions.
8 Enable Manage Terminals > Define Terminals, Manage Services > Define Digital Service
& Define Analog Service and Manage Reports. Disable all other menu options.
10 Click Exit to return to the Manage Users window.
Add and Test a User

To add a new user to the database:
1 In the Manage Users window, click Define User.
2 Click Add.
3 Type your initials in the Name field.
4 Type password in the Password and Confirm Password fields.
5 Click Group Name to display the Zoom:Group Name window.
6 Highlight CSR and click Accept.
8 Click Exit three times to return to the Main Menu.
9 Click Log Out.
10 Click Yes in the pop-up confirmation window.
11 Start the GUI by holding down the left mouse button and sliding down to the Root menu
selection to Start GUI. Release button when cursor is on the Start GUI selection.
12 Type your initials in the User Name field.
13 Type password in the Password field.
14 Click Accept.
15 The only available selections should be Manage Terminals, Manage Services, Manage

Reports, Help, Read Me and Log Out.

16 Click Log Out.
17 Click Yes in the pop-up confirmation window.
Add a Remote User

To add a new remote user to the database:
1 Select Start GUI from the Root Menu.
2 Type DAC6000 in the User Name field.
3 Type DAC6000 in the Password field.
4 Click Accept.
6 Click Manage Users.
7 In the Manage Users window, click Define Remote Users.
8 Click Add.
9 Type your initials in the Name field.
10 Type password in the Password and Confirm Password fields.
12 Click Exit until you return to the Main Menu.
13 Click Log Out.
14 Click Yes to log out.
Shut Down the DAC 6000 Application and Restart it

To shut down the DAC 6000 Application and then restart it:
1 Select Start GUI from the Root Menu.
2 Type DAC6000 in the User Name field.
3 Type DAC6000 in the Password field.
4 Click Accept.
6 Click Manage System.
7 Click Shutdown DAC 6000.
8 Click Yes in pop-up confirmation window.
Note: Wait until the shutdown completes. The Logger Window disappears when the
application shutdown is complete.

9 When the shutdown is complete, type start_acc& in the xterm window and then press
ENTER.
Shut Down the System and Restart it

To bring the system down and then restart it:
1 Log into the DAC 6000.
3 Click Manage System.
4 Click Shutdown System.
5 Enable Shutdown System button and type 0 in the Minutes Until field.
6 Click Accept.
7 Click Yes in pop-up confirmation window.
Note: System shutdown is complete when the system powers off.
8 Power off the DAC 6000.
9 Count to 10.
10 Power on the DAC 6000.
View the hosts file and ping the OM

To view the hosts file and then ping an OM:
3 Click Manage Site.
4 Click Open System Window.
5 Type cd /etc and then press ENTER.
6 Type pg hosts and then press ENTER.
7 To stop paging the hosts file, type q at the colon prompt and then press ENTER.
8 Type ping om001 and then press ENTER.
9 Hold down the Ctrl and C keys to stop the ping operation.
10 Type exit and then press ENTER.

Add an OM to the hosts file and ping it

To add an OM to the hosts file and then ping it:
1 Log into the DAC 6000
6 Type emacs hosts and then press ENTER.
7 Highlight the line that contains the IP address and host name of om001.
8 Click Edit and then Copy.
9 Press ENTER. (To add a line to the file.)
10 Click Edit and then Paste.
11 Change the IP address to 165.137.104.22 and the name to om002.
12 Click File and then Exit Emacs.
13 Click Yes to save the changes.
14 Type ping om002 and then press ENTER.

Lab Exercise 3
Add a Group
1 Add a group to the database using the following information:
Name = CSR
Permissions = Manage Terminals > Define Terminals, Manage Services > Define
Digital Service & Define Analog Service and Manage Reports
Add and Test a User

1 Add a new user to the database using the following information:
Name = your initials
Password = your password
Group Name = CSR
2 Log out and log back in as the new user. The only available selections on the Main Menu
should be Manage Terminals, Manage Services, Manage Reports, Help, Read Me and Log
Out.
3 Log Out and log back in as DAC6000.
Add a Remote User

1 Add a remote user to the database using the following information:
Name = your initials
Password = your password
Shut Down the DAC 6000 Application and Restart it

1 Shut down the DAC 6000 Application and then restart it.
Note: Wait until the shutdown completes. The Logger Window disappears when the
application shutdown is complete.
Shut Down the System and Restart it

1 Shutdown the system then power it off.
2 Power on the system.
Note: System shutdown is complete when the system powers off.

View the hosts file and ping the OM

1 View the hosts file.
2 Ping om001.
3 Stop the ping operation and close the system window.
Add an OM to the hosts file and ping it

1 Add an OM to the hosts using the following information:
IP Address = 165.137.104.22
Host Name = om002
2 Ping om002.
3 Stop the ping operation and close the system window.

Section 4
Business System Overview
Add Business Systems and Business System Ports to the DAC 6000
View a Business System's Services, Packages, and Objects
Describe the Business System Logging Routine
Generate a BSI Logging Report

4-2 Business System Overview
Business System Overview

The Business System Interface, sometimes called the WireLink, is the physical and logical
connection between the business system and the DAC 6000. It is the primary means used to
perform functions on the DAC 6000. Because of the powerful set of functions available on the
DAC 6000, the WireLink was designed with equivalent functionality.
To perform these functions, the business system sends the appropriate instructions to the
DAC 6000, either using a modem or through a network connection. These instructions must
conform to the accepted format and structure defined in the WireLink protocol, which was
established by and is the sole property of Motorola.
Manage Business Systems

You can connect a DAC 6000 to multiple business systems through multiple WireLinks to
manage subscriber billing.
The reasons for connecting to multiple business systems include:
Cable company acquisitions.
System mergers onto one DAC 6000.
Different franchise regulations or taxation authorities.
One business system often communicates through multiple WireLink ports. For example, a site
can use one WireLink port for standard transactions such as service upgrades and downgrades,
installations, and digital set-top preparation activity. A second WireLink port can carry
high-priority PPV authorization data. A third WireLink port can carry IPPV purchase uploads.
Add a Business System

To add a business system:
1 On the DAC 6000 Main Menu, click Manage Controller to display the Manage Controller
window.
2 Click Manage Business Systems to display the Manage Business Systems window:

Business System Overview 4-3
3 Click Define Business System to display the Define Business System window:
This window displays the following fields and option:
Name This 80-character alphanumeric field is the name of the business

system.
Code This unique, five-digit numeric field is the business system
interface code. You can not change the BSI code while the
business system ports are in the online state.

Pay-Per-View Standard - The business system will download a set of PPV

Configuration Mode programs and handles. If the local program handle is missing
on an upload, no purchase will be returned unless the Zero
Handle option is enabled.
Master - Specifies a master for a designated business system.
The business system can download or the master can download
a set of PPV programs and common program handles used by
business systems that designate it as its master. If the local
program handle is missing on an upload, the DAC 6000 will
return the program handle of the program on the MASTER
business system that matches the service handle and epoch
start time. If the Master program handle is missing too on an
upload, no purchase will be returned unless the Zero Handle
option is enabled. Refer to Table 4-1 PPV Configuration
Mode/Zero Handle.
Zero Handle
When enabled if the program handle is missing on an upload for
either PPV Configuration Mode modes, the DAC 6000 will return
a 0 (zero) program handle for a program that was not defined on
the specified business system. The business system will resolve the
program using service handle and epoch start time.
NOTE: Only applicable for 700 series purchase upload WireLink

commands. Not supported for 600 series WireLink commands.
Auto Clear Orphan
Purchases
When the option is enabled, each time a purchase poll is initiated
and purchases are collected from set-tops, any orphaned purchases
are removed from the set-tops and stored in the database for
reporting purposes. When the option is disabled, each time a
purchase poll is initiated and purchases are collected from set-tops,
any orphan purchases would remain in the set-top(s). The orphan
purchases could be removed from the set-tops by using the Delete
Orphan Purchases button on the Define Terminal screen.
Use GMT Time When this option is enabled the DAC 6000 will interpret the
Reference date/time fields in the business system commands based on
Greenwich Mean Time (commonly known as GMT). When this
option is disabled the DAC 6000 will interpret the date/time fields
in the business system commands based on DAC 6000 local time.
WireLink Support
Expanded Result
When this option is enabled, the business system supports
Codes processing of the expanded result codes. When this option is not
enabled, the business system does not support processing of the
expanded result codes. Enabling this option is recommended since
it provides the user with the details of the error.

WireLink 660 & 680

Sets On Plant
When this option is enabled, the business system 660 and 680
commands control the on/off plant setting of terminals. When this
option is disabled, the business system 660 command adds new
terminals with a status of on-plant, and the 680 command has no
control of the on-plant setting.
4 Click Add to enable Name.

5 Type the name for the business system.
6 Type a unique, five-digit number in the Code field.
7 Click the box(es) next to each Business System Attribute that is to be enabled for this the
business system.
8 Click Accept. The Operations section of the window is enabled.
9 If this business systems PPV Configuration Mode should be set to Master, click Change.
10 Click the diamond next to Master.
11 Click Master BS Name to display the Zoom:Master BS Names window.
12 Highlight the master business system and click Accept.
13 Click Accept.
Note: If any of the Business System Attributes are modified on the Define Business System
screen in order for the changes take effect it will be necessary to toggle the associated
port(s) offline and then back online. Go to Manage Controller > Manage Business
Systems > Define Business System Ports > Select > Highlight Port > Change > Port
State.
The following table lists and describes the PPV Configuration Mode/Zero Handle
combinations.

Standard Mode Standard with Master BS Master BS with

Zero Handle Mode Zero Handle
Mode Mode
Program Program handles Program handles Program handles Program handles
Download must be loaded must be loaded may be loaded may be loaded
by each business by each business by each business by each business
system system system or by the system or by the
Master BS Master BS
Call Ahead Authorize using Authorize using Authorize using Authorize using
PPV local handle only local handle only the local handle the local handle
authorization if it exists, if it exists,
otherwise use the otherwise use the
Master BS Master BS
defined program defined program
handle handle
Purchase Upload only if Upload local Upload local Upload local
Upload local program program handle program handle program handle
handle exists if exists, if exists, if exists,
otherwise upload otherwise upload otherwise upload
with program with Master BS with Master BS
handle = zero if defined program defined program
using 721 or 725 handle. If no handle,
commands. Master program otherwise upload
handle is with a zero
Zero handle is
not available in defined, handle if using
600 series purchase is 721 or 725
commands. deemed as commands.
orphan.
Zero handle is
not available in
600 series
commands.
Table 4-1 PPV Configuration Mode/Zero Handle

Change a Business System

To change a business system:
window.
2 Click Manage Business Systems to display the Manage Business Systems window.
3 Click Define Business System to display the Define Business System window.
4 Click Select to enable name.
5 Click Name to display the Zoom: Business System name window:
6 Select the business system to be changed and then click Accept to display the Define
Business System window with the Name field populated.
7 Click Accept to enable Change.
8 Click Change to enable the user-editable fields.
9 Make the changes and then click Accept to update the database.
Delete a Business System

Note: Deleting a business system also deletes the BSG handles assigned to that business
system.
You cannot delete a business system if:
There are digital set-tops assigned to it
There are purchases on the digital set-tops assigned to it that have not been uploaded
The handles associated with it are the last handle for a package, service, program or
object

To delete a business system:

window.
3 Click Define Business System to display the Define Business System window.
4 Click Select to enable name.
5 Click Name to display the Zoom: Business System name window:
6 Select the business system to be deleted and then click Accept to display the Define
Business System window with the Name field populated.
7 Click Accept to enable Delete.
8 Click Delete. The Delete this Business System window is displayed:
9 Click Yes to delete the business system and all of its ports.

Display Business System Services and Programs

You can display the services and programs associated with a business system on the Display
Business System Services window.
To display the services:
1 On the Define Business System window, click Select to enable Name.
2 Click Name to display the Zoom: Business System Name window:
3 Select the business system to be displayed and then click Accept to display the Business
System window with the Name field populated.
4 Click Accept to enable the Operations section of the window.

5 Click Display Services to display the Display Business System Services window:
Name This is the name of the business system.

Service Name This is the name of the service.
Provider Name This is the provider name for this service.
BSG Handle This unique, eight-digit integer from 0 (zero) through 16777215
identifies a service to the business system.
Display Programs This is enabled only if you select a service with externally provided
programs. For example, selecting a PPV or IPPV service enables
Display Programs, but selecting a subscription program does not.
6 Click Select to enable the Services section of the window.

7 If you click on a service with externally provided programs, Display Programs is enabled.
8 Click Display Programs to display the Display Business System Programs window:

Business System This is the name of the business system.

Name
Service & Provider These fields identify the service and provider name for this
Name program.
Program Name This is the program name.
Start Date This is the date that the program starts. It is comprised of two
two-digit integer fields and a four-digit integer field using the
format mm/dd/yyyy, where mm is the month, dd is the day, and
yyyy is the year (for example, 01/05/2000).
Start Time This is the time when the program starts. It is comprised of two
two-digit integer fields using the format hh:mm, where hh is the
hour from 0 (zero) through 23, and mm is the minute from 0
(zero) through 59 (for example, 00:10).
BSG Handle This unique eight-digit integer from 1 through 16777215
identifies a program to the business system.
9 Click Exit to display the Display Business System Services window.

10 Click Exit to display the Define Business System window.

Display Business System Packages

You can display the packages associated with a business system on the Display Business
System Packages window.
To display the packages:
2 Click Name to display the Zoom: Business System Name window.
5 Click Display Packages to display the Display Business System Packages window:
Name This is the business system name.

Package Name This is the name of the package.
Package Type This is the package type.
Provider Name This is the package provider name.
BSG Handle This is the BSG handle for this package.

Display Objects/Resources
You can display objects/resources associated with a business system on the Display
Objects/Resources window.
To display the objects:
2 Click Name to display the Zoom: Business System Name window.
5 Click Display Objects/Resources to display the Display Objects/Resources window:
Object Name This is the name of the object or resource.

BSG-Handle The BSG handle identifies the object or resource to the business
system.
6 Click Exit to display the Define Business System window.

Add a Business System Port

The communication port information is added on the Edit Business System Port window. Each
business system port can be configured to operate using Serial or TCP communication. If using
TCP then the hosts file needs to include the IP address(es) and host name(s) of the business
system device(s).
To add a business system port:
window.
3 Click Define Business System Ports to display the Define Business System Ports
window:

4 Click Add to display the Edit Business System Port window:
Port Type This is the type of communication that is being used. Valid
selections are Serial or TCP.
Port Number This unique integer field is the logical port number when the
port type is serial and it is the TCP port number (supported
range is from 15100 to 15199) when the port type is set to
TCP. For TCP support this number must be provided to the
business system so they can configure the correct TCP port

number on their side.

Default Business This is the name of the default business system with which
System Name this port is associated.
Port State This is the present state of the port. Valid values are Online or
Offline. When a port is online, a port task is servicing a
WireLink port. When a port is offline, no task is running and
only the database is affected by changes.
Port Status This display-only field provides the status of this port.
TTY Port This field identifies the port on the terminal concentrator or
(Applies to Serial Port port server that is used by this business port. The format of
Type only) this field is xn. If your system has a corollary terminal
concentrator, x is a lower case a, b, c or d and n is a digit from
1 through 8. If your system has a port server or servers, x is a
lower case a and n is a digit from 1 through 64.
Baud Rate This drop-down list enables you to select the baud rate for
(Applies to Serial Port communication on this port.
Type only)
Data Bits This field is the number of data bits used by this port. Valid
(Applies to Serial Port values are 5 through 8. The typical value is 8.
Type only)
Stop Bits This field is the number of stop bits used by this port. Valid
(Applies to Serial Port values are 1 or 2. The typical value is 1.
Type only)
Parity This drop-down list enables you to select the parity for this
(Applies to Serial Port port. Valid values are None, Even or Odd. The typical value is
Type only) None.
Flow Control This drop-down list enables you to select the flow control for
(Applies to Serial Port this port. Valid values are Off, Hardware, or Software. The
Type only) typical value is Off.
5 Select either Serial or TCP for the Port Type.

6 Type the number that you want to assign to this port in the Port Number field.
7 Click Default Business System Name to display the Zoom: Business System Name
window:

8 Select the Business System with which this port will be associated and then click Accept to
display the Edit Business System Port window with the Business System Name field
populated.
9 Click the Port State drop-down list and select Online to turn the port on or Offline to turn
it off.
10 If the Port Type is Serial, type the number and letter that identify the port to be used by this
business system in the TTY Port field.
11 If the Port Type is Serial, click the Baud Rate drop-down list and select the Baud Rate for
this business system port.
12 If the Port Type is Serial,Type the number of data bits to be used by this business system
port in the Data Bits field.
13 If the Port Type is Serial, type the number of stop bits to be used by this business system
port in the Stop Bits field.
14 If the Port Type is Serial, click the Parity drop-down list and select the parity for this
business system port.
15 If the Port Type is Serial, click the Flow Control drop-down list and select the flow control
for this business system port.
Change a Business System Port

When you change the Port State from Online to Offline, the port takes 45 seconds to shut
down. The communications port configuration can only be changed while the port is offline.
To change information for a business system port:
window.
3 Click Define Business System Ports to display the Define Business System Ports
window.

4 Click Select to enable the Ports table.

5 Select the Port to be changed.
6 Click Change to display the Edit Business System Port window.
7 Ensure that the Port State is Offline before making any changes.
8 Make the changes and then click Accept to update the database and display the Define
Business System Ports window.
Note: The port number and business system name are not editable.
Delete a Business System Port

If you delete a port that is in the online state it takes 45 seconds to shut down.
To delete a business system port:
window.
3 Click Define Business System Ports to display the Define Business System Ports screen.
4 Click Select to enable the Ports section of the window.
5 Select the Port to be deleted and then click Accept to enable Delete.
6 Click Delete. The system displays the following pop-up window:
7 Click Yes to delete the port and update the database.

Command Summary
Synchronization (001)
Return Status Message (001)
Collect Event Purchases (620)
Return Message (621)
Received Event Purchases (622)
Download (Add) Digital Events (630)
Download (Modify) Digital Events (631)
Download (Delete) Digital Events (633)
Add New Set-Top (660)
Change Set-Top Service (662)
Delete Digital Set-Top (663)
Initialize Digital Set-Top (664)
Clear Parental Lock (665)
Change Set-Top Activation (666)
Change Set-Top Features (680)
Collect Set-Top Services/Purchases (684)
Return Message Query Services (685)
Return Message Query Features (685)
Return Message Query Programs (685)
Change Set-Top Channel Map (688)
PPV Authorization Update (694)
Upload IPPV Purchases (720)
Receive IPPV Purchases (722)
Upload Single Terminal IPPV Purchases (724)
Receive Single Terminal IPPV Purchases (726)
Terminal Request (760)
Read Terminal Settings (770)
Authorize Programs (794)

Business System Interface Logger (bsilog)

The Business System Interface Logger (bsilog) is a logging and reporting function that runs
automatically when the Business System Interface runs. The bsilog records processes that
occur between the business system and the DAC 6000.
bsilfile bsilfile.arc
bsilog
(14 megabytes) (14 megabytes)
delete
Figure 4-1 bsilog Flow Diagram
The following steps describe how the bsilog collects data:

1 bsilog collects and stores information in a file named bsilfile.
2 When bsilfile reaches its maximum size, it is saved to an archive file named bsilfile.arc.
3 bsilog deletes the existing data in bsilfile and begins collecting new data.
4 When bsilfile reaches its maximum size it again copies the data to bsilfile.arc, overwriting
that files contents.
At any time, only these two files exist for the storage of logged data. If more data is required, it
is necessary to save off one or both files before they are overwritten or deleted.

Report Functions
To view the data collected by the BSITL, perform the following steps:
1 Open a system (XTERM) window.
2 At the command prompt: /home/acc4000d/scripts%, type bsil_report. The system displays
the following window:
3 Type the number of a BSI task and then press ENTER to report transactions for that task, or
press ENTER for all BSI tasks.
Note: The BSI task number is the Port Number assigned to a Business System Port. By
entering the Port Number the report will reflect only transactions occurring on that one
port.
4 If you specify one BSI task the next question will be: To report on one message type only,
enter the number of the record type or press ENTER for all records. Type the number of a
message type and then press ENTER to report on just that command or press ENTER for all
commands
Note: The message type number is the command number. By entering the message type
number the report will reflect only that command occurring on that one port.

5 Finally when prompted, enter the Start date and time (MM/DD/YEAR HH:MM:SS) for the
report period and then press ENTER. Note the four-digit year format.
6 Enter the End date and time (MM/DD/YEAR HH:MM:SS) for the report period and then
press ENTER to create an ASCII file named bsil_report.txt in the /home/acc4000d/data
directory and display the following information:
If the BSITL has not yet created the archive file, the system reports a failure to open the
bsilfile.arc archive file. This does not indicate a failure to create the report.
Once the report file is successfully built, you can display the collected data.

7 To display the file when in the /home/acc4000d/data directory, type pg bsil_report.txt and
then press ENTER.

BSITL Report Functions

You can control the input and output of the BSITL report with the following two options:
Option Command Syntax Result
f bsil_report f filename This option takes the input for the report from the file
you specify in filename and stores the output from the
report in filename.R in the current directory.
s bsil_report s This option creates the file bsil_report.txt with an
added statistical table at the end of the file.
s f bsil_report s f filename This option combines the first two options.
The following illustrates the BSITL statistical table:
The BSITL statistical table displays the following information:
First Packet Time This field displays the time that the first packet was received by the
BSI.
Last Packet Time This field displays the time that the last packet was sent to the BS.
Processing This field displays the difference between the First Packet Time and
Duration the Last Packet Time.
Cmd Nmbr This field displays the number identifying the command type.

Nmbr Sent This field displays the number of commands sent.

Nmbr Passed This field displays the number of commands successfully processed.
Nmbr Failed This field displays the number of commands that failed.
Avg Time (secs) This field displays the average time (in seconds) before the BSI
responded to the command identified in the Cmd Nmbr field.
Max Time (secs) This field displays the most time (in seconds) that it took the BSI to
process any command of the type identified in the Cmd Nmbr field.
Min Time (secs) This field displays the least time (in seconds) that it took the BSI to
process any command of the type identified in the Cmd Nmbr field.
Nmbr Sent This field displays the total number of commands that were processed
between the First Packet Time and the Last Packet Time.
Passed This field displays the percentage of commands that were successfully
processed between the First Packet Time and the Last Packet Time.
Failed This field displays the percentage of commands that could not be
processed between the First Packet Time and the Last Packet Time.
Avg Time (secs) This field displays the average time (in seconds) for a command to
process.

Real-Time Business System Interface Logger

There is also a real-time BSI logger. You can monitor traffic from one business system, one
port or by command type. To view the real-time logger:
1 Open a system (XTERM) window.
2 At the command prompt: /home/acc4000d/scripts%, type log_rt_bsi and then press Enter.
The system displays the following prompts:
To log messages for one Business System enter the Business System Code, or press <Enter>
for all Business Systems, ->
Note: The Business System Code is the Code that is entered in the Define Business System
GUI.
To log messages for one Business System port enter the port number, or press <Enter> for all
ports, ->
Note: The Business System port is the port number that is entered in the Edit Business
System Port GUI.
To log messages for one command enter the command number, or press <Enter> for all
commands, ->
Note that resizing this window may cause logging to terminate
Use Ctrl-C to terminate logging.
Sample window:


To add a business system to the DAC 6000:
1 From the Main Menu, click Manage Controller.
2 Click Manage Business Systems.
3 Click Define Business System.
4 Click Add.
5 Type BS#1 in the Name field.
6 Type 129 in the Code field.
7 Click the boxes to enable WireLink Support Expanded Result Codes and WireLink 660
& 680 Sets On Plant.
8 Click Accept.
9 Click Exit to return to Manage Business System window.
Define Business System Port

To define the business system port on the DAC 6000:
1 In the Manage Business System window, click Define Business System Ports.
2 Click Add.
3 Leave the Port Type set to Serial.
4 Type 2 in the Port Number field.
5 Click Default Business System Name to display the Zoom: Business System Name
window.
6 Highlight BS#1, click Accept.
7 Set the Port State to Offline.
8 Type a7 in the TTY Port field.
9 Set the Baud Rate to 9600.
10 Type 8 in the Data Bits field.
11 Type 1 in the Stop Bits field.
12 Set the Parity to None.
13 Set the Flow Control to Off.
15 Click Exit to return to Manage Business System window.

Lab Exercise 4

1 Add a business system to the DAC 6000 using the following information:
1 Name = BS#1
2 Code = 129
3 Enabled Attributes = WireLink Support Expanded Result Codes, WireLink 660 & 680
Sets On Plant.
Define Business System Port

1 Define a business system port on the DAC 6000 using the following information:
Port Type = Serial
Port Number = 2
Business System Name = BS#1
Port State = Offline
TTY Port = a7
Baud Rate = 9600
Data Bits = 8
Stop Bits = 1
Parity = None.
Flow Control = Off

Section 5
Define and Configure Devices
Define device locations
Configure the DAC 6000 database with the following devices: RADD 6000, OM 1000,
IRT 1000/2000, MPS, SEM, Upconverter, RPD 1000/2000, Modem Bank, Router and
KLS 1000
Describe the effects of the Flush & Fill and Rebuild & Download Program Queues
operations on a digital service
Assign services to Decrypt TSODAS (Transport Sync OSD DES Audio)

5-2 Define and Configure Devices
Manage Devices
In the DAC 6000 Main Menu, click Manage Devices to display the Manage Devices window:

Define and Configure Devices 5-3
Define Device Locations

You can add, change, and delete device locations for headend devices through the Define
Device Location window.
Add a Device Location

To add a location:
1 In the DAC 6000 Main Menu, click Manage Devices to display the Manage Devices
window.
2 Click Define Device Location to display the Define Device Location window:

4 Type the new location name in the Name field. The Name can be up to 40 alphanumeric
characters in length

Change a Device Location

To change a device location:
1 In the Define Device Location window, click Select.
2 Click Name to display the Device Location Name window:
3 Click the name to be changed and then click Accept to display the Define Device Location
window with the Name field populated.
4 Click Change to enable the Name field.
5 Type the changes to be made and then click Accept to update the database.
Delete a Device Location

To delete a location:
1 In the Define Device Location window, click Select to enable Name.
2 Click Name to display the Zoom: Device Location window.
3 Click the name to be deleted and then click Accept to display the Define Device Location
4 Click Accept.

Define RADD
The RADD executes various real-time, repetitive message operations, such as polling, as well
as downloads to set-tops. It generates the out-of-band multiplex and has a 56 Kbps minimum
continuous communication rate with the DAC 6000.
With the Define RADD window, you can add, change configuration settings, or delete a
RADD 6000.
Add a RADD
To add a RADD:
1 In the DAC 6000 Main Menu, click Manage Devices.
2 Click Define RADD.

Name This unique alphanumeric identifier is the name of the RADD 6000
entered next to the IP address in the /etc/hosts file.
IP Address This field is the IP address of the RADD 6000 retrieved from the hosts
file.
Location This optional, alphanumeric field is assigned by the operator on the
Define Device Location window. It typically specifies the location of
the RADD 6000.
Broadcast This field is the address the RADD uses for UDP broadcasts. It is
Address retrieved from the hosts file.
Copy Protection This is the telephone number that would be displayed on a Host
Phone Number television and would be the number the subscriber should call for
authorization of a CableCARD/Host pairing.
Communication Indicates if the DAC 6000 and the RADD 6000 currently have a
Established with connection.
RADD
Online Indicates if the DAC 6000 should attempt to communicate with the
RADD 6000.
RADD Reportback When active (filled), it enables the RADD 6000 to forward unsolicited
report back messages from set-tops.
Display Object This invokes the Display Object Load Status window, which displays all
Load Status the objects that have been downloaded to the RADD.
Reboot RADD This allows one to reboot a RADD remotely.
3 Type the name of the RADD in the Name field.

4 Click Location to display the Zoom: Device Location window.
5 Select a Device Location and click Accept.
Change a RADD
To change a RADD:
1 Click Select.
2 Click Name to display the Zoom: Device Name window.
3 Select the RADD to be changed and click Accept.
4 Click Accept.
5 Click Change.
6 Type the changes and click Accept to update the database.

Delete a RADD
To delete a RADD:
1 Click Select.
3 Select the RADD to be changed and click Accept.
4 Click Accept.
5 Click Delete. A confirmation window is displayed.
6 Click Yes to delete this RADD and update the database.
Display Object Load Status

The Display Object Load Status Window identifies all of the code objects defined in the
DAC 6000 system that have been downloaded to each RADD 6000.
To display the object status for a RADD:
1 Click Select in the Define RADD window.
3 Select a RADD and click Accept.
4 Click Accept.
5 Click Display Object Load Status.
RADD Name The name of the RADD 6000 device.

Object Name The name assigned to the object.
Object Version The version number of the code object.
Object Group Type of code object (for example, Base Platform, Standard, etc.)

Load Status Indicates if the object has been downloaded to the RADD 6000
(Complete or In Progress).
Refresh Screen Repaints the window with updated information.
Reboot RADD
To reboot a RADD remotely:
4 Click Accept.

5 Click Reboot RADD.

6 A confirmation window displays. Click Yes to reboot or No to cancel the reboot.
Define OM 1000 Communications Settings

You can use the DAC 6000 to display information about OM 1000 services as well as add,
change or delete OM 1000s in your system.
The DAC/RADD 6000 constructs EMM streams for inclusion in the out-of-band MPEG-2
transport by the OM 1000. The OM 1000 out-of-band multiplexer/demultiplexer combines
several streams of MPEG-2 data packets into a single output stream. Its configuration is based
on physical and virtual ports. You must configure the parameters of each physical port before
using it.
Add an OM 1000
To add an OM 1000:
1 In the Manage Devices window, click Define OM to display the Define OM window:

This window displays the following fields and buttons:
Name This unique alphanumeric identifier is the name of the OM 1000

IP Address This unique 32-bit Internet Protocol (IP) address is assigned in
the hosts file to the OM 1000. Other devices in the LAN
identify the OM 1000 by this number. If you connect the
OM 1000 to a LAN through the Ethernet port, you must assign
an IP address.
Location Typically, specifies the location of the OM 1000. This is an
optional field.
Tuned Channel This field identifies the channel designated for the out-of-band
stream from the OM 1000. The format is Axxx, where xxx is an
integer from 1 to 999. Domestically the entry typically will be
A1.
All Tuned Channels This option is for wireless systems only. When selected, it
causes out-of-band control information to be sent in every
multiplex at every frequency.
Insertion Bandwidth This field indicates the total bandwidth of the OM 1000 that the

Destination RADD 6000 is allocated to use. A typical value is 1000 Kbps.

Interactive This identifier is used by the NC 1500. When first adding the
Downstream Path ID OM 1000, the Interactive Downstream Path ID will not be
enabled. Once the OM 1000 is added to a downstream plant, the
DAC 6000 will assign the Interactive Downstream Path ID. The
ID can be changed to any value, but must be unique within the
DAC 6000 system and also must match the NC 1500s
configuration.
Display Stream This invokes the Display Stream Configuration Status window,
Configuration Status which identifies all of the Background Services linked to the OM
1000 and the maximum bandwidth and PID value allocated to
each.
2 Click Add to display the user-editable fields.

3 Type the name of the OM 1000 in the Name field.
5 Select the location name for this OM 1000.
6 Click Accept to display the Define OM window with the Location field populated.
7 In the Tuned Channel field, type the tuned channel. For wireless systems only, click All
Tuned Channels to send out-of-band control information in every multiplex at every
frequency.
8 Type a value (for example, 1000) in the Insertion Bandwidth field to establish the total
bandwidth available for the DACs OOB communication.

Display Stream Configuration Status

To display the OM Stream Configuration Status:
window.
2 Click Define OM to display the Define OM window.
3 Click Select and type the name of the OM 1000 in the Name field and click Accept.
4 Click Display Stream Configuration Status to display the Display Stream Configuration
Status window:
Name This unique alphanumeric identifier is the name of the OM 1000

On Line This option is currently not implemented.
Source Name This 80-character alphanumeric field is the name of the source.
Service Provider Name This 80-character alphanumeric field is the name of the service
provider.
PID Value This field identifies the elementary PID stream for the background
service.
MPEG Service Number This 5-digit integer field is the MPEG service number assigned to
this service.

Insertion Rate The rate, in Kilobits per second (Kbps), the selected stream is being
transmitted.
Refresh Screen This option refreshes the data displayed on this window.
Define IRT Communication Settings

You can add, change, and delete IRT 1000/2000s from your system through the Define IRT
window.
Add an IRT 1000/2000

To add an IRT 1000/2000 to the DAC 6000 database:
1 In the DAC 6000 Main Menu, click Manage Devices and then click Define IRT to display
the Define IRT window:


Name This 80-character, unique alphanumeric field (for example, IRT1)
identifies the IRT 1000/2000. It must be the same as it appears in
the /etc/hosts file.
IP Address This unique 32-bit IP address is assigned in the hosts file to the
IRT 1000/2000 and is used by other devices in the LAN to
identify the IRT 1000/2000. This display-only field is imported
from the hosts file. If you connect the IRT 1000/2000 to a LAN
through the Ethernet port, you must assign an IP address
Location It typically specifies the location of the IRT 1000/2000.
Service Queue Size This display-only field is the amount of memory (in bytes)
available in the IRT 1000/2000 for messages. This information is
imported from the IRT 1000/2000.
Service Queue Units This display-only field indicates that the service queue is 64 bits
wide. This information is imported from the IRT 1000/2000.
64 QAM The IRT 1000/2000 outputs a 64 Quadrature Amplitude
Modulation (QAM) signal.
256 QAM The IRT 1000/2000 does not support this option. This is used for
other devices that support 256 QAM and are entered in the
database as an IRT but are really some other piece of hardware.

2 Click Add on the Define IRT window.

3 Type a name in the Name field.
4 Click Location to display the Zoom: Device Location window:
5 Select a device location name and then click Accept. The Define IRT window is
displayed.
6 Click diamond next to 64 QAM to select QAM operation.
7 Click Accept to add the IRT 1000/2000 to the database.
Set IRT Insertion Parameters

The DAC 6000 enables you to specify the download rates for different message types that the
IRT 1000/2000 downloads to the cable plant. For example, Program Information Messages can
be downloaded every 125 milliseconds. When you add an IRT, the DAC 6000 provides default
settings that typically do not require changes.
Assign Services to Decrypting TSODAs

To enable IRTs TSODA transcoders to decrypt encrypted services, you must obtain decryption
authorization for the IRT 1000/2000 and then use the DAC 6000 to assign a service to the
TSODA. Once a service is assigned, the TSODA can receive the authorization messages sent
with incoming encrypted services that allow it to decrypt the service.
When the DAC 6000 is first connected to an IRT 1000/2000, it acquires the TSODA address
information for placement into a database table. You must then assign each service to a
specific TSODA. You must also assign services when you install a new IRT 1000/2000.
Finally if you assign services to the TSODAs on an IRT 1000/2000 and then select Re-Acquire
TSODA Addresses. The services will need to be assigned again upon the completion of the
reacquisition of the TSODA addresses.
Each TSODA can decrypt two services and can handle a maximum of six PIDs distributed over
any combination of two services.

Authorize an IRT 1000/2000

To get the IRT 1000/2000 authorized to decrypt a satellite signal, you must contact the uplink
authorization center. Using information you provide about your IRT 1000/2000 and the
transponder and frequency to which it is tuned, the authorization center will create the
appropriate access control messages to authorize the IRT 1000/2000 to decrypt services.
Note: You must provide the authorization center operator with the specific TSODA address to
use for each service. Record the IRT 1000/2000s TSODA unit addresses before
contacting the authorization center.
In the Define IRT window, click Assign Services to Decrypting TSODAs. The system
displays the Assign Services to Decrypting IRT TSODAs window.
Name The name of the IRT 1000/2000 selected in the Define IRT window.
TSODA# This field is a number, followed by an a or b (for example, 1b) or an _1 or
_2 (for example, 1_2) and is used to index the TSODA.

Unit The unique 16 digit internal identifier for the TSODA. The address of the
Address TSODA used to decrypt the corresponding service.
Service Identifies the service within the transport stream to be decrypted by the
Name TSODA. Enter a valid name (for example, HBO) obtained from your
service provider and defined in the DAC 6000. You can assign no more
than two services to each TSODA.
Provider Identifies the digital service provider.
Name
Assign a Service
To assign a service for decryption by a specified TSODA:
1 Contact the uplink authorization center and acquire the service name (authorization) for the
IRT to decrypt a satellite signal.
2 In the Define IRT window, click Select. The Name field is enabled.
3 Click Name. The system displays the Zoom: Device Name window.
4 Select the IRT and click Accept.
5 In the Define IRT window, click Accept.
6 Click Assign Services to Decrypting TSODAs. The system displays the Assign Services
to Decrypting IRT TSODAs window.
7 Click Select and click a TSODA number.
8 Click Change. The system displays the Edit IRT Decrypting TSODA Service window.
This window includes the following fields:
TSODA # An identifying number, (for example 1a or 1_1).

Unit Address The unique 16 digit internal identifier for the TSODA.
Service & Provider Name The name of the service and provider assigned to this TSODA.
No Service Click this button to add or remove service from this TSODA.

9 Click No Service to disable the check box.

10 Click Service & Provider Name. The system displays the Zoom: Service & Provider
Name window. Select a service and click Accept. The DAC 6000 redisplays the Edit IRT
Decrypting TSODA Service window. Click Accept. The system updates its database and
communicates the assigned service information to the IRT 1000/2000.
Modify Assigned Services

To modify assigned services for a TSODA:
1 Click Select in the Define IRT window.
2 Click Name. The system displays the Zoom: Device Name window.
3 Select a device name and click Accept. The system redisplays the Define IRT window.
4 Click Accept.
5 Click Assign Services to Decrypting TSODAs. The system displays Assign Services to
Decrypting IRT TSODAs window.
6 Click Select and click the desired TSODA number.
8 Enter changes and click Accept. The system updates its database and communicates the
changed information to the IRT 1000/2000.
Delete Assigned Services

To remove an assigned service from a TSODA:
1 Select Define IRT from the Manage Headend window and click Select.
2 Click Name. The system displays the Zoom:Device Name window.
3 Select a device name and click Accept. The system redisplays the Define IRT window.
4 Click Accept.
5 Click Assign Services to Decrypting TSODAs. The system displays Assign Services to
Decrypting IRT TSODAs window.
6 Click Select and click the desired TSODA number.
8 Click No Service. The Service & Provider name button and fields are disabled.

Flush & Fill

This command ensures that the DAC 6000 and IRT 1000/2000 are synchronized. This
command instructs the IRT 1000/2000 to delete any existing queues that are in memory and
prepare for a refill. The DAC then downloads currently built program queues to the
IRT1000/2000.
To use the Flush & Fill command:
1 In the Define IRT window, select the IRT 1000/2000 and click Accept.
2 Click Flush & Fill. The system displays the following confirmation pop-up window.
3 Click Yes to continue.
Rebuild & Download Program Queues

The Rebuild & Download Program Queues option should be used only when you suspect that
the database is corrupt. This command rebuilds program queues (Program Name, Program
Information, and Program Rekey) and saves them in the DAC 6000 database as binary objects.
Normally these messages are generated in advance and stored in the database before being sent
to the IRT 1000/2000. Once they are rebuilt, the DAC then downloads them to the IRT
1000/2000.
To use the Rebuild & Download Program Queues command:
1 In the Define IRT window, select the IRT 1000/2000 and click Accept.
2 Click Rebuild & Download Program Queues. The system displays the confirmation
pop-up window.

3 Click Yes to continue. The DAC rebuilds the program queues, and then downloads them to
the IRT 1000/2000.
Re-Acquire TSODA Addresses

You need to re-acquire decrypt TSODA addresses when you replace an IRT 1000/2000. The
old TSODA addresses and assigned service information are no longer valid. This command
deletes the TSODA addresses in the DAC 6000 database and re-acquires the decrypt TSODA
addresses from the replacement IRT 1000/2000.
To re-acquire decrypt TSODA addresses:
1 In the Define IRT window, click Re-Acquire TSODA Addresses to display the following
window:
2 Click Yes to delete the TSODA addresses from the database and acquire the decrypt
TSODA addresses from the new IRT 1000/2000.
Note: Because the previous assigned services information is no longer valid, you must assign
services to the new decrypt TSODAs.

Display IRT 1000/2000 Services Status

Use Display IRT Services Status to verify the status of the services assigned to the
IRT 1000/2000.
To display the IRT 1000/2000 device status:
1 In the Define IRT window, click Display IRT Device Status to display the Define IRT
Device Status window:
Device Identification This field is the name of the selected IRT.

Name
On Line This option is currently not implemented.
Service Provider Name This 80-character alphanumeric field is the name of the service
provider.
MPEG SVC Number This 5-digit integer field is the MPEG service number assigned to
the service.
End Program Download This field displays the date of the last program downloaded to that
Date IRT. This field is comprised of two two-digit integer fields and a
four-digit integer field using the format MM/DD/YYYY, where
MM is the month, DD is the day, and YYYY is the year (for
example, 01/05/2000).

End Program Download This field displays the end time of the last program downloaded to
Time that IRT 1000/2000. Video will be available from the
IRT 1000/2000 up to the displayed time. This field is comprised
of two two-digit integer fields using the format HH:MM, where
HH is the hour from 0 (zero) through 23, and MM is the minute
from 0 (zero) through 59 (for example, 06:05).
End Encrypting This field displays the end date of the last encryption element
Download Date queued for the IRT 1000/2000. Video will be available from the
IRT 1000/2000 up to the displayed date. This field typically
matches the End Program Download Date. It is comprised of two
two-digit integer fields and a four-digit integer field using the
format MM/DD/YYYY, where MM is the month, DD is the day,
and YYYY is the year (for example, 01/05/2000).
End Encrypting This field displays the end time of the last encryption element
Download Time queued for the IRT 1000/2000. Video will be available from the
IRT 1000/2000 up to the displayed time. This field typically
matches the End Program Download Time. It is comprised of two
two-digit integer fields using the format HH:MM, where HH is the
hour from 0 (zero) through 23, and MM is the minute from 0
Decrypt ACP This field is the TSODA identifying number (i.e. 1a or 1_1) of the
Access Control Processor (ACP) that decrypts the service.
Encrypt ACP This field is the TSODA identifying number (i.e. 1a or 1_1) of the
Access Control Processor (ACP) that encrypts the service.
Refresh Screen This option updates the displayed information.
2 Click Refresh Screen to update the information on the window.

3 Click Exit to dismiss the window.

Define an MPS
You can add, change or delete an MPS in the Define MPS window.
Add an MPS
To add an MPS to the DAC 6000 database:
1 On the DAC 6000 Main Menu, click Manage Devices and then click Define MPS to
display the Define MPS window:

Name This unique, 80-character, alphanumeric field (for example, rem001)

identifies the MPS. It must be the same in the /etc/hosts file.
IP Address This unique 32-bit Internet Protocol (IP) address is assigned in the hosts
file to the MPS and is used by other devices in the LAN to identify it.
This display-only field is imported from the hosts file. If you connect the
MPS to a headend LAN through the Ethernet port, you must assign an IP
address.
Define Device Location window. It typically specifies the location of the
MPS.
Services per This field displays the number of services (typically 2) an ACP can
ACP process.
Device Status This field indicates if the DAC 6000 has established communication with
the digital device and obtained its configuration. Two indications are:
CONFIGURATION PENDING It indicates the DAC 6000 has not
obtained the MPS configuration parameters as yet.
CONFIGURED - It indicates the DAC 6000 has obtained the MPS
configuration parameters.
Time Source This field specifies how the MPS receives GPS time:
DAC It indicates the DAC 6000 periodically broadcasts the time.
NTP SVR - It indicates a network time server periodically broadcasts the
time or the MPS is configured to receive time from the input multiplex.
Operation View only field that indicates if the MPS is configured for Standard or
Mode Harmony operating mode.
2 Click Add on the Define MPS window.

5 Select a device location name and then click Accept. The Define MPS window is
displayed.
6 Click the Time Source button and select DAC or NTP SVR.
7 Click Accept to add the MPS to the database.

View Message Insertion Parameters

The DAC 6000 enables you to specify the download rates for the different message types that
the MPS downloads to the cable plant. When you add an MPS, the DAC 6000 provides default
settings that typically do not require any changes.
Flush & Fill

This ensures that the DAC 6000 and MPS are synchronized; it instructs the MPS to delete any
existing queues that are in memory and prepare for a refill. The DAC 6000 then downloads the
currently built program queues to the MPS.
To flush and fill the MPS:

1 On the Define MPS window, click Select to enable Name.
3 Select the MPS you want to update and click Accept. The Define MPS window is
displayed.
4 Click Accept to enable the MPS Operation section of the window.
5 Click Flush & Fill. The following prompt is displayed:
6 Click Yes.
Re-Acquire ACP Addresses

You must acquire new ACP decryption addresses when you replace an MPS. Each old
decryption address and assigned service is no longer valid.
Reacquiring ACP decryption addresses deletes the decryption addresses in the DAC 6000
database and reacquires decryption addresses from the new MPS.
To re-acquire ACP addresses:

displayed again.
5 Click Re-Acquire ACP Addresses. The following prompt is displayed:
6 Click Yes to delete the ACP decryption addresses from the database and acquire the ACP
decryption addresses from the MPS.
Note: Because the previously assigned services information is no longer valid, you must
assign services to the new decryption addresses.

Configure MPS Output Ports

The Configure MPS Output Ports window enables you to define in the DAC 6000 database the
output transmission options for the output ports of an MPS output module. An output module
occupies one MPS slot.
To configure MPS output ports:
1 On the Define MPS window, click Select to enable the Name field.
3 Select an MPS from the list and click Accept.
4 Click Accept to enable the MPS Operation panel of this window.
5 Click Configure Output Ports to display the Configure MPS Output Ports window:
Port Name This 80-character, alphanumeric field is the DAC 6000 assigned
name for the output port on the digital device (i.e. Slot 7 Port 1
Out). The operator can rename the output port using the Edit MPS
Output Port window.
Slot Number This field indicates which MPS slot number contains the output
card.
Port Number This field is the port number on the output card.

Transport Stream ID The DAC 6000 assigns this number to uniquely identify the
multiplex. The operator can change it with the Edit MPS Output
Port window.
Modulation This field indicates the output port modulation mode; it defaults
to QAM 64. Selections are as follows:
Modulation Inner Code Symbol Rate
QPSK 4/5 5
QAM 64 4/5 5
QAM 256 4/5 5
6 Click Select to activate the Output Ports panel.

7 Highlight the targeted output port.
8 Click Change to invoke the Edit MPS Output Port window:
9 Click the Port Name input field and change the port name as desired.
10 Click the Transport Stream ID input field and change the ID as desired.
11 Click the Modulation /Inner Coding /Symbol Rate to display the Zoom: Modulation
window.
12 Select the modulation in use and click Accept.
13 Click Accept to return to the Configure MPS Output Ports menu.

Display MPS Status

Use the Display Device Status window to verify the status of the services assigned to an MPS.
1 On the Define MPS window, click Select to enable the MPS Operation panel.
2 Click Name to display Zoom: Device Name window.
3 Select an MPS and then click Accept to display the Define MPS window with the Name
field populated.
5 Click Display MPS Status to display the Display Device Status window:
Output Port The MPS slot number occupied by the output module and the
port designator of the output module.
Service Provider Name An 80-character alphanumeric field that is the name of the
service provider.
MPEG SVC Number The 16-bit MPEG service number for that source/service.
End Program This field displays the date (mm/dd/yyyy) of the last program
Download Date downloaded. It contains a two-digit month (mm) followed by a
slash, a two-digit day (dd) followed by a slash, and a four digit
(yyyy) year.

End Program This field displays the end time (hh:mm) of the last program
Download Time downloaded for the MPS. Video is available from the MPS up
to the displayed time. It contains a two-digit hour (hh) followed
by a colon and a two-digit minute (mm). Minutes are counted
from 00 through 59.
End Encrypting This field displays the end date (mm/dd/yyyy) of the last
Download Date encryption element queued for the MPS. Video is available
from the MPS up to the displayed date. This field typically
matches the End Program Download Date. It contains a
two-digit month (mm) followed by a slash, a two-digit day (dd)
followed by a slash, and a four digit (yyyy) year.
End Encrypting This field displays the end time (hh:mm) of the last encryption
Download Time element queued for the MPS. Video is available from the MPS
up to the displayed time. This field typically matches the End
Program Download Time. It contains a two-digit hour (hh)
followed by a colon and a two-digit minute (mm). Minutes are
counted from 00 through 59.
Decrypt ACP This field is index number of the ACP that decrypts the service.
(i.e. 1a or 1_1)
Encrypt ACP This field is the index number of the ACP that encrypts the
service. (i.e. 1a or 1_1)

7 Click Exit to close the window.
Reboot MPS
When necessary, to reboot the MPS:
displayed again.

5 Click Reboot MPS. The following prompt is displayed:
6 Click Yes. The selected MPS reboots.
Configure MPS Input Ports

The Configure MPS Input Ports window enables you to select input ports for each MPS and
define their MPEG associations. It also enables you to associate input sources to decrypting
Access Control Processors (ACPs). An input module can have one or two ports each. An input
module occupies one MPS slot.
To configure MPS input ports:
1 On the Define MPS window, click Select to enable the MPS Operation panel.
3 Select an MPS and then click Accept to display the Define MPS window with the Name
field populated.
5 Click Configure Input Ports to display the Configure MPS Input Ports window:

The Input Ports panel of this window displays the following fields:
Port Name This 80-character, alphanumeric field is initially assigned by the

DAC 6000. It defaults to Slot # Port # In. The operator can
rename the input port using the Edit MPS Input Port window.
Slot Number MPS slot number of the input module.
Port Number Port number on the input module.
Transport Stream ID This is the transport stream ID of the input multiplex, which is
obtained when the MPS extracts the Program Association Table
(PAT), from the input port. The PAT has a list of all the services
on the input wire to the MPS from the satellite. No operator entry
is required. It is for information purposes and is strictly a function
of what is being fed to the input port.
6 Click Select to activate the Input Ports panel.

7 Highlight a targeted row and click Change to invoke the Edit MPS Input Port window:
8 To edit the slot and port numbers, ensure Identification is selected in the Active Panel and
click the Port Name input field.
9 Change the Port Name Input field contents as necessary and click Accept to return to the
Configure MPS Input Port window.
10 At the MPS Input Port window, click Select to activate the Input Ports panel again.

11 Highlight the targeted row just edited and click Change to invoke the Edit MPS Input Port
window again:
12 To associate MPEG service numbers to source names, click Input Sources in the Active
Panel.

The Table Operation panel of this window displays the following fields:
MPEG Service Number This field displays an MPEG service number of one of the
services present on the incoming transport stream.
Source Name With this optional field entry, the operator can assign a name to
the MPEG service number.
13 Click Select in the Table Operation panel.

14 Highlight a targeted MPEG Service Number and click Change to invoke the Edit Input
Source window:
15 Click Source Name to invoke the Zoom: Source Name window:

16 Highlight a targeted source name and click Accept.

17 The Edit MPS Input Source window reappears; click Accept.
18 The Edit MPS Input Port window reappears with the association listed in the Table
Operation panel.
19 In the Active Panel, click Identification again.
20 Click Accept to return to the Configure MPS Input Ports window.

Assign Services to Decrypting ACPs

1 In the Configure MPS Input Ports window, click Select to activate the Input Ports panel
and select (highlight) the Port Name.
2 Click Assign Services To Decrypting ACPs to invoke the Assign Sources To Decrypting
ACPs window.
3 On the Assign Sources To Decrypting ACPs window, click Select to enable the Sources
panel.

The Sources panel of this window displays the following fields:
ACP # This field is a number, followed by an underscore and the number 1 or 2

(for example, 1_1) and is used to index the ACP.
Unit Address This field is the unit address of the ACP used to decrypt the
corresponding service. The format is nnn-nnnnn-nnnnn-nnn.
MPEG SN This field is the up to 16-bit MPEG service number.

Source Name This 80 character alphanumeric field identifies the source in the transport
stream targeted for decryption by the ACP.
4 Highlight a targeted ACP # from the list and click Change to invoke the Edit ACP Sources
window.
5 Change the ACP information as necessary and click Accept to return to the Assign Sources
To Decrypting ACPs window.
6 Contact the uplink authorization center and acquire the authorization for the MPS to
decrypt the incoming services.
Route Services
You can route services from input ports to output ports with the Route Services window.
To route services:
displayed again.
5 Click Route Services to display the Route Services window

Input Port Name This 80-character, alphanumeric field is the DAC 6000
assigned name for the input port on the MPS that receives the
service. The operator can rename the input port using the Edit
MPS Input Port window.
Input MPEG SN This field is the 16-bit MPEG service number for the input
source/service.
Input Source Name This 80 character alphanumeric field identifies the source in the
transport stream service. The name is assigned in the Edit MPS
Input Port window.
Output Port Name This 80-character, alphanumeric field is the DAC 6000
assigned name for the output port on the MPS. The operator can
rename the output port on the Edit MPS Output Port window.
Output MPEG SN This field is the 16-bit MPEG service number for the output
source/service.
Output Source Name This 80 character alphanumeric field identifies the output
source/service.
Output Provider Name This is the provider name for the output source/service.
6 Click off the All radio button (not solid filled) in the Associated Output Port panel.
7 Click Name to invoke the Zoom: Port Names window:
8 Select an output port name and click Accept to return to the Route Services window.

9 Click Add to invoke the Edit Route Service window:
10 Click Output: Source Name / Provider Name / MPEG SN to invoke the Zoom: Source
Name / Provider Name / MPEG SN window:
11 Select the source name, provider name, and MPEG SN to associate with the selected output
port and click Accept to return to the Edit Route Service window.

12 Click Input Port to invoke the Zoom: Port Names window:
13 Select an input port to associate with the selected output port and click Accept to return to
the Edit Route Service window.
14 Click Input: Source Name / MPEG SN to invoke the Zoom: Source Name / MPEG SN
window:

15 Select the Source Name / MPEG SN to associate with the input port and click Accept to
return to the Edit Route Service window.
16 Click Accept to return to the Route Services window and add the new association to the
Associated Services panel.
Clear Output Mplex

Do not select the Clear Output Mplex button on the Route Services window, as all video and
output services will be lost! Delete routing entries by individually selecting and deleting each
service from the Route Services window.
Route PIDs
You can add and delete user defined Pass Through streams with this window.
Change a PID Route Source

To change a PID Route Source:
1 On the Define MPS window, click Select to enable Name
3 Select the MPS you want to update and click Accept. The define MPS window is
displayed again.
4 Click Accept to enable the MPS Operation panel of the Define MPS window.
5 Click Route PIDs to display the Route PIDs window.
6 On the Route PIDs window, click Select.

7 Highlight the target row in the Defined Routes panel of the Route PIDs window.
8 On the Route PIDs window, click Change, the Edit Route PID window appears.
9 On the Source panel of the Edit Route PID window, click DAC, Pass Through, or None,
as applicable, to change the PID source.
10 If Pass Through is not selected, skip to step 13. If Pass Through is selected, on the Edit
Route PID window, click Input Port to invoke the Zoom: Port Names window.
11 On the Zoom: Port Names window, highlight the targeted input port and click Accept, the
Edit Route PID window reappears.
12 On the Edit Route PID window, enter a new PID number for the Pass Through PID stream
or leave unchanged.
13 On the Edit Route PID window, click Accept, the Route PIDs window re-appears.
14 On the Route PIDs window, click Accept.

Add a PID Route

Only a user defined Pass Through PID stream can be added. A user defined Pass Through PID
stream does not have a name assigned to it on the Edit Route PID window.
To add a PID route:
2 Click Name to display the Zoom: Device Name Window.
3 Select the MPS you want to update and click Accept.
4 Click Accept to enable the MPS Operation panel of the Define MPS window.
6 On the Route PIDs window, ensure All is not active (not filled in) and click Name. The
Zoom: Port Names window is displayed.
7 On the Zoom: Port Names window, highlight a targeted MPS output port and click Accept.
8 On the Route PIDs window, click Add, the Edit Route PIDs window appears.
9 On the Source panel of the Edit Route PIDs window, Pass Through is automatically
selected (the radio button appears filled in).
10 Click Input Port to invoke the Zoom: Port Names window.
12 On the Edit Route PID window, enter a PID number for the Pass Through PID stream.

Use Rebuild & Download Program Queues when you suspect that the database is corrupted.
This command rebuilds the messages (which contain the Program Name, Program Information,
and Program Rekey) and saves them in the DAC 6000 database as binary objects. Normally,
these messages are generated in advance and stored in the database before going to the MPS.
Once they are rebuilt, the DAC then downloads them to the MPS.
To rebuild and download program queues:
3 Select the MPS to be updated.
4 Click Accept. The Define MPS window is displayed again.
5 Click Accept to enable the MPS Operation panel of the window.

6 Click Rebuild & Download Program Queues. The following prompt is displayed:
7 Click Yes. The system deletes all information for the selected MPS in the DAC 6000
database; it then rebuilds and downloads the program queues to the MPS.

Define a SEM
You can add, change or delete a SEM in the Define SEM window.
Add a SEM
To add a SEM to the DAC 6000 database:
1 On the DAC 6000 Main Menu, click Manage Devices and then click Define SEM to
display the Define SEM window:

Name This unique, 80-character, alphanumeric field (for example, sem001)

identifies the SEM. It must be the same in the /etc/hosts file.
IP Address This unique 32-bit Internet Protocol (IP) address is assigned in the hosts
file to the SEM and is used by other devices in the LAN to identify it.
This display-only field is imported from the hosts file. If you connect the
SEM to a headend LAN through the Ethernet port, you must assign an IP
address.
Define Device Location window. It typically specifies the location of the
SEM.
Services per This display-only field reflects the number of services (4) that can be
ACP encrypted by one ACP.
Device Status This field indicates if the DAC 6000 has established communication with
the digital device and obtained its configuration. Two indications are:
CONFIGURATION PENDING It indicates the DAC 6000 has not
obtained the SEM configuration parameters as yet.
CONFIGURED - It indicates the DAC 6000 has obtained the SEM
configuration parameters.
Time Source This field specifies how the SEM receives GPS time:
DAC It indicates the DAC 6000 periodically broadcasts the time.
NTP SVR - It indicates a network time server periodically broadcasts the
time or the SEM is configured to receive time from the input multiplex.
Operation View only field that indicates if the SEM is configured for Standard or
Mode Harmony operating mode.
2 Click Add on the Define SEM window.

5 Select a device location name and then click Accept. The Define SEM window is
displayed.
6 Click the Time Source button and select DAC or NTP SVR.
7 Click Accept to add the SEM to the database.

View Message Insertion Parameters

The DAC 6000 enables you to specify the download rates for the different message types that
the SEM downloads to the cable plant. When you add a SEM, the DAC 6000 provides default
settings that typically do not require any changes.
Flush & Fill

This ensures that the DAC 6000 and SEM are synchronized; it instructs the SEM to delete any
existing queues that are in memory and prepare for a refill. The DAC then downloads the
currently built program queues to the SEM.
To flush and fill the SEM:
1 On the Define SEM window, click Select to enable Name.
3 Select the SEM you want to update and click Accept. The Define SEM window is
displayed.
4 Click Accept to enable the SEM Operation section of the window.
5 Click Flush & Fill. The following prompt is displayed:
6 Click Yes; the DAC 6000 deletes and refreshes all information in the selected SEM
database.

You must acquire new ACP addresses when you replace a SEM. Reacquiring ACP addresses
deletes the ACP addresses in the DAC 6000 database and reacquires the ACP addresses from
the new SEM.
To re-acquire ACP addresses:
displayed again.


5 Click Re-Acquire ACP Addresses. The following prompt is displayed:
6 Click Yes to delete the ACP addresses from the database and acquire the ACP addresses
from the SEM.
Configure SEM Output Ports

The Configure SEM Output Ports window enables you to configure the attributes of the output
ports for the selected SEM. Output port types are QAM, ASI, and GbE. The default modulation
for ASI and GbE is QAM 256. A modulation must be specified for these port types, even
though they require the use of an external modulator. The modulation for the QAM outputs is
reported by the SEM.
Output ports cannot be added or deleted; the Add and Delete buttons remain unavailable.

To configure SEM output ports:

1 On the Define SEM window, click Select to enable the Name field.
3 Select a SEM from the list and click Accept.
4 Click Accept to enable the SEM Operation panel of this window.
5 Click Configure Output Ports to display the Configure SEM Output Ports window:
name for the output port on the digital device (i.e. QAM_RF
Output Port 1). The operator can rename the output port using the
Edit SEM Output Port window.
Type This field indicates the output port type.
Transport Stream ID The DAC 6000 assigns this 16-bit number to uniquely identify the
multiplex. The operator can change it with the Edit SEM Output
Port window.
Destination IP The Gigabit Ethernet IP address of the GbE output port.
Address This field is not applicable for QAM and ASI output ports.

UDP Port Number The UDP port number assigned to the physical GbE output port.
This field is not applicable for QAM and ASI output ports.
Tuned Channel For QAM output ports only. The SEM reports to the DAC 6000
the frequency at which each QAM RF upconverter output is
configured. When a SEM with QAM outputs (which are dual RF
outputs) is added to the system, the Tuned Channel number
column is initially blank. This is because the Tuned Channel
value depends on the physical frequency map being utilized for a
particular downstream plant. Until the QAM RF outputs are
associated to a downstream plant by the DAC 6000 operator, the
Tuned Channel number cannot be determined. When the QAM
outputs are associated to a downstream plant (through the Edit
Downstream Plant window), the Tuned Channel numbers
corresponding to the frequencies reported by the SEM are
calculated, and this field is populated with the appropriate Tuned
Channel number. This column is always blank for ASI and GbE
outputs.
Two adjacent frequencies are assigned to each dual
(A and B) QAM upconverter RF output.
Modulation The default modulation for ASI and GbE is QAM 256. A
modulation must be specified for these port types, even though
they require the use of an external modulator. The modulation for
the QAM outputs is reported by the SEM.
6 Click Select to activate the Output Ports panel.

7 Highlight the targeted output port.

8 Click Change to invoke the Edit SEM Output Port window:
Port Name System generated name assigned to the output port that can be modified.
Transport System generated value to identify the transport stream. This value can
Stream ID be modified.
Modulation, The modulation for the QAM outputs is reported by the SEM and cannot
Inner Coding, be modified. The default modulation for ASI and GbE is QAM 256. A
Symbol Rate modulation must be specified for these port types, even though they
require the use of an external modulator.
Modulation rates are: QAM 16, QAM 32, QAM 64, QAM 128, and
QAM 256.
Inner Coding indicates the conversion rate, for example, 4 to 5 (4/5).
This value cannot be modified for QAM output ports. For ASI and GbE
output ports, this value should be set to reflect the configuration of the
external modulator.
Symbol Rate is a value given in Msps. This value cannot be modified for
QAM output ports. For ASI and GbE output ports, this value should be
set to reflect the configuration of the external modulator.
Tuned Channel For QAM output ports only. The SEM reports to the DAC 6000 the
frequency at which each QAM RF upconverter output is configured.
When a SEM with QAM outputs (which are dual RF outputs) is added
to the system, the Tuned Channel number column is initially blank. This
is because the Tuned Channel value depends on the physical frequency
map being utilized for a particular downstream plant. Until the QAM RF
outputs are associated to a downstream plant by the DAC 6000 operator,
the Tuned Channel number cannot be determined. When the QAM

outputs are associated to a downstream plant (through the Edit

Downstream Plant window), the Tuned Channel numbers corresponding
to the frequencies reported by the SEM are calculated, and this field is
populated with the appropriate Tuned Channel number. This column is
always blank for ASI and GbE outputs.
Two adjacent frequencies are assigned to each dual
(A and B) QAM upconverter RF output.
Dest IP Applicable to GbE output ports only. The Destination IP Address/UDP
Address Port Number pair must be unique within a single physical GbE output
port. Duplicate Destination IP Addresses/UDP Port Number pairs are
permitted between different physical GbE output ports.
UDP Port The port number of a UDP assigned to the physical GbE output port.
Number Applicable to GbE output ports only. The Destination IP Address/UDP
Port Number pair must be unique within a single physical GbE output
port. Duplicate Destination IP Addresses/UDP Port Number pairs are
permitted between different physical GbE output ports.
9 Click the Port Name field and change the port name as desired.
10 Click the Transport Stream ID field and change the ID if desired.
11 Click the Modulation /Inner Coding /Symbol Rate drop-down menu and select an option.
12 Click Accept to return to the Configure SEM Output Ports menu.
Display SEM Queuing Status

Use the Display SEM Queuing Status window to verify the status of the services assigned to a
SEM.
1 On the Define SEM window, click Select to enable the SEM Operation panel.
3 Select a SEM and then click Accept to display the Define SEM window with the Name
field populated.

5 Click Display SEM Queuing Status to display the Display SEM Queuing Status window:
Output Port The SEM QAM, ASI, or GbE output port identifier.
Service Provider Name An 80-character alphanumeric field that is the name of the
service provider.

MPEG SVC Number The 16-bit MPEG service number for that source/service.
End Program This field displays the date (mm/dd/yyyy) of the last program
Download Date downloaded. It contains a two-digit month (mm) followed by a
slash, a two-digit day (dd) followed by a slash, and a four digit
(yyyy) year.
End Program This field displays the end time (hh:mm) of the last program
Download Time downloaded for the SEM. Video is available from the SEM up
to the displayed time. It contains a two-digit hour (hh) followed
by a colon and a two-digit minute (mm). Minutes are counted
from 00 through 59.
End Encrypting This field displays the end date (mm/dd/yyyy) of the last
Download Date encryption element queued for the SEM. Video is available
from the SEM up to the displayed date. This field typically
matches the End Program Download Date. It contains a
two-digit month (mm) followed by a slash, a two-digit day (dd)
followed by a slash, and a four digit (yyyy) year.
End Encrypting This field displays the end time (hh:mm) of the last encryption
Download Time element queued for the SEM. Video is available from the SEM
up to the displayed time. This field typically matches the End
Program Download Time. It contains a two-digit hour (hh)
followed by a colon and a two-digit minute (mm). Minutes are
counted from 00 through 59.
Decrypt ACP N/A
Encrypt ACP This field is a number, followed by an underscore and the
number 1, 2, 3 or 4 (for example, 1_1) and is used to index the
ACP that is encrypting the service.

7 Click Exit to close the window.
Reboot SEM
When necessary, to reboot the SEM:
displayed again.

5 Click Reboot SEM. The following prompt is displayed:
6 Click Yes. The selected SEM reboots.
Configure SEM Input Ports

The Configure SEM Input Ports window enables you to add or modify the input logical port
names and User Datagram Protocol (UDP) port numbers for the GbE inputs. The physical GbE
IP addresses cannot be modified, as they are display only. The possible input port types are
Ethernet, Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI), GbE, and UDP.
When a SEM with one or more physical GbE inputs is added to the system, only the physical
GbE inputs are displayed initially. The UDP port numbers must be assigned for each logical
input port on a GbE (the assigned logical ports appear indented under their respective physical
GbE port names).
To configure SEM input ports:
1 On the Define SEM window, click Select to enable the SEM Operation panel.
3 Select a SEM and then click Accept to display the Define SEM window with the Name
field populated.

5 Click Configure Input Ports to display the Configure SEM Input Ports window:
The Input Ports panel of this window displays the following fields:
name for the input port on the SEM. The operator can rename the
input port using the Edit SEM Input Port window.
Type Indicates if the input port type is ASI , UDP or GbE.
Transport Stream ID This is the transport stream ID of the input multiplex, which is
obtained when the SEM extracts the Program Association Table
(PAT), from the input port. The PAT has a list of all the services
on the input wire to the SEM. No operator entry is required. It is
for information purposes and is strictly a function of what is being
fed to the input port.
IP Address Is display only and applicable to Ethernet and GbE ports. It
indicates the IP address of the port.
UDP Port Number Is assignable to differentiate the logical ports on a GbE physical
port. UDP port assignments appear indented under their
respective physical GbE ports.
6 Click Select to activate the Input Ports panel.

7 Highlight a targeted row and click Change to invoke the Edit SEM Input Port window:
8 To edit the Port Name, click the Port Name field and change the name as necessary.

9 In the Active Panel, click Input Sources to display the Input Sources panel.
MPEG Service This field id is the 16-bit identifier for the MPEG.
Number
Source Name With this optional field entry, the operator can assign a name to
the MPEG service number.

10 To associate MPEG service numbers to source names, click Select in the Table Operation
panel.
11 Highlight a targeted MPEG Service Number and click Change to invoke the Edit Input
Source window:
12 Click Source Name to invoke the Zoom: Source Name window:
13 Highlight a targeted source name and click Accept.

14 The Edit SEM Input Source window reappears; click Accept.

15 The Edit MPS Input Port window reappears with the association listed in the Table
Operation panel.
16 In the Active Panel, click Identification again.
17 Click Accept to return to the Configure MPS Input Ports window.
Re-Acquire Configuration
This operation enables you to request the SEM to report its configuration information to the
DAC 6000.
Clicking the Re-Acquiring Configuration button causes the Device Status field to change
to Configuration Pending. After the configuration information is received from the SEM, the
Device Status window must be refreshed to view the latest status.
displayed again.
5 Click Re-Acquire Configuration.
6 Click Yes.
7 Click Exit.
8 Click Define SEM to view the updated information.

Route Services
You can route services from input ports to output ports with the Route Services window.
To route services:
displayed again.
5 Click Route Services to display the Route Services window.
Input Port Name This 80-character, alphanumeric field is the DAC 6000
assigned name for the input port on the SEM that receives the
service. The operator can rename the input port using the Edit
SEM Input Port window.
Input MPEG SN This field is the 16-bit MPEG service number for the input
source/service.

Input Source Name This 80 character alphanumeric field identifies the source in the
transport stream service. The name is assigned in the Edit SEM
Input Port window.
Output Port Name This 80-character, alphanumeric field is the DAC 6000
assigned name for the output port on the SEM. The operator
can rename the output port on the Edit SEM Output Port
window.
Output MPEG SN This field is the 16-bit MPEG service number for the output
source/service.
Output Source Name This 80 character alphanumeric field identifies the output
source/service.
Output Provider Name This is the provider name for the output source/service.
6 Click off the All radio button (not solid filled) in the Associated Output Port panel.
7 Click Name to invoke the Zoom: Port Names window:
8 Select an output port name and click Accept to return to the Route Services window.

9 Click Add to invoke the Edit Route Service window:
10 Click Output: Source Name / Provider Name / MPEG SN to invoke the Zoom: Source
Name / Provider Name / MPEG SN window:
11 Select the source name, provider name, and MPEG SN to associate with the selected output
port and click Accept to return to the Edit Route Service window.

12 Click Input Port to invoke the Zoom: Port Names window:
13 Select an input port to associate with the selected output port and click Accept to return to
the Edit Route Service window.
14 Click Input: Source Name / MPEG SN to invoke the Zoom: Source Name / MPEG SN
window:

15 Select the Source Name / MPEG SN to associate with the input port and click Accept to
return to the Edit Route Service window.
16 Click Accept to return to the Route Services window and add the new association to the
Associated Services panel.
Clear Output Mplex

Do not select the Clear Output Mplex button on the Route Services window, as all video and
output services will be lost! Delete routing entries by individually selecting and deleting each
service from the Route Services window.
If you select the Clear Output Mplex button on the Route Services window, all routes
terminating on the selected output port will be deleted. This will result in loss of all video on
the output port.
Route PIDs
Route PIDs enables you to add, change, or delete the routing of a specified PID from an input
port to a selected output port. The PID to be routed can be specified by PID number, or for
reserved PIDs, by PID name.
For an add operation, if the PID does not exist in the DAC 6000 database, it is added prior
to the route. The input PID and output PID number must be the same; re-mapping is not
permitted.
When changing a PID route, you can change a PID route from DAC 6000 inserted to
Pass-Through, or from Pass-Through to DAC 6000 inserted. You can also change the PID
number or the input port of a Pass-Through PID route.
A delete operation terminates the routing of the specified PID from the input port to the
selected output port.
Add a PID Route

To add a PID route:
2 Click Name to display the Zoom: Device Name Window.
3 Select the SEM you want to update and click Accept.
4 Click Accept to enable the SEM Operation panel of the Define SEM window.

6 On the Route PIDs window, ensure All is not active (not filled in) and click Name. The
Zoom: Port Names window is displayed.
7 On the Zoom: Port Names window, highlight a targeted SEM output port and click Accept.

8 On the Route PIDs window, click Add, the Edit Route PIDs window appears.
9 On the Source panel of the Edit Route PIDs window, Pass Through is automatically
selected (the radio button appears filled in).
12 On the Edit Route PID window, enter a PID number for the Pass Through PID stream.
Change a PID Route Source

To change a PID Route Source:
1 On the Define SEM window, click Select to enable Name
3 Select the SEM you want to update and click Accept. The define SEM window is
displayed again.


6 On the Route PIDs window, click Select.
7 Highlight the target row in the Defined Routes panel of the Route PIDs window.
8 On the Route PIDs window, click Change, the Edit Route PID window appears.
9 On the Source panel of the Edit Route PID window, click DAC, Pass Through, or None,
as applicable, to change the PID source.
10 If Pass Through is not selected, skip to step 13. If Pass Through is selected, on the Edit
Route PID window, click Input Port to invoke the Zoom: Port Names window.
12 On the Edit Route PID window, enter a new PID number for the Pass Through PID stream
or leave unchanged.
14 On the Route PIDs window, click Accept.

Transport Stream Pass-Through

This operation enables you to specify an input transport stream to be passed through to a
selected output port or enables stopping the pass through of a transport stream. When passed
through, the transport stream is not modified (for example, it is not encrypted or PID
re-mapping is not performed).
To add a transport stream pass-through:
1 On the Define SEM window, click Select to enable Name
3 Select the SEM you want to update and click Accept. The define SEM window is
displayed again.
The window displays the following fields:
Input Port This 80 character alphanumeric field is the assigned name for the SEM
Name input port for Transport Stream Pass Through.
Input Type Possible input port types are ASI or GbE.
Output Port This 80 character alphanumeric field is the assigned name for the SEM
Name output port for Transport Stream Pass Through.
Output Type Possible output port types are QAM, ASI, and GbE.

5 Click Transport Stream Pass-Through to display the Transport Stream Pass-Through

window. Click off the All radio button (not solid filled) in the Associated Output Port panel.
6 Click Name to invoke the Zoom: Port Names window.
7 Select an output port name and click Accept to return to the Transport Stream Pass-
Through window.
8 Click Add to invoke the Edit Transport Stream Pass-Through window:

10 Select an input port name and click Accept to return to the Edit Transport Stream Pass-
Through window.
11 Click Accept to return to the Transport Stream Pass-Through window.


Use Rebuild & Download Program Queues when you suspect that the database is corrupted.
This command rebuilds the messages (which contain the Program Name, Program Information,
and Program Rekey) and saves them in the DAC 6000 database as binary objects. Normally,
these messages are generated in advance and stored in the database before going to the SEM.
Once they are rebuilt, the DAC then downloads them to the SEM.
To rebuild and download program queues:

3 Select the SEM to be updated.
4 Click Accept. The Define SEM window is displayed again.
5 Click Accept to enable the SEM Operation panel of the window.
6 Click Rebuild & Download Program Queues. The following prompt is displayed:
7 Click Yes. The system deletes all information for the selected SEM in the DAC 6000
database; it then rebuilds and downloads the program queues to the SEM.

Define an Upconverter Device

You can add, change, or delete an upconverter in the Define Upconverter Device window.
Add an Upconverter Device

To add an upconverter device:
window.
2 Click Define Upconverter Device to display the Define Upconverter Device window:
Type This drop-down menu enables you to select either digital or analog as
the device type.
Name This 80-character alphanumeric field is the name of the upconverter
device.
Location This optional alphanumeric field typically specifies the location of the
upconverter device.

Tuned Channel This field identifies the tuned channel designated for the upconverter
device. Valid format is Annn or Bnnn, where nnn is the tuned channel
number. (i.e. A105)
Video Standard This drop-down menu enables you to select the video standard
associated with this upconverter device. This menu is only enabled for
analog type upconverter devices. If the type is digital then the video
standard drop-down menu is disabled and NTSC is the selection
shown.
3 Click Add to enable the user-editable fields.

4 Click the Type drop-down menu to display the type options.
5 Click the type of upconverter device.
6 Type a name for the upconverter device in the Name field.
8 Select a Device Location name and then click Accept to display the Define Upconverter
Device window with the Location field populated.
9 Type the tuned channel number for this upconverter device.
10 If this is an analog device, click the Video Standard drop-down menu and select the video
standard for the upconverter device.

Define a Modem Bank

You can add a new modem bank or change parameters for a modem bank through the Define
Modem Bank window.
Add a Modem Bank

To add a modem bank:
1 In the DAC 6000 Main Menu, click Manage Devices. The Manage Devices window is
displayed.
2 Click Define Modem Bank to display the Define Modem Bank window:

Name This 80-character alphanumeric field is the name assigned to the

modem bank by the operator.
Location This optional, alphanumeric field typically specifies the location of the
modem bank.
Primary Phone This field is the primary phone number used to connect to this modem
bank. Valid format is Txyyyyyyyyyyy, where T is for tone lines (omit
for pulse), x is the number needed to dial out, and y is the area code
and number.
Alternate Phone This field is the alternate phone number used to connect to this modem
bank if the primary number is not available.
Read Reserve This field is reserved for future use.
Parity This drop-down menu enables you to select Odd, Even, or None as the
parity setting for this modem bank.
Data Size This drop-down menu enables you select 8-bits or 7-bits as the data
size for this modem bank.
Baud Rate This drop-down menu enables you to select the Baud Rate for this
modem bank.

4 Type the name of the modem in the Name field.
6 Select the device location name and then click Accept to display the Define Modem Bank
window with the Location field populated.
7 Type the phone number used to access this modem bank in the Primary Phone field.
8 If there is an alternate phone number to access this modem bank, type it in the Alternate
Phone field.
9 Click the Parity drop-down menu and select an option.
10 Click the Data Size drop-down menu and select a data size option.
11 Click the Baud Rate drop-down menu and select the baud rate for the modem bank.

Define an RPD 1000/2000

The Motorola Return Path Demodulator 1000/2000 (RPD 1000/2000) receives, demodulates,
and processes upstream data from DCTs. It receives data bursts from one to six channels and
then demodulates and multiplexes them into a single datastream. The datastream is transferred
to a controlling processor through an Ethernet port.
To define an RPD 1000/2000:
window:
2 Click Define RPD to display the Define RPD window:

Name This 80-character field is the name of the RPD 1000/2000.

IP Address Internet Protocol address of the RPD 1000/2000. Display only.
Location This optional, alphanumeric field typically specifies the location
of the device.
Define Demod Boards This option displays the Define Demod Boards window.
3 Click Add to enable Name. Then type the name of the RPD 1000/2000 in the Name field.
5 Click the device location name and then click Accept to display the Define RPD window
with the Location field populated.
6 Click Accept to enable Define Demod Boards.
Configure Demod Boards

You can add, change, and delete demod boards through the Define Demod Boards window.
Add a Demod Board

1 In the Define RPD window, click Define Demod Boards to display the Define Demod
Boards window:

2 Click Add to display the Edit Demod Board window:
Board Number Maps the physical card slot in the RPD 1000/2000 (slot on the left is 1).
Online It indicates if the RPD 1000/2000 channel should participate in a
purchase poll.
Upstream Center Frequency of the demod card configured on the RPD 1000/2000.
Frequency (MHz)
Poll Timeout Value The time to wait for each DCT to respond to a poll before moving on to
the next DCT.
Note: This value affects poll time. As the Poll Timeout Value increases,
poll time increases.
Poll Retry Count Number of times to retry a poll at a specific frequency.
Note: This value affects poll time. As the Poll Retry Count

increases, poll time increases.

Return Path ID This field is a unique identifier for the Interactive Upstream Path, which
is used by the NC 1500. It can be set to any value, but must be unique
within the DAC 6000 system and also must match the NC 1500s
configuration.
Shared Return This field is used for the Interactive Upstream Path. When set to TRUE,
Path it indicates the demod board will process DAC 6000 polling and
NC 1500 interactive traffic.
Inter Cell Timeout This field is used for the Interactive Upstream Path. It indicates how
long the RADD 6000 must wait for a valid poll report-back data packet
before retrying the poll.
Minimum This is the starting amplitude for power leveling.
Amplitude
The default value is 24; however, if the plant responds in the 30s, then
the power leveling poll time can be improved by changing the starting
value to 32.
Maximum The maximum value the DCT is configured to transmit back.
Amplitude
Step Size The amplitude step increase for power leveling.
3 Type the new board number in the Board Number field.

4 Click Upstream Center Frequency (MHz) to display the Zoom: Upstream Center
Frequency window:

5 Select a frequency and then click Accept to display the Edit Demod Board window with
the field populated.
6 Type the desired value in the Poll Timeout Value field.
7 Type the desired value in the Poll Retry Count field.
8 Type in the Return Path ID, if applicable.
9 Click the Shared Return Path button and select Yes or No.
10 Type the desired value in the Inter Cell Timeout field.
11 Type the desired maximum and minimum amplitudes and step size in the corresponding
fields.
12 Click Accept on the Edit Demod Board window. The Define RPD window is displayed.

Define a Router
Add a Router
To add a Router to the DAC 6000 database:
1 On the DAC 6000 Main Menu, click Manage Devices.
2 Click Define Router to display the Define Router window:
Name A nine character alphanumeric field (for example, cmts001) used to

identify the Router.
Location This optional, alphanumeric field is assigned by the operator to specify
the location of the router.
Choice Defines the type of IP routing in use. The choices are :DOCSIS CMTS,
EuroDOCSIS CMTS or Ethernet.
Timeout Value Duration to wait for the next UDP packet during a poll.

Retry Count Number of retries allowed during a poll.

Define CMTS Invokes the Define CMTS Frequencies window. Only enabled when
Frequencies Router Choice is set to a DOCSIS CMTS or EuroDOCSIS CMTS.
Define IP Invokes the Define IP Address Ranges window.
Address
Ranges
3 Click Add on the Define Router window.

6 Select a device location name and then click Accept. The Define CMTS window is
displayed.
7 Select DOCSIS CMTS(88-860 MHz), EuroDOCSIS CMTS (112-858 MHz) or Ethernet, as
applicable.
8 Type a timeout value to wait for the next UDP packet during a poll in the Timeout Value
field.
9 Type the number of retries allowed during a poll in the Retry Count field.
10 Click Accept to enable the Define CMTS Frequencies button (not enabled for the Choice =
Ethernet) and the Define IP Address Ranges button (enabled for all Choices).

Define CMTS Frequencies

1 In the Define Router window, click Define CMTS Frequencies to display the Define
CMTS Frequencies window.
2 Click Add to display the Edit CMTS Frequency window.

3 Type a downstream frequency in the Downstream Frequency field.

4 Click the Modulation Mode drop-down menu to display the modulation types.
5 Click the modulation mode that is in use.
6 Click Accept to display the Define CMTS Frequencies window.
7 Click Accept to display the Define Router window.

Define IP Address Ranges

1 In the Define Router window, click Define IP Address Ranges to display the Define IP
Address Ranges window.
2 Click Add to display the Edit Router IP Address Range window.
3 Type the starting IP address for the range in the Starting IP Address field.

4 Type the ending IP address for the range in the Ending IP Address field.
5 Click Accept to display the Define IP Address Ranges window.
6 Click Accept to display the Define Router window.
Define the KeyList Server

The KeyList Server (KLS) performs access control functions for the DAC 6000. This software
release supports multiple KLS 1000s. Motorola provides the Group Configuration Request
(GCR) for your primary KLS 1000 when your DAC 6000 is installed, but all others must be
obtained through the Motorola Encryption Control Center (ECC) in San Diego.
1 In the Manage Devices menu, click Manage Security. The system displays the Manage
Security menu:

2 Click Define KLS. The system displays the Define KeyList Server window.
Name The name of the KLS.

IP Address IP address of the KLS retrieved from the host file.
Multicast Address Not used.
Group Number ID number for the encryption element group.
Tag Number Number on the tag on the rear of the KLS.
Activity State Valid values are: Validation Failure, Inactive, Active Online, Active
Standby, and Incompatible UKL.
Error Code Last recorded error code is displayed.

3 Click Select and then click Name. The system displays the Zoom: KLS Name window.
4 Select the KLS name and click Accept. The system redisplays the Define KLS window
with the fields populated.
5 Click Accept, and then click Display Encryption Elements. The system displays the
Display KLS TSODAs window.
This display-only window includes the following fields:
Unit Address The addresses of the TSODAs in the KLS.

Activity State The activity state of the TSODAs in the KLS.

Error Code The last error reported by that TSODA.
Obtain Group Config Request

To obtain a group configuration request (GCR) from the Encryption Control Center (ECC)
Computer:
1 Click Obtain Group Config Request in the Manage Security window to display the
Obtain Group Configuration Request window:
Name Name of the KLS group.

Group Number Group number identifying this KLS group.

Customer ID Unique 8-character alphanumeric string identifying the

customer.
File ID 9-digit alphanumeric identifying name of the Unit KeyList file.
Send GCR to Key List If selected, this option sends the GCR to the Motorola KLS
Server immediately upon receipt.
Delay Before If selected, this option creates a delay before dialing out via the
Requesting GCR modem.
Send Request If selected, dials out for an update.
2 Click Select and then click Name to display the Zoom: Group Name window:
3 Click on a group name in the list and then click Accept to return to the Obtain Group
Config Request window.
4 Click Accept.
5 Click Send Request. The DAC 6000 displays a pop-up window indicating the process is
lengthy.
6 At the prompt, click Yes to initiate the configuration request process.
View Unit KeyList

The View Unit KeyList window shows the state of assigned keys.
To access the View Unit KeyList window:
1 On the DAC 6000 Main Menu, click Manage Devices to display the Manage Devices
window.
2 On the Manage Devices window, click Manage Security to display the Manage Security
window.

3 On the Manage Security window, click View Unit KeyList to display the View Unit
KeyList window:

Add an OM 1000 to the Database

To add an OM 1000 to the database:
1 In the Main Menu, click Manage Devices.
2 In the Manage Devices window, click Define OM.
3 Click Add to display the user-editable fields.
4 Type om002 in the Name field.
6 Highlight Horsham and click Accept.
7 In the Tuned Channel field, type A1.
8 Type 1000 in the Insertion Bandwidth field to establish the total bandwidth available for the
DACs OOB communication.
Note: Tune the television to a digital channel, for example 400 through 409 before doing the
next few operations. This will allow you to monitor the effects of the operations.

To rebuild and download program queues to an MPS:
2 In the Manage Devices window, click Define MPS.
3 Click Select, then click Name to display the Zoom: Device Name window.
4 Highlight mps01 and click Accept.
5 Click Accept.
6 Click Rebuild & Download Program Queues.
7 Click Yes to pop-up confirmation window.
8 Monitor video loss. Wait for video to return.
Flush & Fill

To flush and fill an MPS:
1 In the Define MPS window, click Flush & Fill.
2 Click Yes.
3 Monitor video loss. Wait for video to return.


To re-acquire ACP addresses for an MPS:
1 In the Define MPS window, click Re-Acquire ACP Addresses.
2 Click Yes.
Assign Services to Decrypting TSODAs

To assign services to the decrypt TSODAs on an MPS:
1 In the Define MPS window, click Configure Input Ports.
2 Click Select.
3 Highlight Slot 1 Port 1 In_HITS 7.
4 Click Assign Services to Decrypting ACPs.
5 Click Select and highlight the ACP number (for example, 1_1).
Note: Refer to the MPS sheet for the service to Decrypt ACP information.
6 Click Change to display the Edit ACP Sources window.
7 Click No Service to toggle the selection off.
8 Click Input: Source Name/MPEG SN: to display the Zoom: Source Name/MPEG SN
window.
9 In the Zoom: Source Name/MPEG SN window, highlight the appropriate Source
Name/MPEG SN.
10 Click Accept twice.
11 Repeat steps 6-11 for each ACP and service coming in on Slot 1 Port 1.
12 Click Exit.
13 Highlight Slot 1 Port 2 In_HITS 8.
14 Click Assign Services to Decrypting ACPs.
15 Click Select and highlight the ACP number.
16 Click Change to display the Edit ACP Sources window.
17 Click No Service to toggle the selection off.
18 Click Input: Source Name/MPEG SN: to display the Zoom: Source Name/MPEG SN
window.
19 In the Zoom: Service & Provider Name window, highlight the appropriate Source
Name/MPEG SN.
21 Repeat steps 16-21 for each ACP and service coming in on Slot 1 Port 2.

Display MPS Device Status

To view the status of an MPS:
1 In the Define MPS window, click Display MPS Device Status.
2 Observe the MPSs status.
Retrieve an RPD and Define a Demod Board

To retrieve an RPD and define a demod board:
2 In the Manage Devices window, click Define RPD.
3 In the Define RPD window, click Select.
5 Highlight rpd01 and click Accept.
6 Click Accept.
7 Click Define Demod Boards
8 Click Add
9 Type 2 for the Board Number.
10 Click Upstream Center Frequency (MHz).
11 Highlight 8.096 and click Accept.
12 Type 2 in the Return Path ID field.
13 Click Accept.
Add a Digital Upconverter to the Database

To add a digital upconverter to the database:
2 In the Manage Devices window, click Define Upconverter Device.


4 Toggle Type to Digital.
5 Type C8U_100 in the Name field.
6 Click Location to display the Zoom: Device Location window:
7 Highlight Horsham and click Accept.
8 Type A100 into the Tuned Channel field .
9 Click Accept.
10 Click Exit.
Add an Analog Upconverter to the Database

To add an analog upconverter to the database:
2 In the Manage Devices window, click Define Upconverter Device.
3 In the Upconverter Definition window, click Add.
4 Toggle Type to Analog.
5 Type C6M_A37 in the Name field.
7 Highlight Horsham, and click Accept.
8 Type A37 in the Tuned Channel field.
9 Verify Video Standard is set to NTSC.
10 Click Accept.
11 Click Exit.

Lab Exercise 5
Add an OM 1000 to the Database

1 Add an OM 1000 to the database using the following information:
Name = om002
Location = Horsham
Tuned Channel = A1
Insertion Bandwidth = 1000
Note: Tune the television to a digital channel, for example 400 through 409 before doing the
next few operations. This will allow you to monitor the effects of the operations.

1 Rebuild and download program queues for mps01.
2 Monitor video loss.
Flush & Fill

1 Perform a Flush and Fill operation on mps01.
2 Monitor video loss.

1 Perform a Re-Acquire ACP Addresses operation on mps01.
Assign Services to Decrypting ACPs

1 Assign the services to the decrypt ACPs on mps01.
Note: Refer to the MPS sheet for the service to Decrypt TSODA information.
2 Monitor the return of video on the digital channels.
Display MPS Device Status

1 View the status of mps01.
Retrieve an RPD and Define a Demod Board

1 Select rpd01.
2 Add a demod board to it using the following information:
Board Number = 2
Upstream Center Frequency (MHz) = 8.096

Return Path ID = 2
Other Fields = Leave set to defaults
Add a Digital Upconverter to the Database

1 Add a digital upconverter to the database using the following information:
Name = C8U_100
Location = Horsham
Tuned Channel = A100
Add an Analog Upconverter to the Database

1 Add an analog upconverter to the database using the following information:
Name = C6M_A37
Location = Horsham
Tuned Channel = A37
Video Standard = NTSC

Learning Exercise 5
1 The IP addresses for the headend devices are read out of the hosts file.
2 The TSODA unit address is a unique 18 digit identifier following the format
NNNN-NNNNN-NNNNN-NNNN (where N = a number from 0 to 9).
3 A single decryption TSODA in an IRT or MPS can decrypt two services.
4 A Flush & Fill operation to the IRT, MPS or SEM does not interrupt services.
5 The Rebuild & Download Program Queues to the IRT, MPS or SEM does not interrupt
services.
6 The Display Object Load Status Window identifies all of the code objects defined in the
DAC 6000 system that have been successfully downloaded to each RADD 6000.
7 Only one RADD 6000 can be configured on the DAC 6000.
8 To assign services to decrypting TSODAs or ACPs, the services need to be
previously defined on the DAC 6000.
9 There can be only one Upstream Frequency per RPD.
10 The Copy Protection Phone Number field on the Define RADD window is the telephone
number for a subscriber to call to enable copy protection features on their terminal.

Section 6
Manage Plants & Device Linkage
Define a Carrier Definition Table (CDT)
Define a Headend
Configure the DAC 6000 for Downstream and DSG Plants
Define RF, Telco and IP-Return Upstream Plants
Assign Devices to Downstream, DSG and Upstream Plants
List examples of devices that are linked

6-2 Manage Plants & Device Linkage
Define and Manage Plants

The DAC 6000 Multiple Headend Control System (MHCS) enables you to define and manage:
Multiple Carrier Definition Tables (CDTs)
Multiple headend configurations
Multiple downstream plants
Multiple DSG plants
Multiple upstream plants (RF, Telco and/or IP-Return)
Multiple Virtual Channel Maps (VCMs)
Carrier Definition Table (CDT)

When defining a headend in the DAC 6000, it will require you to establish which Carrier
Definition Table is being used. The Carrier Definition Table is the frequency plan.
There are eight predefined CDTs in the DAC. They are as follows:
EIA Standard - Center Frequency
General Instrument Standard - Picture Carrier Frequency
General Instrument HRC - Center Frequency
EIA Standard - MMDS and Off Air - Center Frequency
Hybrid STD and HRC - Center Frequency
Saudi Standard - MMDS - Center Frequency
DVB HRC Great Britain CCIR System I - Center Frequency
EIA IRC - Center Frequency
If your system does not use one of the eight predefined CDTs, you can copy one and customize
it to accommodate your systems needs.
CDTs cannot be built from scratch nor can you delete or edit the eight predefined CDTs.

Manage Plants & Device Linkage 6-3
Define/Duplicate a Carrier Definition Table

To define/duplicate a Carrier Definition Table:
1 From the DAC 6000 Main Menu, click Manage Plants.
2 Click Define Carrier Definition Table to display the Define the Carrier Definition Table
window.
3 Click Select.
The window display the following fields:
CDT Information Lists the eight predefined system frequency maps and customized
frequency maps. It also indicates the build status as follows:
Built the map currently used by the headend.
Not Built a map being customized from the currently Built map that
will have the same name. It indicates, even though the names are the
same, this version is Not Built in the system.

Building temporarily activates after Build CDT is clicked to indicate

the map currently used by the system is being replaced with its
customized clone Not Built map.
Duplicate CDT Invokes the Duplicate Carrier Definition Table window, which is used to
identify the predefined map that is to be copied and assign a name to the
new CDT.
Build CDT Initiates replacing (Building) the current map Built into the system with
the Not Built map.
Refresh Screen Updates information in the CDT Information panel.
4 Select a Carrier Definition Table and then click Duplicate CDT. The Duplicate Carrier
Definition Table window is displayed.
5 In the New CDT Name field, enter the name for the customized CDT.
6 Click Accept. The Define Carrier Definition Table window is displayed.

7 Select the new Carrier Definition Table and then click Change. The Edit Carrier
Definition Table window is displayed.
8 Click Define CDT Channels. The Define CDT Channels window is displayed.
9 Click Select.

10 Select the channel to be changed and click Change. The Edit CDT Channel Window is
displayed.
CDT Identification Displays the name of the CDT that is being modified.
Name
Channel Number This display field identifies the tuned channel number that is
being modified.
Channel This optional field is used to label or describe the channel.
Description
Frequency (KHz) This is the frequency of the channel.
Cable Type This option indicates if the frequency is OOB (Out-Of-Band) or
Inband.

11 Type a description in the Channel Description field.

12 Type in the frequency of the channel.
13 Click the Cable Type pull-down menu and select the type.
14 Click Accept. The Define CDT Channels window is displayed with the updated channel
information.

Define a Headend
You can add, change, and delete a headend through the Define Headend window.
Headend Characteristics
The characteristics of a headend are:
It uses a single Carrier Definition Table (CDT).
It contains one or more downstream and/or DSG plants.
It contains one or more upstream plants.
It utilizes one or more OM 1000s.
It utilizes one or more RADD 6000s
Add a Headend
To add a headend:
1 In the DAC 6000 Main Menu, click Manage Plants to display the Manage Plants window:

2 Click Define Headend to display the Define Headend window:
3 Click Add to display the Edit Headend window:
Name This 80-character, alphanumeric field is the name of the

headend.
Is Default This option makes the headend the default for the DAC 6000. If
any terminals are added to the DAC 6000 that do not specify
Headend, they are assigned to the default headend.
Carrier Definition This option displays the Carrier Definition Table window and
Table enables you to select the appropriate Carrier Definition Table for
this headend.

External Handle This 5-digit integer field from 1 through 65535 is the value that
the business/billing system uses to communicate headend
information to the DAC 6000 during add or modify terminal
operations.
4 To make this headend the default for the DAC 6000, click the box next to Is Default to
enable it. This option is enabled when the box is dark.
5 Type a name for the new headend in the Name field.
6 Click Carrier Definition Table to display the Zoom: CDT Name window:
7 Click a Carrier Definition Table name and then click Accept to display the Edit Headend
window with the Carrier Definition Table field populated.
8 Type a unique, 5-digit number from 1 through 65535 in the External Handle field.
9 Click Accept to update the Headend Information and display the Define Headend window.

Define a Downstream Plant

You can add, change and delete elements of the downstream plant through the Manage Plants
window on the DAC 6000 Main Menu.
Downstream Plant Characteristics

Some characteristics that define a downstream plant is that it can:
Be linked to only one headend.
Have many virtual channel maps.
Be configured for only one OM 1000 (but one OM 1000 can feed multiple downstream
plants).
Have 7 sets of multicast 16 addresses.
Be associated with multiple upstream plants.
Be associated with one RADD 6000

Add a Downstream Plant

To add a downstream plant to a headend:
1 In the DAC 6000 Main Menu, click Manage Plants to display the Manage Plants window.
2 Click Define Downstream Plant to display the Define Downstream Plant window:
3 Click the box labeled All next to the Name field to enable Name and disable All option.
4 Click Name to display the Zoom: Headend Name window:
5 Select a Headend Name and then click Accept to display the Define Downstream Plant

6 Click Add to display the Edit Downstream Plant window:
Headend Name This 80-character alphanumeric field displays the name of the
headend to which this downstream plant is being assigned.

Plant Name This 80-character alphanumeric field is the name of the downstream
plant.
RADD This display field identifies the RADD 6000 assigned to he
downstream plant.
Active Panel The Plant ID Information Active Panel enables you to select a Plant
Options Name, set it as the default and select an External Plant Handle for
this downstream plant.
The Device Ports Active Panel enables you to add, change, or delete
downstream plant device ports.
The Multicast-16 Addresses Active Panel enables you to add,
change, or delete downstream plant multicast-16 addresses.
Plant Name This 80-character alphanumeric field is the name of the downstream
plant.
Is Default This option makes the downstream plant the default downstream
plant for the headend.
External Plant This 5-digit integer from 1 through 65535 is the value that the
Handle business/billing system uses to communicate with the DAC 6000
during add and modify terminal operations.
7 Type a new plant name in the Plant Name field on the active panel.
8 To make this plant name the default downstream plant for the headend, enable Is Default.
This option is enabled when the box is dark. Click the box next to Is Default to enable or
disable it.
9 Type a unique, 5-digit number from 1 through 65535 in the External Plant Handle field.
10 Click Accept to display the Define Downstream Plant window.

11 Click the diamond next to Device Ports to display the Device Ports Table Operation Panel:
The Device Ports Table Operation panel displays the following fields:
Devices This field displays the downstream devices associated with this downstream
plant.

Ports This field displays the port on the device that is associated with this
downstream plant.
12 Click Add to display the Edit Downstream Plant Device Port window:
13 Click Device and Port Name to display the Zoom: Device & Port Name Window.
14 Select a Device and Port Name and then click Accept to display Edit Downstream Plant
Device Ports Window.
15 Click Accept to display the Edit Downstream Plant window.

16 Click the diamond next to Multicast-16 Addresses to display the Multicast-16 Addresses
Table Operation panel:

17 Click Add on the Multicast-16 Addresses table operation panel to display the Edit
Downstream Plant Multicast 16 Addresses window:
18 Click Name to display the Zoom: Multicast16 Name window:
19 Select a name and then click Accept to display the Edit Downstream Plant Multicast 16
Addresses window with the name field populated.
20 Click Accept to display the Edit Downstream Plant window.
21 Click the diamond next to Plant ID Information to display the Plant ID Information table
operation panel.
Change a Downstream Plant

To change information for a downstream plant:
2 Click Define Downstream Plant to display the Define Downstream Plant window.
3 Click Select to enable user-editable fields.

4 Select the downstream plant to be changed and then click Change to display the Edit
Downstream Plant window.
5 Change the information and then click Accept to update the database.
Delete a Downstream Plant

To delete a downstream plant:
2 Click Define Downstream Plant to display the Define Downstream Plant window.
4 Select the downstream plant to be deleted.
5 Click Delete. The following confirmation window is displayed:
6 Click Yes to delete this downstream plant and update the database.
Note: To delete a Downstream Plant, you must first delete all devices and multicast 16
addresses assigned to it.
Display Plant Associations

You can display downstream plant associations with the Display Plant Associations option on
the Define Downstream Plant window.
To display plant associations:
1 In the Define Downstream Plant window, click Select to enable the Downstream Plants
section of the window.
2 Select the downstream plant for which you want to display associations. Display Plant
Associations is enabled.

3 Click Display Plant Associations to display the Downstream Plant Associations window:
Downstream Plant This field displays the name of the downstream plant for which you are
Name displaying associations.
Display Choices The OM option displays the name of the OM 1000 associated with this
Options downstream plant.
The VCMs option displays the names of the VCMs associated with this
downstream plant.
The C6Us option displays the names of the upconverters associated
with this downstream plant.
The Analog Devices option displays the names of the Analog Devices
associated with this downstream plant.
The Multicast-16 Address option displays the names of the multicast-16
addresses associated with this downstream plant.

4 Click the diamond next to the Display Choices option that you want to view.
5 Click Exit to display the Define Downstream Plant window.
Move a Downstream Plant

You can move a downstream plant association to a different headend with the Move
Downstream Plant option on the Define Downstream Plant window.
If the OM 1000 is uniquely linked to one DSP, it will also move.
If the OM 1000 is shared with other DSPs on original HE, it will not move. A new OM
1000 will have to be created by the user.
If the VCM is uniquely linked and HE contains same CDT, the VCM will move.
If the VCM is shared with other DSPs on an original HE, it will not move. A place holder
VCM will be created.
A DSP can be moved from one RADD 6000 to another within the same HE.
Note: Cannot move Default Downstream Plant.
To move a downstream plant:
1 In the Define Downstream Plant window, click Select to enable the Downstream Plants
section of the window.
2 Select the downstream plant to be moved. Move Downstream Plant is enabled.

3 Click Move Downstream Plant to display the Move Downstream Plant window with the
Downstream Plant, Headend, RADD and OM Name fields populated.
4 Click New Headend Name to display the Zoom: Headend Name window.
5 Select the headend to which you want to move this downstream plant and click Accept.
6 Click New RADD Name to display the Zoom: RADD Name window.
7 Select the RADD to which you want to move this downstream plant and then click Accept.
8 Click New OM Name to display the Zoom: Headend Name window.
9 Select the OM to which you want to move this downstream plant and then click Accept.
10 Click Accept to move the downstream plant.

Define a DOCSIS Set-top Gateway (DSG) Plant

You can add, change and delete elements of the DSG plant through the Manage Plants window
on the DAC 6000 Main Menu.
Add a DSG Plant

To add a DSG plant to a headend:
2 Click Define DSG Plant to display the Define DSG Plant window:
4 Click Name to display the Zoom: Headend Name window:

5 Select a Headend Name and then click Accept to display the Define DSG Plant window
with the Name field populated.
6 Click Add to display the Edit DSG Plant window:

Headend Name This 80-character alphanumeric field displays the name of the
headend to which this DSG plant is being assigned.
Plant Name This 80-character alphanumeric field is the name of the DSG plant.
RADD Name This display field identifies the RADD 6000 assigned to the DSG
plant.
Active Panel The Identification Active Panel enables you to add, change, or delete
Options a Plant Name, set it as the default, define an External Plant Handle
stream name, description, IP address mode, IP address, RADD and
insertion bandwidth for the DSG plant.
The Device Ports Active Panel enables you to add, change, or delete
DSG plant device ports.
The Multicast-16 Addresses Active Panel enables you to add,
change, or delete DSG plant multicast-16 addresses.
Plant Name This 80-character alphanumeric field is the name of the DSG plant.
Is Default This option makes the DSG plant the default DSG plant for the
headend.
External Plant This 5-digit integer from 1 through 65535 is the value that the
Handle business system uses to communicate with the DAC 6000 during add
and modify terminal operations.
DSG Stream Name This alphanumeric field is the name of the data stream from DSG
RADD to the destination CMTS.
Description This alphanumeric field is a description of the data stream from the
DSG RADD to the destination CMTS.
IP Address Mode This drop-down menu enables you to select IP Multicast, IP Source
Multicast or IP Unicast as the IP address mode. Typically it will be
IP Multicast.
IP Address This is the destination IP address being used by the DSG RADD to
address messages to the CMTS.
RADD Name This is the name of the DSG RADD that is assigned to this DSG
plant.
Insertion This is the insertion rate for the DSG RADD. The recommended
Bandwidth (kbps) setting is 700.
7 Type a new plant name in the Plant Name field on the active panel.
8 To make this plant name the default downstream plant for the headend, enable Is Default.
This option is enabled when the box is dark. Click the box next to Is Default to enable or
disable it.

9 Type a unique, 5-digit number from 1 through 65535 in the External Plant Handle field.
10 Type a new stream name in the DSG Stream Name field.
11 Type a description for the stream.
12 Select the appropriate IP Address Mode. Typically it will be IP Multicast.
13 Type in the IP Address.
14 Click RADD Name to display the Zoom: RADD Name window.
15 Select a RADD and then click Accept to display the Define DSG Plant window with the
Name field populated.
16 Type in the desired insertion rate.

17 Click the diamond next to Device Ports to display the Device Ports Table Operation Panel:
The Device Ports Table Operation panel displays the following fields:
Devices This field displays the downstream devices associated with this DSG plant.
Ports This field displays the port on the device that is associated with this DSG plant.

18 Click Add to display the Edit Device Ports window:
19 Click Device and Port Name to display the Zoom: Device & Port Name Window.
20 Select a Device and Port Name and then click Accept to display Edit Device Ports Window.
21 Click Accept to display the Edit DSG Plant window.

22 Click the diamond next to Multicast-16 Addresses to display the Multicast-16 Addresses
Table Operation panel:

23 Click Add on the Multicast-16 Addresses table operation panel to display the Edit
Multicast 16 Addresses window:
24 Click Name to display the Zoom: Multicast16 Name window.

25 Select a name and then click Accept to display the Edit Multicast 16 Addresses window
with the name field populated.
26 Click Accept to display the Edit DSG Plant window.
27 Click the diamond next to Identification to display the Identification table operation panel.

Define an RF Upstream Plant

You can add, change and delete an RF upstream plant in the Define RF Upstream Plant window.
RF Upstream Plant Characteristics

RF upstream plants can:
Be associated with only one headend.
Be linked with separate RPD demod boards (two RF upstream plants cannot be linked to
the same RPD demod board).
Contain multiple demod boards with different frequencies.
Contain multiple demod boards of the same frequency.
Be linked to only one downstream plant.
Add an RF Upstream Plant

To add an RF upstream plant:
2 Click Define RF Upstream Plant to display the Define RF Upstream Plant window:

Name This field displays the name of the downstream plant associated with
this upstream plant.
All This option enables you to view all of the upstream plants on the
DAC 6000 or only the upstream plants associated with the
downstream plant identified in the Name Field.
Upstream Plant This field is the upstream plant name.
Name
Is Default This field indicates whether this upstream plant is the default for the
downstream plant identified in the Name field.
Upstream Plant This 5-digit integer field from 1 through 65535 is the value that the
External Handle business/billing system uses to communicate upstream plant
operations.
Associated This is the name of the downstream plant associated with the
Downstream Plant upstream plant.
Name
Associated This field identifies the downstream plant in the system table.
Downstream Plant
Index
3 Click the box next to All to enable Name.

4 Click Name to display the Zoom: Downstream Plant Name window:
5 Select a Downstream Plant Name and then click Accept to display the Define RF Upstream
Plant window with the Name field populated.

6 Click Add to display the Edit RF Upstream Plant window:
Upstream Plant Name This display-only field is the name of the upstream plant.
Downstream Plant Name This display-only field is the name of the downstream plant
with which this upstream plant is associated.
Active Panel The Identification option enables you to select an upstream
plant name, the associated downstream plant name, the
upstream plant external handle and whether the upstream
plant is the default for the downstream plant.
The RPD Channels option enables you to add, change, and

delete RPD information for the system.

Upstream Plant Name This field displays and enables you to add, change, and
delete the upstream plant.
Associated Downstream This field displays and enables you to add, change, and
Plant Name delete the downstream plant associated with the upstream
plant.
Upstream Plant External This 5-digit integer field from 1 through 65535 is the value
Handle that the business/billing system uses to communicate
upstream plant information to the DAC 6000 during add or
modify terminal operations.
This Upstream Plant Is This option makes this upstream plant the default for the
Default For The specified downstream plant.
Downstream Plant
7 Type the Upstream Plant Name.

8 Click Associated Downstream Plant Name to display the Zoom: Downstream Plant
Name window:
9 Select a Downstream Plant Name and then click Accept to display the Edit RF Upstream
Plant window with the Downstream Plant Name field populated.
10 Type a five-digit integer in the External Handle field.
11 If this is the default upstream plant for downstream plant identified in the Downstream
Plant Name field, enable the box next to This Upstream Plant is Default For The
Downstream Plant. When the box is dark, this option is enabled.

12 Click the diamond next to RPD Channels to display the RPD Channel Table Operation
panel:
The RPD Channels Table Operation panel displays the following fields:
RPD This 80-character alphanumeric field is the name of the RPD.

Channel This is the channel configured for this RPD.
Frequency This is the frequency of the channel configured for this RPD.

13 Click Add to display the Edit Upstream Plant RPD Channels window:
14 Click RPD Name, Channel, Frequency to display the Zoom: RPD Channel window:
15 Select an RPD Name, Channel, Frequency and then click Accept to display the Edit
Upstream Plant RPD Channels window with the field populated.
16 Click Accept to display the Edit RF Upstream Plant window with the RPD Channel Table
Operation window populated.
17 Click Identification. The default panel is displayed.

Change an RF Upstream Plant

To change an RF upstream plant:
2 Click Define RF Upstream Plant to display the Define RF Upstream Plant window.
4 Select an Upstream Plant Name. Change is enabled.
5 Click Change to display the Edit RF Upstream Plant window.
6 Change the information and then click Accept to display the Define RF Upstream Plant
window and update the database.
Delete an RF Upstream Plant

To delete an RF upstream plant:
2 Click Define RF Upstream Plant to display the Define RF Upstream Plant window.
4 Select an Upstream Plant Name. Delete is enabled.
5 Click Delete. The following confirmation window is displayed:
6 Click Yes to delete the upstream plant and update the database.
Note: To delete an RF Upstream Plant, you must first delete all RPD channels assigned to it.

Define an IP-Return Upstream Plant

You can add, change and delete IP-Return upstream plants through the Define IP-Return
Upstream Plant window.
Add an IP-Return Upstream Plant

To add an IP-return upstream plant:
2 Click Define IP-Return Upstream Plant to display the Define IP-Return Upstream Plant
window:

Upstream Plant This field is the upstream plant name.
Name
Is Default This field indicates whether this upstream plant is the default for the
downstream plant identified in the Name field.
Upstream Plant This 5-digit integer field from 1 through 65535 is the value that the
External Handle business/billing system uses to communicate upstream plant
operations.
Associated This is the name of the downstream plant associated with the
Downstream Plant upstream plant.
Name
Associated This field identifies the downstream plant in the system table.
Downstream Plant

Index
3 Click Add to display the Edit IP-Return Upstream Plant window:
Upstream Plant Name This display-only field is the name of the upstream plant.
Active Panel Options The Identification Active Panel enables you to add, change, and
delete the upstream plant name and the upstream plant external
handle. Also you can set the upstream plant as the default for a
downstream plant.
The IP Address Range Active Panel enables you to add, change,
and delete an IP address range.
Upstream Plant Name This option displays the Zoom: Upstream Plant Name window

that enables you to select the upstream plant name.

Upstream Plant This 5-digit integer field from 1 through 65535 is the value that
External Handle the business/billing system uses to communicate headend
operations.
Return Type This drop-down menu enables you to select either DOCSIS or
Ethernet as the return type.
This Upstream Plant If enabled, it makes this upstream plant the default for the
Is Default For the downstream plant that you specify.
Downstream Plant
4 Type the name of the upstream plant in the Upstream Plant Name field.
5 Type a value in Upstream Plant External Handle.
6 Click the Return Type drop-down menu to display the return type options.
7 Click the type of return in use.
8 If you want to assign this upstream plant as the default for a downstream plant, click the
box next to This Upstream Plant Is Default For The Downstream Plant to enable.
9 Click the diamond next to IP Address Range to display the IP Address Range Table
Operation panel:

10 Click Add to display the Edit Upstream Plant Router IP Address Range window:

11 Click Router Name, IP Address Range to display the Zoom: Router/IP Address Range
window:
12 Select a Router Device Name and then click Accept to display the Edit Upstream Plant
Router IP Address Range window with the Router Name, IP Address Range field
populated.
13 Click Accept to display the Edit IP-Return Upstream Plant window with the Router Name
and IP Address Range displayed in the IP Address Range Table Operation panel.

Define a Telco Upstream Plant

You can add, change and delete Telco upstream plants through the Define Telco Upstream
Plant window.
Telco Upstream Plant Characteristics

Telco upstream plants:
Are not linked with downstream plants.
Can be the default for any downstream plant.
Add a Telco Upstream Plant

To add a Telco upstream plant:
2 Click Define Telco Upstream Plant to display the Define Telco Upstream Plant window:
Upstream Plant Name This 80-character alphanumeric field is the upstream plant name.
Is Default This field displays if the upstream plant is a default for any
downstream plants.

operations.
3 Click Add to display the Edit Telco Upstream Plant window:
Upstream Plant Name This field is the upstream plant name.

Active Panel Options The Identification Active Panel enables you to add, change, and
delete the upstream plant name and the upstream plant external
handle. Also you can set the upstream plant as the default for a
downstream plant.
The Modem Banks Active Panel enables you to add, change, and
delete modem banks.
Upstream Plant Name This option displays the Zoom: Upstream Plant Name window

that enables you to select the upstream plant name.

operations.
This Upstream Plant This option works in conjunction with the Downstream Plants
is Default For: option. If enabled, it makes this upstream plant the default for
the downstream plant that you specify.
Downstream Plants This option displays the Downstream Plants window that enables
you to add, change, and delete downstream plants.
4 Type the name of the upstream plant in the Upstream Plant Name field.
5 Type a value in Upstream Plant External Handle.
6 If you want to assign this upstream plant as the default for a downstream plant, click the
box next to This Upstream Plant is Default For:. Downstream Plants is enabled.
7 Click Downstream Plants to display the Downstream Plants window:

8 Click Add to display the Edit Downstream Plants window:
9 Click Name to display the Zoom: Downstream Plant Name window:
10 Select a Downstream Plant and then click Accept to display the Edit Downstream Plants
11 Click Accept to display the Downstream Plants window with the Downstream Plant
displayed in the Downstream Plants section of the window.
12 Click Accept to display the Edit Telco Upstream Plant window.

13 Click the diamond next to Modem Banks to display the Modem Banks Table Operation
panel:
14 Click Add to display the Edit Upstream Plant Modem Banks window:

15 Click Name to display the Zoom: Device Name window:

16 Select a Device Name and then click Accept to display the Edit Upstream Plant Modem
Banks window with the Name field populated.
17 Click Accept to display the Edit Telco Upstream Plant window with the modem bank name
displayed in the Modem Bank Table Operation panel.
Define Device Linkage

The Define Device Linkage window is used to identify connection between specific devices.
Linkages are made from an output device to an input device. An OM, RPD, router, modem
bank or upconverter needs to be assigned to a plant before linking it. The following devices
need to be linked if present in the system configuration:
RADD to OM
RPD to RADD
Router to RADD
Modem bank to RADD
IRT or MPS to Upconverter
Note: DSG plant linkage(s) are automatically created and cannot be modified.

Add a Device Linkage

To define device linkages:
2 Click Define Device Linkage to display the Define Device Linkage window:
Output Device Name The name of the device sending data.

Output Device Port The device port designated to send the data.
Input Device Name The name of the device receiving the data.
Input Device Port The device port designated to receive the data.
4 Click Name to display the Zoom:Device Name window.
5 Select a Device and then click Accept to display the Define Device Linkage window with
the Name field populated.

6 Click Add to display the Edit Device Linkage window:
7 Click Output Device Port to display the Zoom:Logical Port Names window.
8 Select a port and click Accept.
9 Click Input Device Name to display the Zoom:Device Names window.
10 Select a name and click Accept.
11 Click Input Device Port to display the Zoom:Logical Port Names window.
12 Select a port and click Accept.
13 Click Accept to display the Define Device Linkage window.

Add a Headend
To add a Headend to the database:
1 In the Main Menu, click Manage Plants.
2 In the Manage Plants window, click Define Headend.
3 Click Add.
4 Type Horsham Headend in the Name field.
5 Click Carrier Definition Table.
6 Highlight EIA Standard-center Frequency, click Accept.
7 Type 2 in the External Handle field.
8 Click Accept.
9 Click Exit.

To add a Downstream Plant to the database:
1 In the Manage Plants window, click Define Downstream Plant.
2 In the Define Downstream Plant, click All.
3 Click Name
4 Highlight Horsham Headend, click Accept.
5 Click Add.
6 Type Horsham DSP in the Plant Name field.
7 Type 5 in the External Plant Handle field.
8 From Active Panel, click Device Ports.
9 Click Add.
10 Click Device and Port Name.
11 Highlight C8U_100 and click Accept twice.
12 From Active Panel, click Multicast-16 Addresses.
13 Click Add.
14 Click Name.
15 Highlight TV Guide, click Accept.
16 Click Accept.
17 From the Active Panel, click Plant ID Information.

18 Click Accept.
19 Click Exit.
Add a Device to a Downstream Plant

To add a Device to a Downstream Plant and the database:
1 In the Manage Plants window, click Define Downstream Plant.
2 Click Select.
3 Highlight DSP 1.
4 Click Change.
5 From Active Panel, click Device Ports.
6 Click Add.
7 Click Device & Port Name.
8 Highlight C6M_A37, click Accept.
9 Click Accept.
10 From the Active Panel, click Plant ID Information.
11 Click Accept.
12 Click Exit.

To add an RF Upstream Plant to the database:
1 In the Manage Plants window, click Define RF Upstream Plant.
2 In the Define RF Upstream Plant, click All.
3 Click Name.
4 Highlight Horsham DSP, click Accept.
5 Click Add.
6 Type Horsham USP in the Upstream Plant Name field.
7 Type 3 in the Upstream Plant External Handle field.
8 From the Active Panel, click RPD Channels.
9 Click Add.
10 Click RPD Name, Channel, Frequency.
RPD Name Channel Frequency
11 Highlight: rpd01 2 8.096

13 From the Active Panel, click Identification.

14 Click Accept.
15 Click Exit.
View Device Linkages

2 Click Define Device Linkage to display the Define Device Linkage window.
3 Verify that there are the following linkages:
IRT to Upconverter, MPS to Upconverter, RADD to OM, RPD to RADD and Modem Bank
to RADD
Are there any more displayed?
4 Click Exit to return to the Manage Devices menu.

Lab Exercise 6
Add a Headend
1 Add a Headend to the database using the following information:
Name = Horsham Headend
Carrier Definition Table = EIA Standard-center Frequency
External Handle = 2

1 Add a Downstream Plant to the database using the following information:
Headend Name = Horsham Headend
Downstream Plant Name = Horsham DSP
External Plant Handle = 5
Device and Port Name = C8U_100
Multicast-16 Address = TV Guide
Add a Device to a Downstream Plant

1 Add a Device to a Downstream Plant using the following information:
Downstream Plant = DSP 1
Device & Port Name = C6M_A37

1 Add an RF Upstream Plant to the database using the following information:
Downstream Plant Name = Horsham DSP
Upstream Plant Name = Horsham USP
Upstream Plant External Handle = 3
RPD Name = rpd01
Channel = 2
Frequency = 8.096
View Device Linkages

1 Display the Define Device Linkage window. Verify that there are the following linkages:
IRT to Upconverter, MPS to Upconverter, RADD to OM, RPD to RADD and Modem
bank to RADD Are there any more linkages?

Section 7
Schedule Services and Programs
List the steps involved in configuring a service
Build a digital service on the DAC 6000
Build an analog service on the DAC 6000
Define a program epoch

7-2 Schedule Services and Programs
Service Providers and Sources Overview

This segment of the training class focuses on the procedures for defining and maintaining
services and associated sources. A service can be a subscription, an impulse pay-per-view
(IPPV) program, or call-ahead pay-per-view (CAPPV) program. Subscriptions are premium
channels of continuous duration, such as HBO. Programs have a fixed duration, such as a
sporting event, concert, or movie.
Define a Service Provider

To define the provider of the specified service, use the Define Service Provider window. In the
Main Menu, click Manage Services.
You can add, change, and delete service providers through the Define Service Provider
window.

Schedule Services and Programs 7-3
Add a Service Provider

To add a service provider:
1 In the DAC 6000 Main Menu, click Manage Services to display the Manage Services
window.
2 Click Define Service Provider to display the Define Provider window.


Define a Source
Before you can add a service, you must define the source of the service by providing a unique
name, identifier, and type. This identifies each service on a system-wide basis.
window.

2 Click Define Source and the system displays the Define Source window:
Name This 80-character alphanumeric field is the name of the source.

Source Type Indicates that the source type is either Service (Broadcast Service),
Application (Background Service) or IR Blaster. Click the button to
toggle between the choices.
Source ID Numeric identifier of the source. For the TV Guide IPG, the Source
ID needs to be set to Global. If the source is defined as Global (the
Local Definition box is not checked), enter a number between 4097
and 65535 based upon what TV Guide establishes for that service. If
the source is defined as Local (Local Definition box is checked), the
Source ID is assigned by the system.
Local Definition The Local Definition box defines how the Source ID is established.
Local means the system (DAC 6000) issues one to the source. It starts
with the number one and increments. Global means the operator
enters it in the Source ID field.

Build Source The CableCARD/Host do not possibly provide support of a guide

Names application. The mechanism to provide text identifiers with the
services is the Source Name Table, which is contained in the Network
Text Table message. This operation builds the Source Name Table
with the latest source name list and sends it to the RADD(s).
Status Indicates the Source Name Table is Built, Building or Not Built.
Refresh Screen Repaints the screen with the latest data.
Add a Source
To add a source to the DAC 6000 database:
1 In the Define Source window, click Add.
2 In the Name field, enter the name of the source, such as HBO.
3 In the Source Type field, click the button to select Service, Application or IR Blaster.
4 Click the Local Definition button to toggle Local on or off.
5 In the Source ID field, enter a number between 4097 and 65535 if you did not select
(enable) Local Definition. If you selected Local Definition, the system assigns the Source
ID.
6 Click Accept to add the source to the database.
Build Source Name Table

The CableCARD/Host pairs do not possibly provide support of a guide application. The
mechanism to provide text identifiers with the services is the Source Name Table, which is
contained in the Network Text Table message. This operation builds the Source Name Table
with the latest source name list and sends it to the RADD 6000(s).
Build Source Names

To build the source names:
1 In the Define Source window, click Build Source Names.
2 Click Yes to build the source name table.

3 Click Refresh Screen to update the status information.

4 Click Exit to exit the Define Source screen.
Define a Digital Service

To define a digital service:
1 In the Manage Services window, click Define Digital Service to display the Define Digital
Service window.


Source Name This 80-character alphanumeric field identifies the source and must match
the name entered on the Define Source window.
Service This 80-character alphanumeric field identifies the cable service provider.
Provider Name
Active Panel The Identification option enables you to select, add, change, or delete the
Options service and provider options for the selected service.
The Locations option enables you to select, add, change, or delete the
MPEG service number, queuing state, and queuing device for the selected
service. You must define at least one location for each service.
The Languages option enables you to select, add, change, or delete the
language choice for the selected service. The default is English and no
other entry is required.
The Business Systems option enables you to select the business system
and BSG service handle for this service.
Source/ These 80-character alphanumeric fields identify the name of the
Provider Name source/service and the ID for the service provider.
Program This option indicates whether the program is Internally Generated (a
Provision subscription service with no programs supplied by the operator or
business system) or Externally Supplied (IPPV and PPV programs
downloaded from the business system or manually entered by the
operator).
Encryption This field displays the type of encryption selected. Valid options are: Full
Mode Encryption, Fixed WK (Working Key), Fixed PK (Program Key),
Unencrypted or Pre-encrypted. The default value is Full Encryption.

CCI Level Copy Control Information (CCI) is a component of the CableCARD copy
protection system, which ensures authorized content (video, audio, data),
provided by MSOs, is not copied without permission. It enables
assignment of copy protection levels to a digital service; all programs
related to that service inherit its CCI level. A CCI level cannot be
assigned to a single program.
If Encryption Mode is Unencrypted, then CCI level is meaningless.
CCI selections are:
Copy Freely subscriber can make unlimited copies of any of the
programs included in the service.
Copy Once subscriber is limited to one copy of any program
included in the service.
Copy No More copy freely or copy once subscriber privileges are
curtailed.
Copy Never programs within a service can never be copied.
Externally Defined causes CCI data in the program rekey message
to NOT be evaluated or the CCI level is not enabled.
Macrovision/ This field displays the type of Analog Protection Settings (APS) and
Constrain Constrained Image Trigger (CIT) selected. The APS specifies the type of
Image copy control settings to be applied to analog video outputs. The CIT
specifies whether or not High Definition output must be down converted
to reduce its resolution on analog component output.
The available options are:
Copy Protection Off/Constrain Image Off
AGC, Split Burst On/Constrain Image Off
AGC, 2 Line Split Burst On/Constrain Image Off
AGC, 4 Line Split Burst On/Constrain Image Off
Copy Protection Off/Constrain Image On
AGC, Split Burst Off/Constrain Image On
AGC, 2 Line Split Burst Off/Constrain Image On
AGC, 4 Line Split Burst Off/Constrain Image On
Externally Defined
The default setting is Externally Defined.
Define This button displays the Define Programs window that is used for adding,
Programs viewing or modifying program parameters.
Provision This button is obsolete so this button is no longer operational.
Location
Service This button displays the Service Connectivity Data window.
Connectivity

2 Click Add.
3 Type a Source Name in the first half of the Source & Provider Name field. Type a Provider
Name in the second half of the Source & Provider Name field.
4 From the Program Provision pull-down menu, select either Internally Generated or
Externally Supplied.
5 Select an encryption mode from the Encryption Mode pull-down menu.
6 From the CCI Level pull-down menu, select Copy Freely, Copy Once, Copy No More,
Copy Never or Externally Defined.
7 From the Macrovision/Constrain Image pull-down menu, select the desired option.

8 Click the diamond next to Location to display the Location Table Operation panel.

The Table Operation panel displays the following fields:
MPEG Service # This 5-digit numeric field is the MPEG Service # assigned to this
service.
Queuing State This field indicated whether queuing is enabled or disabled for this
service.
Queuing Device This field is the name of the queuing device for this service.
Routed It indicates with Yes or No if the routing is established for a
digital device (for example, MPS). It is always Yes for devices not
requiring routing.
Port This 80-character, alphanumeric field is the DAC 6000 assigned
name for the output port on the MPS or SEM for the service.
9 Click Add to display the Edit Digital Service Location window.
10 Type a number in the MPEG Service # field.

11 Click the Queuing State drop-down menu and select Enable Queuing or Disable Queuing
for this service location.

12 Click Queuing Device to display the Zoom: Headend Device Name window, select a name
and click Accept.
13 Click Port to display the Zoom: Port Names window; select a name and then click Accept.
The Edit Digital Service Location window is displayed.
14 Click Accept to display the Define Digital Service window with the Location Table
Operation window populated.

15 Click the diamond next to Languages to display the Language Table Operation panel:
16 Click Add.

17 Click Language to display the Zoom: Language window:
18 Select the Language from the list and then click Accept to display the Edit Digital Service
Language window with the selected language displayed.
19 Click Accept to add the language to the Language Table Operation panel. The Define
Digital Service window is displayed.

20 Click the diamond next to Business Systems to display the Business Systems Table
Operation panel:

21 Click Add on the Business Systems Table Operation panel to display the Edit Service
Business System Assignment window:
22 Click Business System Name to display the Zoom: Business System Names window:
23 Select a Business System Name and then click Accept to display the Edit Service Business
System Assignment window with the Business System Name field populated.
24 Type a unique integer in the BSG Service Handle field. The range of values is from 32768
through 16777215 and must be coordinated with the Business System.
Note: If a handle is not entered, then the DAC 6000 will automatically issue one for the service
and each Business System in the database.
25 Click Accept to display the Define Digital Service window.
26 Click the diamond next to Identification to enable Accept.
27 Click Accept.

Digital Program Epoch

The following diagram describes a digital program epoch:
Figure 7-1 Digital Program Epoch
A digital program epoch is comprised of the interstitial time and the actual program time.
Within a program other times can be established. These times include: preview time and
purchase time. The preview time is a window of time when the subscriber can view the
program without purchasing it. The purchase time is a window of time when the subscriber can
impulse purchase the program. These times both begin at the start of the program. The
interstitial time is the time between the end of the preceding program and the start of the next
program. Interstitial time is also a viewable window of time.
Define Digital Programs

PPV and IPPV services are comprised of multiple programs each day. To define a Digital PPV
or IPPV service you set the Program Provision option to Externally Supplied. In the Define
Digital Service window, the Define Program button is selectable for a PPV or IPPV service, but
not for a subscription service.

1 Click Define Programs to display the Define Digital Programs window.
Source Name This 80-character alphanumeric field identifies the name of the service.
Scroll left or right to view the complete field.
Service Provider This 80-character alphanumeric field identifies the service provider.
Name
Program Name This 80-character alphanumeric field is the name of the program.
Interstitial This field is the number of hours and minutes between the end of a
program and the start of the next program. It is comprised of two,
two-digit integer fields using the format HH:MM, where HH is the
hour from 0 (zero) through 23, and MM is the minute from 0 (zero)
through 59 (for example, 00:05).
Start Date This field is the date that the program starts. This field is comprised of
two, two-digit integer fields and a four-digit integer field using the
format MM/DD/YYYY, where MM is the month, DD is the day, and
YYYY is the year (for example, 01/05/2006).

Start Time This field is the time when the program starts. This field is comprised
of two, two-digit integer fields using the format HH:MM, where HH is
the hour from 0 (zero) through 23, and MM is the minute from 0 (zero)
Duration This field is the duration of the program, commencing at the Program
Start Time. This field is comprised of two, two-digit integer fields
using the format HH:MM, where HH is the hour from 0 (zero) through
23, and MM is the minute from 0 (zero) through 59 (for example,
06:05). If your entry causes the program to overlap with the preceding
or next program, the entry is not accepted.
End Date This field is the date that the program ends. This field is comprised of
format MM/DD/YYYY, where MM is the month, DD is the day, and
End Time This field is the time when the program ends. This field is comprised
of two, two-digit integer fields using the format HH:MM, where HH is
the hour from 0 (zero) through 23, and MM is the minute from 0 (zero)
Preview Time This field is the length of time after the start time that subscribers can
view the movie without a purchase. It is comprised of two, two-digit
integer fields using the format HH:MM, where HH is the hour from 0
(zero) through 23, and MM is the minute from 0 (zero) through 59 (for
example, 00:05).
Purchase Time This field is the length of time after the start time that subscribers can
impulse purchase the movie. It is comprised of two, two-digit integer
fields using the format HH:MM, where HH is the hour from 0 (zero)
through 23, and MM is the minute from 0 (zero) through 59 (for
example, 06:05). This period begins with, and usually extends a few
minutes past, the Preview Time (for example, 00:15).
Cost (In Units) This field indicates the cost, in program units, of this program to the
subscriber.
Antitaping This flag indicates whether the antitaping option is enabled for the
Support program. Valid choices are Yes or No.
Enable Override This flag indicates whether the override option is enabled. Valid
choices are Yes or No.

Add a Digital Program
To add a digital program:

1 In the Define Digital Programs window, click Add to display the Edit Digital Program
window.

Program Name This display-only field identifies the program.

Active Panel The Active Panel provides the following options:
Options
The Identification option enables you to change identification
information for this service.
The Cost option enables you to select the currency by which this
program is priced and the price with and without the right to tape.
The Rating option enables you to select the region code, the Motion
Picture Advisory Association (MPAA) advisory level, as well as
advisory levels for violence, sexual content, and adult language.
and BSG handle for this program.
Program Name This 80-character alphanumeric field is the name of the program. If the
program name is to be changed, type the new name here.
Start Date & This field is the date and time that the program starts. The date field is
Time comprised of two, two-digit integer fields and a four-digit integer field
using the format MM/DD/YYYY, where MM is the month, DD is the day,
and YYYY is the year (for example, 01/05/2006). The time field is
comprised of two, two-digit integer fields using the format HH:MM,
where HH is the hour from 0 (zero) through 23, and MM is the minute
from 0 (zero) through 59 (for example, 06:05).
Interstitial This field is the number of hours and minutes between the scheduled start
of the program epoch and the actual start of the program. It is comprised
of two, two-digit integer fields using the format HH:MM, where HH is the
hour from 0 (zero) through 23, and MM is the minute from 0 (zero)
Duration This field is the duration of the program, commencing at the Program Start
Time. It is comprised of two, two-digit integer fields using the format
HH:MM, where HH is the hour from 0 (zero) through 23, and MM is the
minute from 0 (zero) through 59 (for example, 06:05).
Preview Time This field is the length of time after the start time that subscribers can
view the movie without a purchase. It is comprised of two, two-digit
example, 00:05). The default value is 00:00.
Note: The time cannot exceed 18 hours.

Purchase Time This field is the length of time after the start time that subscribers can
purchase the movie. It is comprised of two, two-digit integer fields using
the format HH:MM, where HH is the hour from 0 (zero) through 23, and
MM is the minute from 0 (zero) through 59 (for example, 06:05). The
default value is 00:00. This period begins with, and usually extends a few
minutes past, the Preview Time (for example, 00:15).
Note: The time cannot exceed 18 hours.
Cost (In Units) This five-digit integer field is the price of the program, in units. The valid
range is from 1 through 65535. DCTs can be credited with units to pre-
authorize IPPV purchases. An IPPV purchase decreases the credit limit
by the value of the program units (for example, 10).
Antitaping This option, in conjunction with the antitaping vendor option on the
Support Define Digital Service window, enables you to toggle antitaping ON/OFF
for this program. When antitaping vendor is set to Macrovision, and this
option is enabled, antitaping can be applied to the program.
Antitaping This option indicates whether the antitaping override is enabled. Valid
Override Enable options are Yes or No.
2 Type a program name in the second Program Name field.

3 Type the Start Date and Time.
4 Type the Interstitial time.
5 Type the Duration time.
6 Type the Preview Time.
7 Type the Purchase Time.
8 Type the Cost (In Units).
9 Click Antitaping Support on or off.
10 Click Antitaping Override Enable on or off.

11 Click the diamond next to Costs to display the Costs panel:
This panel displays the following fields:
Currency This column displays the currency on which this transaction is based.
Cost No Tape This field displays the subscribers cost, in the currency selected above,
to view the program without the right to record it.
Cost Tape This field displays the subscribers cost, in the currency selected above,
to view and record the program.

12 Click Add to display the Edit Digital Program Cost window:
13 Click Currency to display the Zoom: Currency window.

14 Select the currency and then click Accept to display the Edit Digital Program Cost
window.
15 Type a value in the Cost No Tape field.
16 Type a value in the Cost Tape field.
17 Click Accept to display the Edit Digital Programs window with the Costs table populated.
18 Click the diamond next to Ratings to display the Ratings Table Operation panel.

19 Click Add on the Ratings panel to display the Edit Digital Program Rating window:
20 Click Rating Region to display the Zoom: Rating Region window.

21 Select a Rating Region and then click Accept to display the Edit Digital Program Rating
window.
22 Click the MPAA Advisory pull-down menu.
23 Select a value from the pull-down menu. The new value is displayed.
24 Click the Violence Content Advisory pull-down menu.
26 Click the Sexual Content Advisory pull-down menu.
28 Click the Language Content Advisory pull-down menu.
30 Type a description in the Rating Description field.
31 Click Accept.
32 Click Accept to display the Edit Digital Program window with the Ratings table populated.

33 Click the diamond next to Business System to display the Business Systems Table
Operation panel:
34 Click Add on the Business Systems Table Operation panel to display the Edit Digital
Program Business System window:

36 Select a Business System Name and then click Accept to display the Edit Digital Program
Business System window with the Business System Name field populated.
37 Type a BSG Program Handle for this program.
38 Click Accept. The Edit Digital Program window is displayed.
39 Click the diamond next to Identification on the Active Panel.

Verify Service Connectivity

You can view extensive connectivity information about a service through the Service
Connectivity Data window.
To view service connectivity:
1 In the Define Digital Service window, click Select to enable Source & Provider Name.
2 Click Source & Provider Name to display the Zoom: Service and Provider Name window.
3 Select a Service and Provider Name and then click Accept to display the Define Digital
Service window with the Source & Provider Name field populated.
4 Click Accept to enable Service Connectivity.
5 Click Service Connectivity to display the Service Connectivity Data window:
This window displays the following fields and options:
Source Name This 80-character alphanumeric field identifies the name of the source.

Service Provider This 80-character alphanumeric field identifies the name of the service
Name provider.
Encryption This field displays the type of encryption selected. Valid options are:
Mode Full_Encryption, Fixed_WK (Working Key), Fixed_PK (Program
Key), or unencrypted. The default value is Full_Encryption.
Provision subscription service with no programs supplied by the operator or BSI)
or Externally Supplied (IPPV and PPV services downloaded from the
business system).
Current Program These fields display the date and time that the current program started.
Start The date field is comprised of two, two-digit integer fields and a
four-digit integer field using the format MM/DD/YYYY, where MM is
the month, DD is the day, and YYYY is the year (for example,
01/05/2006). The time field is comprised of two, two-digit integer
example, 06:05).
Current Program These fields display the date and time that the current program will
Stop end. The date field is comprised of two, two-digit integer fields and a
four-digit integer field using the format MM/DD/YYYY, where MM is
the month, DD is the day, and YYYY is the year (for example,
example, 06:05).
Last Program These fields display the end date and time of the last program in the
End DAC 6000. The date field is comprised of two, two-digit integer fields
and a four-digit integer field using the format MM/DD/YYYY, where
MM is the month, DD is the day, and YYYY is the year (for example,
example, 06:05).
Last Program These fields display the date and time that the last program was
Authenticated authenticated. The date field is comprised of two, two-digit integer
fields and a four-digit integer field using the format MM/DD/YYYY,
where MM is the month, DD is the day, and YYYY is the year (for
example, 01/05/2006). The time field is comprised of two, two-digit
example, 06:05).
Active Display These options enable you to select various information to be displayed
Panel in the Table Operation section of the window.

View Current Program Queuing Information

To view the current program queueing information:
1 In the Service Connectivity Data window, click the diamond next to Current Program
Queuing Info to display the Current Program Queuing Info Table Operation panel:
Queuing Device This field displays the name of the queuing device for this service.
Port This 80-character, alphanumeric field is the DAC 6000 assigned name
for the input port on the MPS that receives the service. The operator
can rename the input port using the Edit Digital Services Location
window.
Queued This field displays whether the program information has been built but
not downloaded to the queuing device hardware.
Downloaded This field displays whether the program information has been
downloaded to the queuing device hardware.

Encryption This field displays whether encryption is enabled or not on the queuing
Enabled device.
Encryption This field displays whether the rekey information for the encrypted
Enabled Queued programs has been built but not downloaded to the queuing device
hardware.
Encryption This field displays whether the rekey information for the encrypted
Enabled programs has been downloaded to the queuing device hardware.
Downloaded
2 Click Refresh to update the displayed information.
View Current Program Queuing Count

To view the current program queueing count:
1 In the Service Connectivity Data window, click the diamond next to Current Program
Queuing Count to display the Current Program Queuing Count Table Operation panel:

Queuing Device This field displays the name of the queueing device for this
service.
name for the input port on the MPS that receives the service. The
operator can rename the input port using the Edit Digital Services
Location window.
Encrypting ACP This field displays the identifier (i.e. 1a) of the Access Control
Processor (ACP) that encrypts the service.
Decrypting ACP This field displays the identifier of the ACP that decrypts the
service.
Total Queued This field displays the total number of services queued.
Total Downloaded This field displays the total number of services downloaded.
Total Encryption This field displays the total number of services that are encryption
Enabled enabled.
Total Encryption This field displays the total number of encryption enabled services
Enabled Queued that are currently queued.
Total Encryption This field displays the total number of encryption enabled services
Enabled that are downloaded.
Downloaded

View Last Program Queuing Information

To view the last program queueing information:
1 In the Service Connectivity Data window, click the diamond next to Last Program
Queuing Info to display the Last Program Queuing Info Table Operation panel:

2 Use the scroll bar under the Table Operation section of the window to view the remaining
columns:
Queuing Device This field displays the name of the queueing device for this
service.
name for the input port on the MPS that receives the service. The
operator can rename the input port using the Edit Digital Services
Location window.
Queued Date This field displays the end date of the last program queued for the
service. The field is comprised of two, two-digit integer fields and
a four-digit integer field using the format MM/DD/YYYY, where
MM is the month, DD is the day, and YYYY is the year (for
example, 01/05/2006).
Queued Time This field displays the end time of the last program queued for the
service. The field is comprised of two, two-digit integer fields
using the format HH:MM, where HH is the hour from 0 (zero)
example, 06:05).
Downloaded Date This field displays the end date of the last program downloaded to
the queuing device. The field is comprised of two, two-digit
integer fields and a four-digit integer field using the format
MM/DD/YYYY, where MM is the month, DD is the day, and
Downloaded Time This field displays the end time of the last program downloaded to
the queuing device. The field is comprised of two, two-digit
integer fields using the format HH:MM, where HH is the hour
from 0 (zero) through 23, and MM is the minute from 0 (zero)
Encryption Enabled This field displays the end date that the service was encryption
Date enabled. The field is comprised of two, two-digit integer fields
and a four-digit integer field using the format MM/DD/YYYY,
example, 01/05/2006).

Encryption Enabled This field displays the end time that the service was encryption
Time enabled The field is comprised of two, two-digit integer fields
using the format HH:MM, where HH is the hour from 0 (zero)
example, 06:05).
Encryption Enabled This field displays the end date of the rekey information that has
Queued Date been queued. The field is comprised of two, two-digit integer
fields and a four-digit integer field using the format
MM/DD/YYYY, where MM is the month, DD is the day, and
Encryption Enabled This field displays the end time of the rekey information that has
Queued Time been queued. The field is comprised of two, two-digit integer
fields using the format HH:MM, where HH is the hour from 0
(zero) through 23, and MM is the minute from 0 (zero) through 59
(for example, 06:05).
Encryption Enabled This field displays the end date of the rekey information that has
Downloaded Date been downloaded to the queuing device. The field is comprised of
format MM/DD/YYYY, where MM is the month, DD is the day,
and YYYY is the year (for example, 01/05/2006).
Encryption Enabled This field displays the end time of the rekey information that has
Downloaded Time been downloaded to the queuing device. The field is comprised of
two, two-digit integer fields using the format HH:MM, where HH
is the hour from 0 (zero) through 23, and MM is the minute from 0

View Channel Information

To view the channel information:
1 In the Service Connectivity Data window, click the diamond next to Channel Info to
display the Channel Info Table Operation panel:
Tuned Channel This field identifies the tuned channel associated with the service.
Virtual Channel This field identifies the virtual channel associated with the service.
Virtual Channel Map This field identifies the virtual channel map associated with this
service.
Downstream Plant This field identifies the downstream plant associated with this
service.

Define an Analog Service

To define an analog service:
1 In the Manage Services window, click Define Analog Service to display the Define
Analog Service window:

Service Name This 80-character alphanumeric field identifies the service.

The Identification option enables you to select, add, change, or
delete the service and provider options for the selected service.
The Location option enables you to select, add, change, or delete
the analog device for the selected service. You must define at
least one location for each service.
The Business Systems option enables you to select, add, change,
or delete the business system and BSG handle for this service.
Source/Provider These 80-character alphanumeric fields identify the name of the
Name source and the service provider.
Provision subscription service with no programs supplied by the operator or
business system) or Externally Supplied (IPPV and PPV programs
downloaded from the business system or manually entered by the
operator).
Service Code This field identifies the Service Code and is not editable if the
Program Provision is Externally Supplied. Valid values range from 2
through 256.
PSL Channel This field identifies the Pay Service Loader channel number. It is
Number used to retrieve analog programs from an ACC-4000. Editable if the
program provision is Externally Supplied.
Define This button displays the Define Programs window that is used for
Programs viewing, modifying or adding program parameters.
Synchronize This option copies the analog PPV/IPPV programs from the analog
w/ACC4000 controller (ACC-4000) to the DAC 6000.

2 Click Source/Provider Name to display the Zoom: Source Name window.

3 Select the Source name and then click Accept to display the Define Analog Service
window with the fields populated.
4 Select an option from the Program Provision pull-down menu.
5 Type the Service Code if the service is Internally Generated.
6 Type the PSL Channel Number if the programs are to be loaded via an ACC-4000. Used
for Externally Supplied services.
7 Click the diamond next to Locations to display the Locations Table Operation panel.
8 Click Add on the Locations Table Operation section of the Define Analog Service window
to display the Edit Analog Service Location window.
9 Click Analog Device to display the Zoom: Device Name window.

10 Select a Device from the Name list and then click Accept twice to display the Define
Analog Service window with the Locations table populated.

Operation panel:

15 If the service is Internally Generated, type a unique, eight-digit integer in the BSG Service
Handle field. If the service is Externally Supplied, skip to step 17.
16 Click Accept to display the Define Analog Service window.
17 Click Identification to enable Accept.
18 Click Accept.

Configuring EAS
There are two configuration options for the Emergency Alert System (EAS) support.
With the first method (Force Tune), when an emergency condition occurs, the OM 1000 sends
a force tune message to the set-tops. The set-tops tune to the default emergency channel (for
example, channel 3). When the emergency condition ends, the subscriber must retune the
digital set-tops to the prior channel manually. This is the original method for Emergency Alert
System operation.
With the second method (Channel Override), when an emergency condition occurs, the OM
1000 sends a channel override message to the set-tops. The set-tops override to the EAS service
defined in the GUI for that OM 1000. When the emergency condition ends, the digital set-tops
automatically retune the prior channel. The EAS service (emergency channel) is configured,
by you, for your site per OM 1000.
Edit Emergency Alert Tunables

To edit emergency alert tunables:
1 In the DAC 6000 Main Menu, click Manage Controller to display the Manage Controller
window.
2 Click Manage Tunables to display the Manage Tunables window.
3 Click Edit Emergency Alert Tunables to display the Edit Emergency Alert Tunables
window:

Force Tune This option force tunes the terminals tuned to a digital or analog
Message channel to the default emergency channel (for example, channel 3).
When the emergency condition ends, you must retune the digital
terminals to the prior channel manually.
Channel Overrride This option uses a channel override message to tune the terminals
Message off the digital or analog channel to an emergency channel that you
specify through the GUI. When the emergency condition ends, the
digital terminals automatically retune the prior channel. The EAS
service (emergency channel) is configured, by you, for your site
per OM 1000.
Enable SCTE-18 SCTE-18 is a standardized emergency alert message for cable.
Message SCTE-18 was formerly known as DVS 208. If not using the SDM
to configure the OM 1000, enable this setting to configure the OM
1000 to block messages from the RADD 6000.
Enable FT/CO EAS Check Enable FT/CO EAS Flag if you want to inform set-top
Flag applications that they are receiving the force tune or channel
override messages in response to an emergency alert. This allows
the set-top to give proper priority to an emergency condition.
These messages can be used for other purposes.
Enable SCTE-18 Check Enable SCTE-18 Flag if you want to set a bit in the force
Flag tune and channel override messages that indicates an SCTE 18
message is present in the network stream when these messages are
sent. The default state for this option is disabled (hollow).
Enable PID Blocking When active it enables the PID to Block On OM field.
PID To Block On OM PID blocking only affects CEAS. This value specifies the logical
port on the OM 1000 to block the network PID on. The default
is 3.
4 Enter the desired values into the fields.

5 Click Accept to complete the change.

Adding an EAS Service

To add an EAS service:
1 On the DAC 6000 Main Menu, click Manage Services to display the Manage Services
window.
2 Click Configure EAS Service to display the Configure EAS Service window:
Name This 80-character alphanumeric field is the description of the OM 1000

assigned to the EAS service.
Source This field is the name of the source for the EAS service.
Provider This field is the name of the provider for this EAS service.
Type This field is the type of EAS service.
RF Device This field is the name of the RF device through which this EAS service is
supported.
Queuing Device This field is the name of the queuing device for this EAS service.
OM Device This field is the device name of the OM 1000 as it appears in the /etc/hosts
file. The system uses this device name to communicate with the OM 1000.

4 Click Name to display the Zoom: Device Name window:
5 Select the device name and then click Accept to display the Configure EAS window with
the Name field populated.
6 Click Accept to enable Add.
7 Click Add to display the Edit EAS Service window:
8 Click Source & Provider Name to display the Zoom: Service & Provider Name window.
9 Select the service provider for the EAS service and then click Accept to display the Edit
EAS Service window with the Source & Provider Name field populated.
10 Click RF Device Name & Port Name to display the Zoom: Device Name window.

11 Select an RF device that is associated with the same downstream plant as the service
provider and then click Accept to display the Edit EAS Service window with the RF
Device field populated.
13 Repeat steps 4 through 12 for each OM 1000 in your system.

Define a Package Provider

You can add, change or delete a package provider through the Define Package Provider
window.
The DAC 6000 default configuration contains a VIP package that includes all video and audio
services on the DAC 6000. Background services (used for code download), software objects,
and resources are not part of the VIP package.
Add a Package Provider

To add a Package provider:
window.
2 Click Define Package Provider to display the Define Package Provider window:


Define a Package
The DAC 6000 enables you to group services, programs and/or objects into a single package.
Subscriber digital set-tops are then authorized to receive the services, programs, and objects in
the package. The Define Packages window enables you to add, change, and delete.
Note: The DAC 6000 default configuration contains a VIP package that includes all video and
audio services on the DAC 6000. Background services (used for code download),
software objects, and resources are not part of the VIP package. This package cannot
be deleted. If your system does not plan to use the VIP package change the BSG
Service Handle to one that is not in the Business System database.
Add a Package
To add a package:
1 Click Define Packages to display the Define Packages window:

2 Click Add to display the Edit Combination Package window:
Package Name This 80-character alphanumeric field identifies the package.

Package Type This field is reserved for future use. Currently the field defaults to
Combination.
Package Provider This 80-character alphanumeric field identifies the package provider.
The Identification option enables you to add the Package Name,
Package Type and Package Provider.
The Components option enables you to select, add, change, and
delete the package components.
The Business Systems option enables you to select the business
system and handle for this package.

3 Type a name for the package in the Package Name field.

4 Click Package Provider to display the Zoom: Package Provider Name window:
5 Select a Package Provider Name and then click Accept to display the Edit Combination
Package window with the Package Provider field populated.

6 Click the diamond next to Components to display the Components Table Operation
window:

7 Click Add on the Components Table Operation panel to display the Edit Combination
Package Component window:
8 For packages that are to include a service, click the diamond next to Service then click
Service & Provider Name to display the Zoom: Service & Provider Name window.
9 Select the service and provider for this package and then click Accept to display the Edit
Combination Package Component window with the Service & Provider Name field
populated.
10 To include a program, click the diamond next to Program to enable Program Name & Start
Date/Time.
11 Click Program Name & Start Date/Time to display the Zoom: Program Name & Start
Date/Time window.
12 Select a program name and start date and time for this package then click Accept to display
the Edit Combination Package Component window with the Program Name & Start
Date/Time field populated.
13 To include an object, click the diamond next to Object to enable Object/Resource Name.
14 Click Object/Resources Name to display the Zoom: Object Name window.
15 Select an object name (with version and group) for this package, then click Accept to
display the Edit Combination Package Component window with the Object/Resource
Name, Version, and Group fields populated.
16 Click Accept to display the Edit Combination Package window.

Operation panel:
18 Click Add to display the Edit Package Business System window:

19 Click Business System to display the Zoom: Business System Names window.
20 Select a Business System Name and then click Accept to display the Edit Package Business
System window with the Business System field populated.
21 Type a unique, eight-digit integer from 32768 through 16777215 in the BSG Handle field.
22 Click Accept. The Edit Combination Package window is displayed.
23 Click the diamond next to Identification and then click Accept to update the database.

Delete a Digital Service from the Database

To delete digital service information from the database:
1 In the Main Menu, click Manage Services.
2 In the Manage Services window, click Define Digital Service.
3 Click Select. The Service Name field displays highlighted.
4 Click Source and Provider Name to display the Zoom window containing the services.
5 Click TV LAND and then click Accept twice.
6 Click Delete. The system displays a pop-up message prompting you to verify the deletion.
7 Click Yes.
Delete Source Information from the Database

To delete source information from the database:
2 In the Manage Services window, click Define Source.
3 Click Select. The Source Name field displays highlighted.
4 Click Name to display the Zoom window containing all of the sources.
5 Click TV LAND and then click Accept twice.
6 Click Delete. The system displays a pop-up message prompting you to verify the deletion.
7 Click Yes.
Build the Virtual Channel Map

To build the virtual channel map without TV LAND:
2 In the Manage Plants window, click Define Virtual Channel Map.
3 Click Select.
4 Select the VCM Name MOT1 and then click Build Channel Map.
5 A confirmation window is displayed. Click Yes.

Add a Source to the Database

To add a source to the database:
3 Click Add. The Source Name field displays highlighted.
4 Type TV LAND in the Source Name field.
5 Select Service from the Source Type pull-down menu.
6 Disable the Local check box.
7 Type 4557 in the Source ID field.
8 After the information is entered, click Accept.
Add a Digital Service to the Database

To add a service (TV LAND) to the database:
3 Click Add.
4 Click Source & Provider Name.
5 Highlight TV LAND from the Zoom window, click Accept.
6 Highlight Cable Company, click Accept.
7 Select Internally Generated (for a Subscription service) from the Program Provision pull-
down menu.
8 Select Full Encryption from the Encryption Mode pull-down menu.
9 Select Copy Freely from the CCI Level pull-down menu.
10 Select Externally Defined from the Macrovision/Constrain Image pull-down menu.
11 Click the diamond next to Locations.
12 Click Add.
13 Type 8 in the MPEG Service # field.
14 Select Enable Queuing from the Queuing State pull-down menu.
15 Click Queuing Device.
16 Highlight irt01, click Accept.
17 Click Accept.
18 Click diamond next to Business Systems.

19 Click Add.
20 Click Business System Name.
21 Highlight Default from the Zoom window, click Accept.
22 Type 35006 in the BSG Service Handle field.
23 Click Accept.
24 Click diamond next to Identification.
25 Click Accept.
Note: After adding this digital service on the DAC 6000, there are two additional steps that
need to be executed for it to be operational. First it needs to be assigned to the
appropriate IRT's decrypt TSODA. Second it needs to be added to one or more virtual
channel maps.
Assign a Service to Decrypting TSODA

1 Assign TV LAND to irt01's Decrypt TSODA 4b or 4_2.
Add a Virtual Channel to the Lineup

To add a virtual channel to the existing virtual channel map:
3 Click Select.
4 Select the VCM Name MOT1 and then click Change.
5 Click Define Channels.
6 Click Add.
8 Highlight TV LAND and then click Accept.
9 Click RF Device Name & Port Name.
10 Highlight C6U_102 C6U Port or C8U_102 C6U Port and then click Accept.
11 Type 106 in the Channel Number field.
12 Verify Standard from the Channel Type pull-down menu.
13 Click Accept and then click Exit until you return to the Define Virtual Channel Map
window.
14 Assure the VCM name MOT1 is highlighted and then click Build Channel Map.
15 A confirmation window is displayed. Click Yes.

Add a Digital PPV Program to the Database

To add a digital PPV program (PPV9) to the database:
3 Click Select.
4 Click Source & Provider Name to display the Zoom window.
5 Highlight PPV9, click Accept.
6 Click Accept.
7 Click Define Programs. The Define Digital Programs window (for the PPV9 service) is
displayed.
8 Click Add.
9 Type Test Program 1 in the Program Name field.
10 Type today's date in the Start Date field. Use the format mm/dd/yyyy.
11 Type the current time plus 15 minutes in the Start Time field. Use the format hh:mm.
12 Type 00:05 (hh:mm) in the Interstitial field.
13 Type 01:55 (hh:mm) in the Duration field.
14 Type 00:10 (hh:mm) in the Preview field.
15 Type 00:15 (hh:mm) in the Purchase Time field.
16 Type 10 in the Cost (In Units) field.
17 Click diamond next to Costs.
18 Click Add.
19 Click Currency
20 Highlight Dollars, US., click Accept.
21 Type 3.99 (dd.cc) in the Cost No Tape field.
22 Type 3.99 (dd.cc) in the Cost Tape field.
23 Click Accept.
24 Click diamond next to Ratings.
25 Click Add.
26 Click Rating Region.
27 Highlight United States, click Accept.
28 Click Accept.


30 Click Add.
33 Type 100000 in the BSG Program Handle field.
34 Click Accept.
36 Click Accept.
Add an Analog Source to the Database

To add a source to the database:
3 Click Add. The Source Name field displays highlighted.
4 Type A&E in the Source Name field.
5 Select Service from the Source Type pull-down menu.
6 Disable the Local check box.
7 Type 4101 in the Source ID field.
Add an Analog Service to the Database

To add the subscription service A&E to the database:
2 In the Manage Services window, click Define Analog Service.
3 Click Add.
4 Click Source & Provider Name
5 From Source Name Zoom, Highlight A&E, click Accept.
7 Select Internally Generated from the Program Provision pull-down menu.
8 Type 37 in the Service Code field.
10 Click Add.

11 Click Analog Device.

12 Highlight C6M_A37, click Accept.
13 Click Accept.
15 Click Add.
19 Click the diamond next to Identification.
20 Click Accept.

To define a package provider in the database:
2 In the Manage Services window, click Define Package Provider.
3 Click Add.
4 Type Horsham Headend in the name field.
Define a Package
To define a package in the database:
2 In the Manage Services window, click Define Packages.
3 Click Add.
4 Type Music Package in the Package Name field.
5 Click Package Provider.
6 Highlight Horsham Headend, click Accept.
7 Click diamond next to Components.
8 Click Add.
9 Click diamond next to Service to designate component type.
10 Click Service & Provider Name.

11 Highlight VH1 SOUL Cable Company, click Accept.

12 Click Accept.
13 Click Add.
15 Highlight MTV HITS Cable Company, click Accept.
16 Click Accept.
17 Click Add.
19 Highlight BET ON JAZZ Cable Company, click Accept.
20 Click Accept.
22 Click Add.
23 Click Business System.
25 Type 65500 in the BSG Handle field.
26 Click Accept.
28 Click Accept.

Lab Exercise 7
Delete a Digital Service from the Database

1 Delete a digital service from the database using the following information:
Digital Service = TV LAND
Delete Source Information from the Database

1 Delete a source from the database using the following information:
Source = TV LAND
Build the Virtual Channel Map

1 Build the virtual channel map, MOT 1, without TV LAND.
Add a Source to the Database

1 Add a source to the database using the following information:
Source Name = TV LAND
Source Type = Service
Source ID = 4557
Add a Digital Service to the Database

1 Add a digital service to the database using the following information:
Source & Provider Name = TV LAND & Cable Company
Program Provision = Internally Generated
Encryption Mode = Full Encryption
Antitaping Vendor = None
CCI Level = Copy Freely
MPEG Service # = 8
Queuing State = Enable Queuing
Queuing Device = irt01
Business System Name = Default
BSG Service Handle = 35006
Assign a Service to Decrypting TSODA

1 Assign TV LAND to irt01's Decrypt TSODA 4b or 4_2.


1 Add a virtual channel to the existing virtual channel map using the following information:
VCM Name = MOT1
Service = TV LAND
RF Device Name & Port Name = C6U_102 C6U Port or C8U_102 C6U Port
Channel Number = 106
Type = Standard
2 Build the Channel Map MOT1.
Add a Digital PPV Program to the Database

1 Add a digital PPV program for PPV9 using the following information:
Digital Service = PPV9
Program Name = Test Program 1
Start Date = today's date
Start Time = the current time plus 15 minutes
Interstitial = 00:05
Duration = 01:55
Preview = 00:10
Purchase Time = 00:15
Cost (In Units) = 10
Currency = Dollars, US
Cost No Tape = 3.99
Cost Tape = 3.99
Rating Region = United States
BSG Program Handle = 100000
Add an Analog Source to the Database

1 Add an analog source to the database using the following information:
Source Name = A&E
Source Type = Service
Source ID = 4101

Add an Analog Service to the Database

1 Add the analog subscription service A&E to the database using the following information:
Source & Provider Name = A&E & Cable Company
Program Provision = Internally Generated
Service Code = 37
Analog Device = C6M_A37
BSG Service Handle = 37

1 Define a package provider in the database using the following information:
Name = Horsham Headend
Define a Package
1 Define a package in the database using the following information:
Package Name = Music Package
Package Provider = Horsham Headend
Components = VH1 SOUL, MTV HITS and BET ON JAZZ
BSG Handle = 65500

Learning Exercise 7
Circle the letter that corresponds to the most correct answer that completes each statement.
1 When you define a source for a video channel, the source type is
a. service
b. video
c. application
d. none of the above
2 Before you define a service, you must first define
a. a source
b. a program
c. an application
d. both a source and an application
3 In the Define Source window, you enter the Source ID number when using
a. Microsoft as the EPG guide provider
b. TV GUIDE as the EPG guide provider
c. local servers as the EPG guide provider
d. none of the above
4 When you define a service, the MPEG service number must
a. be unique on the MPEG stream
b. match the service code
c. be a number in the range 0 to 20 only
d. match the BSG service handle
5 A package can contain
a. only digital subscription services
b. only analog subscription services
c. only objects
d. digital and analog subscription services and programs, objects and resources

6 The DCT needs to be authorized by the DAC 6000 to decrypt video when using this
encryption mode
a. FULL ENCRYPTION
b. FIXED_WK
c. FIXED_PK
d. UNENCRYPTED
7 To define a PPV or IPPV service you must set the
a. source type to application
b. program provision to internally generated
c. program provision to externally supplied
d. BSG service handle to a number between 32768 to 16777215
8 When you define a service, the BSG handle must match the
a. tuned channel
b. analog service code
c. number provided by service provider (i.e., HBO)
d. number provided by Business System
9 For an IPPV service, every DCT has authorization to decrypt the
a. interstitial period only
b. interstitial and preview periods
c. preview and purchase periods
d. interstitial and purchase periods
10 The BSG handles for a digital service are from
a. 1 to 32767
b. 32768 to 16777215
c. 1 to 16777215
d. 1 to 256

Section 8
Manage Channel Maps
Describe the relationship between a virtual and display channel
Modify a channel map on the DAC 6000
Duplicate and edit the duplicate Virtual Channel Map
Build a Virtual Channel Map

8-2 Manage Channel Maps
Channel Maps Overview

Channel maps contain display/virtual channel and frequency tuning assignments that are
downloaded to set-tops. In this segment of the training class, you will create, modify, add
services to, and delete a virtual channel map. You will also learn how to store multiple channel
maps that can be downloaded to specific set-tops.
A virtual channel map directs the set-top to select a specific combination of incoming video,
audio, data, and text.
You can move services from one tuned channel to another, while keeping the users
display/virtual channel number constant.
Subscriber Home
Headend 1
PPV 1
PPV 2 Demultiplexing
PPV 3 Channels
PPV 4
PPV 5 Tuned Channel
PPV 6
TV LAND
A102
SCI-FI DCT
OUTDOOR LIFE 15 Virtual/Display Channels
WE multiplexed into
DMX LISTENING ROOM
1 EIA Tuned Channel
DMX JAZZ VOCAL BLENDS
DMX HOTTEST HITS ( 6 MHz wide )
PPV 1 100
DMX MODERN COUNTRY PPV 2 101
DMX ALTERNATIVE PPV 3 102
PPV 4 103
PPV 5 104
PPV 6 105
TV LAND 106
SCI-FI 107
OUTDOOR LIFE 108
WE 109
DMX LISTENING ROOM 200
DMX JAZZ VOCAL BLENDS 201
DMX HOTTEST HITS 202
DMX MODERN COUNTRY 203
DMX ALTERNATIVE 204
Figure 8-1 Digital Channel Multiplexing Diagram

Manage Channel Maps 8-3
Virtual Channel Maps (VCMs) Overview

You can add, change and delete VCMs through the Define Virtual Channel Map window.
It is important to note that VCMs:
Can be associated with one or more downstream and/or DSG plants.
Can be designated as default for one or more downstream and/or DSG plants.
Can contain only services that are available on all assigned plants.
Can contain hidden or standard in-band channels.
Cannot be used by more than one headend.
Manage Virtual Channel Maps

To manage virtual channel maps:
1 In the DAC 6000 Main Menu, click Manage Plants to display the Manage Plants window:

Add a VCM
To add a VCM:
1 In the DAC 6000 Main Menu, click Manage Plants display the Manage Plants window.
2 Click Define Virtual Channel Map to display the Define Virtual Channel Map window:
Name This 80-character alphanumeric field is the name of the headend with
which this VCM is associated.
All This flag enables all VCMs for all headends to be displayed.
Build Status Indicates if the channel map is built or is not built yet.
VCM Name This 80-character alphanumeric field is the name of the VCM.
External Handle This 5-digit integer field from 1 through 65535 is the value that the
billing system uses to communicate VCM information to the
DAC 6000 during add or modify terminal operations.
Headend This 80-character alphanumeric field is the name of the headend with
which this VCM is associated.

Duplicate Map Invokes the Duplicate Virtual Channel Map window, which reassigns
the VCM copy under a different name to new headend associations.
Build Channel Builds a channel map, downloads it to the RADD 6000, and inserts it
Map into the network PID stream.

4 Click Name to display the Zoom: Plant/Headend Name window:
5 Select the Name of the headend to associate with this VCM and then click Accept to
display the Define Virtual Channel Map window with the Name field populated.

6 Click Add to display the Edit Virtual Channel Map window:
VCM Name This field displays the name of the VCM.

Headend Name This field displays the name of the headend with which this VCM
is associated.
Active Panel Identification enables you to add, change, and delete VCMs and
associate external VCM handles with them.

Downstream Plants enables you to add, change and delete

downstream plants and indicate whether this VCM is the
downstream plants default.
Define Channels This option enables you to display the Define Channels window.
7 Type a name in the VCM Name field.

8 Type a number from 1 through 65535 in the External VCM Handle field.

9 Click the diamond next to Downstream Plants to display the Downstream Plants Table
Operation panel:
DSP Name This 80-character alphanumeric field is the name of the downstream plant.
Is Default This field indicates whether this VCM is the default VCM for the
downstream plant.

10 Click Add to display the Edit Virtual Channel Map Downstream Plants window:
11 Click DSP Name to display the Zoom: Downstream Plant Name window:
12 Select the Downstream Plant Name and then click Accept to display the Edit Virtual
Channel Map Downstream Plants window with the DSP Name field populated.
13 To make the downstream plant the default for this virtual channel map, click the box next to
Is Default to enable it. The box is dark when Is Default is enabled.
14 Click Accept to display the Edit Virtual Channel Map window with the Downstream Plants
Table Operation panel populated.
15 Click the diamond next to Identification to display the Identification Table Operation
panel.
16 Click Accept to update the database. The Define Virtual Channel Map window is
displayed.
17 Click Select to enable the user-editable fields.
18 Select a VCM name and then click Change to display the Edit Virtual Channel Map
window with Define Channels enabled.

19 Click Define Channels to display the Define Virtual Channel Map Row window:
Name This field displays the name of the VCM.

Number This integer field from 1 through 4095 identifies the channel.
Type This field indicates the type of channel. Valid options are:
Standard
Hidden
Source Name This 80-character alphanumeric field is the name of a source
associated with this VCM.
Service Provider This 80-character alphanumeric field is the name of a service provider
for the source.
RF Device This field is the name of the RF device through which the source is
processed.

20 Click Add to display the Edit Virtual Channel Map Row window:
21 Click Source & Provider Name to display the Zoom: Service & Provider Name window:

22 Select a service and provider and then click Accept to display the Edit Virtual Channel
Map Row window.
23 Click RF Device Name & Port Name to display the Zoom: RF Device/Port Name window.
24 Select a device and then click Accept to display the Edit Virtual Channel Map Row
window.
25 Type a number in the Channel Number field.
26 Click Accept to display the Define Virtual Channel Map Flow window.
27 Click Exit to display the Edit Virtual Channel Map window.
28 Click Exit to display the Define Virtual Channel Map window.
29 Click Exit to display the Manage Plants window.
Duplicate a VCM
Rather than creating an entire VCM from scratch, use the Duplicate Virtual Channel Map
window to quickly create a VCM from an existing one. Select an existing VCM that closely
approximates the required new VCM, duplicate it, then make the necessary minor editing
changes to the VCM.
A virtual channel is not copied to a destination map if the service location does not exist on all
downstream plants that are linked to the destination map. Warnings are output to the operation
log for each channel that cannot be copied; however, the duplication is still considered
successful even if some channels cannot be copied.
To duplicate a VCM:
1 On the DAC 6000 Main Menu, click Manage Plants display the Manage Plants window.

2 Click Define Virtual Channel Map to display the Define Virtual Channel Map window:

4 Click Name to display the Zoom: Plant/Headend Name window.
5 Select the name of the headend that is associated with the VCM to be duplicated and then
click Accept. The Define Virtual Channel Map window now has the Name field
populated.
6 On the Define Virtual Channel Map window, click Select.
7 From the VCM Information panel, highlight the VCM name to be duplicated; the Duplicate
Map button activates.

8 Click the Duplicate Map button to invoke the Duplicate Virtual Channel Map window:
9 Click the New VCM Name field to activate it and type the name of the duplicate VCM.
10 Click Headend Name to display the Zoom: Plant/Headend Name window.
11 Select the name of the headend to associate with the duplicate VCM and then click Accept.
The Duplicate Virtual Channel Map now has the Headend Name field populated.
12 Click the External VCM Handle field to activate it and type a designator number for the
duplicate VCM.

13 Click the Downstream Plants radio button to activate the Downstream Plants panel:

14 Click Add to invoke the Edit Duplicate VCM Downstream Plants window:
15 Click DSP Name to invoke the Zoom: Downstream Plant Name window.
16 Select a name from the list and click Accept.
17 In the Edit Duplicate VCM Downstream Plants window, click Is Default if the newly
created duplicate VCM is to be the default for the selected downstream.
18 The downstream plant name and its VCM default status appear in the Downstream Plants
panel of the Duplicate Virtual Channel Map window.
19 Click the Identification radio button and click Accept.
20 The newly created VCM appears in the VCM Information list of the Define Virtual
Channel Map window.
21 Highlight the new VCM and click Change.
22 Edit the new VCM as necessary using the Edit Virtual Channel Map, Define Channel Map
Row, and Edit Virtual Channel Map Row windows described previously under Add a
Virtual Channel Map.
Build a Virtual Channel Map

To activate a defined VCM and have it sent out to the set-tops, you must issue a build
command.
To build a VCM:
1 Click Manage Plants on the DAC 6000 Main Menu.
2 Click Define Virtual Channel Map.
3 Click Select.

4 From the VCM Information panel, highlight the VCM name that you want to build.
5 Click Build Channel Map.

6 Click Yes.


To change the existing virtual channel lineup:
3 Click Select.
4 Select the VCM Name MOT1 and then click Change.
6 Click Add.
8 Highlight A&E and then click Accept.
10 Highlight C6M_A37 Analog Port and then click Accept.
12 Verify Standard from the Type pull-down menu.
13 Click Accept.
14 Click Exit twice.
15 Assure the VCM name MOT1 is highlighted and then click Build Channel Map. A
confirmation window is displayed.
16 Click Yes.

Change a Virtual Channel Lineup

To change the existing virtual channel lineup:
3 Click Select.
4 Select the VCM Name MOT1 and then click Change
6 Click Select.
7 Select Number 400 then click Delete.
8 At the prompt: Delete this VCM now? Click Yes.
9 Click Add.
11 Select TECH TV and then click Accept.
13 Select C6U_104 C6U Port or C8U_104 C6U Port and then click Accept.
15 Select Standard from the Type pull-down menu.
16 Click Accept.
17 Click Exit twice.
18 Assure the VCM name MOT1 is highlighted and then click Build Channel Map. A
confirmation window is displayed.
19 Click Yes.
21 Using a remote and DCT, verify virtual channel 400 no longer exists and virtual channel
420 is TECH TV. Select channel up/down on the remote.
22 Put TECH TV back on virtual channel 400.
Duplicate, Edit and Build a VCM

To duplicate and edit a VCM:
1 On the DAC 6000 Main Menu, click Manage Plants.
3 On the Define Virtual Channel Map window, click Select.
4 Highlight MOT1.

5 Click the Duplicate Map button to invoke the Duplicate Virtual Channel Map window.
6 Type MOT2 in the New VCM Name field.
7 Click Headend Name to display the Zoom: Plant/Headend Name window.
8 Select Headend 1 and then click Accept.
9 Type 5 in the External VCM Handle field.
10 Click the Downstream Plants radio button to activate the Downstream Plants panel.
11 Click Add.
12 Click DSP Name to display the Zoom: Downstream Plant Name window.
13 Select DSP 1 and click Accept.
14 Click the Identification radio button and click Accept.
15 Highlight MOT2 and click Change.
17 Click Select.
18 Highlight KYW.
19 Click Delete.
20 Click Yes.
21 Click Accept.
23 Click Yes.
24 Click Exit.

Lab Exercise 8

1 Add a virtual channel to the existing virtual channel map using the following information:
VCM Name = MOT1
Source & Provider Name = A&E & Cable Company
RF Device Name & Port Name = C6M_A37 Analog Port
Channel Number = 37
Type = Standard
2 Build the MOT1 channel map.
Change a Virtual Channel Lineup

1 Change the virtual channel for TECH TV using the following information:
VCM Name = MOT1
Source & Provider Name = TECH TV & Cable Company
RF Device Name & Port Name = C6U_104 C6U Port or C8U_104 C6U Port
Channel Number = 420
Type = Standard
3 Put TECH TV back on virtual channel 400.
Duplicate, Edit and Build a VCM

1 Copy a VCM :
Existing VCM Name = MOT1
New VCM Name = MOT2
Headend Name = Headend 1
External VCM Handle = 5
DSP Name = DSP 1
2 Delete KYW from the MOT2 VCM.
3 Build the MOT2 channel map

Section 9
Manage Terminals
Perform terminal operations
Define a Multicast 16 Address Set

9-2 Manage Terminals
Terminal Overview
During this portion of the training class, we will discuss the function of the Digital Consumer
Terminals (DCTs) and how to define them in the DAC 6000 database.
The DCTs are cable terminals that support the delivery of both analog and digital services and
numerous other configurations. They are designed to operate in the same system with older
set-top terminal products.
Define Terminals in the Database

You must enter the information for each terminal into the database to enable communications
between the DAC 6000 and the terminals in the system.
1 In the Main Menu, click Manage Terminals. The system displays the Manage Terminals
window:

Manage Terminals 9-3
2 Click Define Terminal. The system displays the Define Terminal window:
Terminal Type Used to identify the terminals model number and communication type as
One-Way, Fone-Way,Two-Way, Ethernet or DOCSIS. Click the button to
display the Zoom: Terminal Type window listing valid choices. Required
field entry.
Unit Address A unique, 16-character, decimal value representing the unit address of the
terminal used by the DAC 6000 for communication. The format is
nnn-nnnnn-nnnnn-nnn. This number is burned into the terminal NVRAM
during its manufacture and is displayed on the unit. Required field entry.
One of several fields that can be used to uniquely select a terminal.
Terminal ID A unique, system-generated, eight-digit integer between 1 and 16777215.
The DAC 6000 uses this number to identify this specific terminal. One of
several fields (Serial Number, Account Number) that can be used to
uniquely select a terminal

Serial Number A unique, twelve-character alphanumeric field for recording the serial
number of the terminal. This number is burned into the terminal NVRAM
during its manufacture. One of several fields that can be used to uniquely
select a terminal.
Account Number Customer account number that is issued by the Business System and that
can be used to uniquely select a terminal. One of several fields that can be
used to uniquely select a terminal.
On Plant A button that indicates this terminal is actively connected to the cable
plant.
Last Response These fields indicate the date (mm/dd/yyy format) and time (hh:mm
Date format) that the DAC 6000 received a response from the digital set-top
during the last poll. For one-way digital set-tops, this field is always
inactive.
Failures Number of poll attempts with no response from the terminal.
Power Leveling Number of poll attempts with power leveling enabled with no response
Attempts from the terminal.
Non- Number of times the telco set-top did not respond to a poll with
Participating conditional dial enabled.
Counts
Chronic Non- A button that indicates this terminal is a chronic non-responder or not.
Responding The terminal must not respond to polls for a number of days greater than
the tunable setting to be considered a chronic non-responder.
Install Date Indicates the date the terminal was added. The date is comprised of two
two-digit integers and a four-digit integer in the format MM/DD/YYYY,
example, 12/01/2000).
Auto- Indicates the date the DSG terminal auto-registered with the DSG RADD.
Registration The date is comprised of two two-digit integers and a four-digit integer in
Date the format MM/DD/YYYY, where MM is the month, DD is the day, and
Activated A button that indicates this terminal is active or inactive. A darkened
button indicates the terminal is active.
Autodiscovered A button that indicates this terminal was auto discovered and the upstream
plant info was updated.
IP Address Last reported DOCSIS/DSG terminal IP address used during auto .
discovery.
BSI Name This is the name of the Business System with which this digital set-top is
associated.
Downstream This field displays the name of the downstream plant for this terminal.
Plant Name

Upstream Plant This field displays the name of the upstream plant for this terminal
Name (applies only to two-way terminals).
This window also contains the following buttons:
Authorize IPPV... Displays a window for authorizing a terminal to purchase IPPV events.
Authorize Displays a window for authorizing a terminal for subscription services.
Services...
Authorize Displays a window for authorizing a terminal to receive PPV programs.
Program...
Authorize Displays a window for authorizing a terminal to receive packages.
Packages
Authorize Displays a window that enables you to authorize objects, as well as
Objects/Resources resources.
Configure Displays a window for defining Map Name, Amplitude Level,
Transmission Upstream Plant Name, Downstream Plane Name, Modem Bank, RPD
Parameters channel and frequency, and the interactive Downstream and Upstream
IDs and impulse credit limits.
Initialize Initializes a terminal and sends a configuration sequence. Clears
NVRAM except downloaded objects and view history stack. Clears
passwords.
Cold Initialize Initializes a terminal and clears NVRAM (including download code
objects) and static RAM. Resets the user processor and returns a
terminal to an out-of-box state and then sends the configuration
sequence.
In the Advanced Set-Top Boxes (ASTB), a cold initialization erases
everything in the flash memory except the boot code and base platform.
After the objects are erased, initialization commands are sent to the
ASTB.
Refresh Updates information for a terminal.
Disconnect This option sends a disconnect command to the terminal that prevents
the terminal from displaying any video.
Clear PIN Displays a window for clearing the passwords on a terminal.
Factory Reset This option is active for Advanced Set-Top Boxes (ASTB). Factory
Reset clears all objects in the ASTB flash memory except the boot
code. The boot code can process only the boot code control message
and download messages; it does not provide any video or audio
capabilities. Factory Reset is used primarily to clean out an ASTB
returned from a subscriber.

Display Terminal This option displays the terminal attributes with each associated value
Attributes and hierarchy.
Define This option displays the Define CableCARD/Host Parameters screen
CableCARD/Host set, which is used to input the CableCARD/Host pairing information.
Parameters
Clear Orphan This option allows the operator to clear orphan purchases from an
Purchases individual set-top.
Configure This option displays the Configure MediaCipher Smart Card window,
MediaCipher Smart which is used to mate an MCSC with a host set-top or remate a different
Cards MCSC with a host set-top. At the set-top, remating an MCSC requires
removal of the existing MCSC from the set-top and insertion of the
replacement MCSC.
Add a Terminal
To add a terminal to the DAC 6000 database:
1 In the Define Terminal window, click Add to enable the Terminal Type field.
2 Click Terminal Type. The system displays the Zoom: Terminal Type window:
3 Select a Terminal Type and click Accept.

4 Type in a Unit Address, Serial Number, optional Account Number, the Business System
Name, the Downstream Plant Name, the Upstream Plant Name (if it is two-way), and
indicate if it is on plant.
5 Click Accept to add the terminal to the database and enable the Terminal Operation
options.
6 Click Initialize to display the following window:
7 Click Yes to initialize the terminal now.

Authorize IPPV Events

To authorize a terminal for impulse capability:
1 In the Define Terminal window, select the terminal and click Accept.
2 Click Authorize IPPV. The system displays the Authorize IPPV window:
3 Only the IPPV option can be enabled. All IPPV services share the same tier. Select
Authorized, and then click Accept.
4 Click Exit. The system authorizes the selected terminal to purchase IPPV programs and
returns you to the Define Terminal window.

Authorize Services for a Terminal

To authorize a terminal for a subscription (Internally-Generated) service:
1 In the Define Terminal window, click Select.
2 Type in any of the Terminal Information fieldsTerminal ID, Unit Address, Serial Number
or Account Numberfor the terminal for which you want to authorize a service, and then
click Accept. The system enables the Terminal Operations options.
3 Click Authorize Services. The system displays the Authorize Services window:
This window includes the following Services fields:
Service An 80-character alphanumeric field that identifies an available service.

Name Only 37 characters are displayed, but you can scroll to the left or right to
see the complete field.
Provider An 80-character alphanumeric field that identifies the service provider.
Name
4 Click Add.

5 Click Service & Provider Name. The system displays the Zoom: Service & Provider
Name window.
6 Select a service and provider to be authorized for this terminal, and then click Accept.
7 Click Accept to accept the authorization.
8 Click Exit. Upon exiting, the system sends the service authorization(s) to the terminal.
Authorize a Terminal for a PPV Program

To authorize a terminal for a PPV Program:
1 In the Define Terminal window, select the terminal and then click Accept.
2 Click Authorize Programs. The system displays the Authorize Programs window:
This window includes the following Program fields:
Service Name An 80-character, alphanumeric field that identifies the service.

Provider Name An 80-character, alphanumeric field that identifies the service provider.
Program Name An 80-character, alphanumeric field that identifies the program.

Start Date The starting date of the program. Two two-digit integers and a
four-digit integer in the format MM/DD/YYYY, where MM is the
month, DD is the day, and YYYY is the year (for example,
12/01/2000).
Start Time The starting time of the program. Two 2-digit integers in the format
HH:MM, where HH is the hour ranging from 0 (zero) through 23, and
MM is the minute ranging from 0 (zero) through 59.
Allow Taping A button that indicates if taping of this program is permitted. If button
darkened, taping permitted.
3 Click Add. The system displays the Edit Program Authorization window:
This window includes the following data entry fields and buttons for selection from related
Zoom windows.
Service & An 80-character field alphanumeric field for entering the service and
Provider Name provider name.
Program Name & An 80-character field alphanumeric field for entering the program
Start Date/Time name. The starting date of the program. Type in the field directly or
select from the Zoom: Program Name & Start Date/Time window.
Enter two two-digit integers and a four-digit integer in the format
MM/DD/YYYY (for example, 05/08/2000). The starting time of the
program. Two 2-digit integers in the format HH:MM, where HH is
the hour ranging from 0 (zero) through 23, and MM is the minute
ranging from 0 (zero) through 59
Allow Taping Click to allow taping of program.
4 Enter the service and provider names in the fields. Or select a service from the Zoom:
Service & Provider Name window and then click Accept.

5 Enter the program name and the start date and time in the fields. Or, select a program from
the Zoom: Program Name & Start Date/Time window and then click Accept.
6 Click Accept to accept the authorization.
7 Click Exit. Upon exiting, the system sends the PPV authorization(s) to the terminal.
Authorize a Package
To authorize a terminal for a package:
1 In the Define Terminal window, click Authorize Packages to display the Authorize
Packages window:
This window includes the following Packages fields:
Package Name This 80-character alphanumeric field is the name of the package.
Type This is the package type.

2 Click Add to display the Select Package Name window:
3 Select a package name and then click Accept to display the Authorize Package window
with the Package Name displayed in the Packages section of the window.
4 Click Exit. Upon exiting, the system sends the package authorization(s) to the terminal.
Authorize Objects/Resources
With the Authorize Objects/Resources window you can authorize or de-authorize a targeted
terminal for an .obj and associated file(s) or a resource. Resources are objects available for use
by applications. A typical resource is interactivity, which is applicable to all two-way digital
terminals.
If a terminal is authorized or de-authorized for interactivity from the Authorize
Objects/Resources window, the targeted terminal must be manually refreshed from the Define
Terminal window.
Like any resource that has a BSG handle defined, interactivity can be enabled or disabled with
a Wire Link command, in which case a manual refresh is not required.
To authorize objects/resources:
1 On the DAC 6000 Main Menu, click Manage Terminals to display the Manage Terminals
window.
2 Click Define Terminal to display the Define Terminal window.
3 Click Select to enable Terminal ID.
4 Type the ID number of the terminal that you want to authorize and then click Accept to
enable the Terminal Operation section of the window.

5 Click Authorize Objects/Resources to display the Authorize Objects/Resources window:
This window includes the following Object/Resources fields:
Object/Resource Name This field displays the name of the object/resource.

Version This field displays the version number of the object/resource.

6 Click Add to display the Edit Object/Resource Authorization window:
7 Click Object/Resource Name to display the Zoom: Object Name window:

8 Select an object and then click Accept to display the Edit Object/Resource Authorization
window with the fields populated.
9 Click Accept to display the Authorize Objects/Resources window with the
Object/Resource name and Version listed in the Objects/Resources panel of the window.
10 Click Exit. Upon exiting, the system sends the object/resource authorization(s) to the
terminal.

Configure Transmission Parameters

To configure transmission parameters for a terminal:
1 In the Define Terminal window, select the terminal and then click Accept.
2 Click Configure Transmission Parameters to display the Configure Transmission
Parameters window:

You can change, but not add or delete information in any fields. This window includes the
following fields:
Map Name A unique name that identifies the channel map. Click to display Zoom
window.
Amplitude This display-only two-digit integer field is for use with two-way
Level terminals only. Valid values are from zero through 255. This field
identifies the amplitude level (in dBmV increments) of the upstream
frequency. A predefined delta level instructs the system when to adjust
the terminal level.
Upstream This is the name of the upstream plant through which this terminal (if
Plant Name two-way) communicates with the DAC 6000.
Downstream This is the name of the downstream plant though which signals are
Plant Name communicated to this terminal.
Modem Bank This is the name of the modem bank through which the terminal (if
fone-way) will communicate with the headend.
RPD/Channel/ These fields identify the RPD, the channel on that RPD and its frequency
Frequency that are used by this terminal as return path. It is for use with two-way
RF terminals only.
Router/IP The Router ID followed by the starting and ending IP addresses in the
Range range (both IP addresses can be identical for a one address range).
Downstream This is the RF downstream interactive path assignment for the terminal.
ID
Upstream ID This is the upstream interactive path assignment for the terminal.
Credit This is the impulse credit limit (in units) issued to the terminal.
Purchases This is the impulse purchase limit issued to the terminal.
3 Enter all required information in the fields or click the buttons to select information from
the list in a Zoom window. For example, click Map Name to view the Zoom: Channel Map
Names window.
4 Select a channel map and then click Accept to display the Configure Transmission
Parameters window.
5 Click Accept. The system updates the DAC 6000 database with the new transmission
parameters for this terminal.

Initialize a Terminal
When you initialize a terminal from the DAC it clears user settings, guide data and non-volatile
RAM (NVRAM) except downloaded objects and purchases. Then a configuration sequence is
sent.
To initialize a terminal:
1 In the Define Terminal window, click Select. The system enables user-editable fields.
2 Type in any of the Terminal Information windows and click Accept. The system enables
the Terminal Operation options.
3 Click Initialize. The system displays the confirmation pop-up window:
4 Click Yes to initialize the terminal with the changes.
Cold Initialize a Terminal

When you cold initialize a terminal from the DAC it clears user settings, guide data and non-
volatile RAM (NVRAM) including downloaded objects. Impulse purchases are not cleared.
Then a configuration sequence is sent.
To cold initialize a terminal:
1 In the Define Terminal window, click Select. The system enables user-editable fields.
2 Type in any of the Terminal Information windows and click Accept. The system enables
the Terminal Operation options.

3 Click Cold Initialize. The system displays the confirmation pop-up window:
4 Click Yes to initialize the terminal with the changes.

Refresh a Terminal
A refresh sends the configuration sequence and authorizations to a terminal. To refresh a
terminal:
2 Type in any of the Terminal Information fields for the terminal to be refreshed, then click
Accept. The system enables the Terminal Operations options.
3 Click Refresh. The system displays the confirmation pop-up window:
4 Click Yes to refresh the terminal now.
Disconnect a Terminal
To disconnect a terminal:
2 Type in any of the Terminal Information fieldsTerminal ID, Unit Address, Serial Number
or Account Numberfor the terminal to be disconnected, and then click Accept.
3 Click Disconnect.
4 Click Yes to disconnect the terminal.

Clear a PIN
To clear a PIN from a terminal:
1 On the Define Terminal window, click Clear PIN to display the Clear PIN window:
This window displays the following PIN Information fields:
All PINs This option clears all PINS in the terminal.

Parental Control This option clears only parental control PIN in the terminal.
Event This option clears only the PIN that control IPPV program
purchasing. It clears the PIN from the memory in the terminal.
2 Select the button that indicates which PIN to clear.
3 Click Accept.

Factory Reset
This option is applicable to only ASTBs. Factory Reset clears all objects in the flash memory
except the boot code.
To factory reset an ASTB:
1 On the Define Terminal window, click Select to enable the user-editable fields.
2 Type a value in one of the Terminal Information fieldsTerminal ID, Unit Address, Serial
Number, or Account Number.
3 Click Accept to enable the Terminal Operation options.
4 Click Factory Reset to clear all objects in the flash memory except the boot code.
5 Click Yes to perform a factory reset on the terminal.
Display Terminal Attributes

To display the terminal attributes of a terminal:
1 On the Define Terminal window, click Select.
2 Type a value in one of the Terminal Information fields; Terminal ID, Unit Address, Serial
Number, or Account Number.
3 Click Accept.

4 Click Display Terminal Attributes. The Display Terminal Attributes window is displayed:
(Terminal) ID This read-only field is a unique system-generated, eight-digit integer from 1

to 16777215. The DAC 6000 uses this number to identify this specific
digital set-top.
Serial Number This unique, 12-character alphanumeric field is used to record the serial
number of the set-top. This number is burned into the digital set-top during
production and is on a barcode label on the bottom of the unit. It is one of
three fields that you can use to uniquely select a digital set-top.
Attribute One of many defined elements that collectively profile the digital set-top in
the database.
Value When required, a numeric quantity that describes the magnitude or state of
the attribute.
Hierarchy The level of significance or precedence control of the attribute.

5 Click Exit to return to the Define Terminal window.
Clear Orphan Purchases

To clear orphan purchases on a terminal:
2 Type in any of the Terminal Information fields for the terminal to be cleared, then click
Accept. The system enables the Terminal Operations options.
3 Click Clear Orphan Purchases. The system displays the confirmation pop-up window:
4 Click Yes to clear the terminal now.
Define Multicast 16 Address Sets

A multicast 16 address is a type of group address comprised of 16 bits. Some applications will
use a multicast address to allow information to be sent to a grouping of set-tops versus a single
set-top or all set-tops.
The multicast 16 addresses must be converted to high-byte.low-byte format for the DAC 6000.
For example, to convert the decimal number 8093 to the high-byte.low-byte format, 8093 is
divided by 256. The quotient is the high-byte and the remainder is the low-byte.
31 high-byte (quotient)
256)8093
768
413
256
157 low-byte (remainder)
A period is used to separate the high-byte from the low-byte. So the entry would be 31.157 in
the appropriate Address field.

To define a multicast 16 address set.

1 In the Manage Terminals window, click Define Multicast 16 Address Set to display the
Define Multicast 16 Address Set window:
Name This 80-character alphanumeric field is the name of the multicast

16 address set.
Stream Type Virtual Channel or Network
Address 1 This field contains the first multicast 16 address.
Note: The entry must be in the high-byte.low-byte format.
Address 2 This field contains the second multicast 16 address.

Address 3 This field contains the third multicast 16 address.

Address 4 This field contains the fourth multicast 16 address.
Service & Provider This 80-character alphanumeric field is the name of the service and
Name provider.

3 Type the name of the new address set in the Name field.
4 Select the appropriate Stream Type.
5 Type the first multicast address in the Address 1 field.
6 Type the second multicast address in the Address 2 field.
7 Type the third multicast address in the Address 3 field.
8 Type the fourth multicast address in the Address 4 field.
9 Click Service & Provider Name to display the Zoom: Service and Provider Name window.
10 Select a service and provider and then click Accept to display the Define Multicast 16
Address Set window.

Convert Terminal Type

You can convert digital set-top types on the Convert Terminal Type window.
To convert digital set-top types:
1 On the DAC 6000 Main Menu, click Manage Terminals to display the Manage Terminals
window.
2 Click Convert Terminal Type to display the Convert Terminal Type window:

Input Filename This 80-character alphanumeric field is the name of the file that
contains the serial numbers all of the digital set-tops to be
converted.
Success Output Filename This 80-character alphanumeric field is the path and filename of
the file that contains the names of the digital set-tops that
successfully convert. The default is
/home/acc4000d/data/type_convert.success.
Failure Output Filename This 80-character alphanumeric field is the path and filename of
the file that contains the names of the digital set-tops that do not
successfully convert. The default is
/home/acc4000d/data/type_convert.fail.
Non-Responding Terminal This 80-character alphanumeric field is the path and filename of
Filename the file that contains the names of the digital set-tops that do not
respond.
Terminal Type This field is the type to which the digital set-tops listed in the
Input Filename convert. A terminal type must be specified to
perform the conversion.
IPPV Enabled This button when enabled (filled-in) or disabled would enable
or disable the Impulse Pay Per View feature on two-way
terminals that are contained in the input file.
Refresh This option sends a full refresh to each digital set-top after it is
converted.
Init This option sends an initialization to each digital set-top after it
is converted.
Warm Init This option sends a warm initialization to each digital set-top
after it is converted.
Cold Init This option sends a cold initialization to each digital set-top
after it is converted.
No Init/Refresh This option updates the database after a digital set-top is
converted but does not initialize or refresh the digital set-top.
Send Conversion This option sends the conversion command to the digital
set-tops listed in the input file.
Cancel Conversion This option stops the conversion. Stopping the conversion
before it is completed is not recommended as it can cause a
partially committed database.
3 Type the name of the input file that contains the serial numbers of the digital set-tops to be
converted in the Input Filename field.

4 Click Terminal Type to display the Zoom: Terminal Type window:
5 Select the Terminal Type to which you want to convert the digital set-tops and then click
Accept to display the Convert Terminal Type window with the Terminal Type field
populated.
6 Click the diamond next to the option that you want to execute when the conversion is
complete.
7 Click Send Conversion to convert the digital set-tops. When the conversion is complete,
the system logs a message to the dev_log file indicating that the terminal type conversion is
complete.

Define Terminal Attributes

The Define Terminal Attributes window provides the capability to set attributes for all
terminals in the system or terminals on a particular downstream plant, or upstream plant, as
well as attributes for a specific terminal by serial number or terminal ID.
To define terminal attributes:
1 In the Main Menu, click Manage Terminals.
2 Click Define Terminal Attributes. The system displays the Define Terminal Attributes
window:
System The name assigned to the DAC 6000. When selected, it indicates the
attribute is applicable for the entire system of terminals.
Downstream Plant When selected, it indicates the attribute is applicable to all terminals on
that downstream plant.
All (Downstream When selected, it indicates the attribute is applicable to all terminals on
Plant) all downstream plants.
Upstream Plant When selected, it indicates the attribute is applicable to all terminals on
that upstream plant.
All (Upstream When selected, it indicates the attribute is applicable to all terminals on
Plant) all upstream plants.
Term. SN When selected, the attribute is applicable to a specific terminal.

This unique, 12-character alphanumeric field is used to record the serial

number of the digital set-top. This number is burned into the digital
set-top during production and is on a barcode label on the bottom of the
unit. It is one of three fields that you can use to uniquely select a digital
set-top.
Term. ID When selected, the attribute is applicable to a specific terminal.
This read-only field is a unique, system-generated, eight-digit integer
from 1 through 16777215. The DAC 6000 uses this number to identify
this specific digital set-top.
Attribute Attributes are as follows:
HDCP_always_on
HDCP_mute_when_failed
ab_output Enables AB output capability, whereby the user can
toggle between terminal and antenna input to the television.
app_if_port Enables the application interface port.
aux_option (ab_input) Enables the AB input switch. The
terminal does not support enabled AB input and AB output
switches simultaneously. If both switches are enabled by the
DAC 6000, the terminal will disable them. Use
AB_input_switch_config_mode {AB_controlled, off, disabled,
on} to configure the AB input switch as follows:
AB_controlled The state of the switch depends upon virtual
channel selection.
off The terminal sets the switch to off, which is the A cable
side.
disable The terminal functions as though the switch were not
present.
on - The terminal sets the switch to on, which is the B cable side.
control_chan_timeout Specifies the timeout period the terminal
waits before entering the timeout state if it has not detected the
presence of a control channel. Valid values are 1 to 65535 (45.5
days); the value 0 indicates the terminal will never time out
(infinite timeout period).
country_code An eight bit unsigned integer that encodes the
terminal resident country.
currency_code An eight bit unsigned integer that defines the
currency for program cost or other cost items displayed by the
terminal.
detection_criteria Selects the criteria the terminal uses to detect
the presence of a control channel (EMM PID) on the current
transport stream (multiplex).
Selecting any_message causes a present control channel
detection if any message associated with the terminal is received

on the EMM PID stream on the currently tuned transport

multiplex.
Selecting reset_message causes a present control channel
detection only if a rest_control_chan_timeout or a
control_chan_timeout_config message is received on the EMM
PID stream. Either of these messages causes the timeout value to
be set to the value specified by control_channel_timeout.
downloadability Enables code download functionality.
epg_region A 16 bit unsigned value that specifies the logical
location of the terminal from the EPG applications perspective.
ethernet_output Enables terminal Ethernet output.
favorite_channel Enables or disables favorite channel feature.
force_standalone Applies to operations with TvPass card
(renewable security card). Not presently implemented.
geographic_region Identifies the set-tops geographic region
between 0-255. Not currently implemented.
hsi_output Enable high-speed serial interface output from the
terminal.
hunt_dwell_time Specifies the number of seconds the digital
set-top will wait while attempting to detect the presence of a
control channel (EMM PID) before moving to the next channel
in the algorithm. The control channel hunting algorithm is used
whenever the terminal is turned off or when a timeout condition
occurs. Dwell time values are from 1 to 255 seconds (4.26
minutes); the value 0 indicates infinite dwell time.
ignore_blackout Forces set-top to ignore a blackout.
interactive_ir Enables or disables the capability to use
interactive IR remote control.
last_channel Enables or disables the last channel feature.
ob_multi40_wildcard_enabled When enabled, the multicast-40
wild card is used.
ob_multi40_wildcard_gran - Specifies nibble or byte wild card
granularity in the 40 bit multicast address. Nibble granularity
provides 10 address fields; byte granularity provides 5 address
fields. A corresponding field in the message address is assumed
to equal the terminal multicast address if that field in the
terminal multicast address is designated as a wild card.
ob_multi40_wildcard_value Use
multi40_wildcard_symbol_byte or
multi40_wildcard_symbol_nibble to specify the wild card value
for the wild card fields in the 40 bit multicast address.
ob_network_wildcard_enabled When enabled, a network wild

card is used.
ob_network_wildcard_gran Specifies nibble or byte wild card
granularity in the 40 bit network address. Nibble granularity
provides 10 address fields; byte granularity provides 5 address
fields. A corresponding field in the message address is assumed
to equal the terminal network address if that field in the terminal
network address is designated as a wild card.
ob_network_wildcard_value Use net_wildcard_symbol_byte
or net_wildcard_symbol_nibble to specify the wild card value
for the wild card fields in the 40-bit network address.
output_channel_number The assigned terminal output channel
(typically 3 or 4 in USA systems).
output_freq_index Frequency index of the digital terminal
output channel.
parental_by_channel When enabled, locked channels require
the parental control password to be viewed.
parental_by_cost When enabled, programs exceeding the
subscriber defined cost threshold require the parental control
password to be viewed.
parental_by_rating - When enabled, programs exceeding the
subscriber defined morality rating require the parental control
parental_by_time - When enabled, programs associated with a
particular channel at a specified time require the parental control
purchase_cancel When disabled, the subscriber is not
permitted to cancel purchases. When enabled, the subscriber can
cancel purchases on a program-basis. Cancellation options for a
given program are specified in the programs access
requirements.
rating_region An identifier that is used to select from a number
of different program ratings delivered within a program (0
equals USA).
remote_control Enables or disables subscriber capability to use
the hand-held infrared remote control device.
rf_bypass Enables RF bypass capability. If disabled, RF
bypass functionality is disabled and the RF Bypass switch is set
to NON BYPASS mode, which causes any force_tune attempts
to be ignored.
time_control_prog Enables or disables the Time Controlled
Programming (TCP) terminal feature. With TCP, the subscriber
can configure terminal turn-on, turn-off, channel changes, and
purchase events as some future time and date.

timeout_reset_criteria - Selects the criteria the terminal uses to

leave the timeout state.
Selecting user_action ends the timeout state and returns the
terminal to the control channel detect state if any key codes or
channel change requests are received.
Selecting channel_detect enables the control channel detection
algorithm to cause the terminal to leave the timeout state.
timezone_index Specifies the difference (+/-) in seconds
between the terminals standard time and the UTC system time.
turn_off_vc Identifies the virtual channel tuned the terminal
goes to whenever it is turned off by the subscriber.
turn_off_vc_enabled Causes the terminal to go to a specified
virtual channel whenever it is turned off by the subscriber.
turn_on_vc_enabled - Causes the terminal to go to a specified
virtual channel whenever it is turned on by the subscriber.
turn_on_vc - Identifies the virtual channel tuned the terminal
goes to whenever it is turned on by the subscriber.
user_language_enabled Enables or disables subscriber
capability to specify the preferred language configuration for
audio and/or subtitle components, or for filtering language
tagged messages in SCC streams.
vcr_tuning Enables or disables VCR control through the IR
blaster.
volume_mute_control Enables or disables the terminal volume
and mute controls.
Value When required, a numeric quantity that describes the state or magnitude
of the attribute.
Hierarchy The level of control of the attribute. Hierarchy resolution ranges from
system, in which case the attribute is applicable to all terminals in the
system, down to terminal serial number or ID, which identifies a single
terminal for the attribute.
Name Name assigned to the attribute.
Terminal SN This unique, 12-character alphanumeric field is used to record the serial
number of the digital set-top. This number is burned into the digital
set-top during production and is on a barcode label on the bottom of the
unit. It is one of three fields that you can use to uniquely select a digital
set-top.

To add a Terminal Attribute:

1 In the Define Terminal Attributes window, click the applicable button (System,
Downstream Plant, Upstream Plant, or Terminal).
2 Click Add. The Edit Terminal Attributes window is displayed:
Attribute The terminal attribute you are adding.

Value When required, a numeric quantity that describes the state or magnitude of the
attribute.
Name Identifies the name of the headend, upstream plant, or downstream plant for
which the attribute is being added.
Terminal ID Identifies the ID of the terminal for which the attribute is being added.
Terminal S/N Identifies the serial number of the terminal for which the attribute is being
added.

3 Click Attribute to display the Zoom: Terminal Attribute window.

4 Select an attribute and click Accept.
5 Type in an appropriate value as determined by the attribute type.
6 The display will depend on which radio button you selected in the Define Terminal
Attributes window. Click Name, if appropriate, to display the Zoom: Downstream Plant
Name, or Zoom: Upstream Plant Name window.
7 Select a name and click Accept twice.
8 Or type in the terminals ID or serial number and click Accept.

Lab Exercise 9
Retrieve a terminal from the Database

To retrieve an existing terminal from the DAC 6000 database:
2 In the Manage Terminals window, click Define Terminal.
3 Click Select.
4 Click on the Terminal ID field. Type in the Terminal ID of the terminal that is currently
connected to the TV.
5 Click Accept. The Define Terminals window displays the fields with information for this
particular terminal.
Disconnect and Reactivate a DCT

To disconnect a DCT:
3 Click Select.
4 Type the Terminal ID number that is on your system (for example: 1, 3, 5).
particular DCT.
6 Click Disconnect.
7 At the prompt to continue, click Yes.
8 Verify that the DCT is disconnected by checking for video services (analog or digital).
To reactivate a DCT:
1 In the Define Terminal window, click Refresh.

Delete and Re-Authorize the VIP Package on a terminal

To delete the VIP package on a terminal:
1 Verify that the DCT is on display/virtual channel 109 and the service is viewable.
4 Click Select.
particular DCT.
7 Click Authorize Packages. The Package Authorization window is displayed.
8 Click Select.
9 Highlight VIP and then click Delete.
10 Click Yes.
11 Click Exit.
12 Verify that Womens Entertainment is no longer an authorized service for the DCT by
checking to see if video service available on display/virtual channel 109.
To re-authorize the DCT for the VIP package:
1 Click Authorize Packages. The Package Authorization window is displayed.
2 Click Add.
3 Highlight VIP and then click Accept.
4 Click Exit.
Initialize a DCT
To initialize a DCT:
3 Click Select.
particular DCT.
6 In the Define Terminal window, click Initialize.
8 Watch the front LED display of the DCT to see if it flashes 4 eights and powers the display
off. Wait for the initialization to complete (1 minute). Power up the DCT.

Learning Exercise 9
T = True statement F = False statement
1 A two-way DCT is always enabled for impulse purchasing.
2 A refresh will delete impulse purchases in a DCT.
3 A cold init will delete impulse purchases in a DCT.
4 One can disable a DCT from being able to make impulse

purchases using the DAC 6000.
5 A factory reset can only be issued to an ASTB.
6 A DCT can have multiple channel maps.
7 A multicast 16 address set is a set of 4 numbers.
8 A terminals attributes are configured in the Define Terminal screen.
9 To convert the type of a number of terminals you create an input file that contains
the terminals unit addresses.
10 In the Define Terminal screen you can set the return level of a two-way terminal.

Section 10
CableCARD/Host Support
Describe what a CableCARD and Host are
Name the Copy Control Information(CCI) levels
Define what a CPMS is
Perform the steps to manually add a CableCARD/Host pairing to the DAC
Perform a validate
Run a report to monitor validation operations

10-2 CableCARD/Host Support
CableCARD/Host Description
OpenCableTM is a project that standardizes the cable network interface and helps create a retail market
for digital cable products. As part of this effort, the OpenCableTM specifications define the following:
A Host device (set-top box or integrated television) that provides generic cable tuning and
decoding capabilities, that is portable across all cable networks. The Host is capable of decoding
clear analog and clear digital content.
A removable CableCARDTM security module that separates a retail delivered set-top box (Host)
from the cable operators proprietary conditional access system and network messaging. The
CableCARD module has a PCMCIA Type II form factor.
An interface between the Host and CableCARD, that allows for Hosts and CableCARDs from
different vendors to interoperate with each other freely.
The initiative provides portability for host devices. To enable portability, the proprietary
features of a set-top box, such as encryption, security, and other private network features, had
to be removed from the Host and placed on a removable device. This device, the CableCARD,
is the size of a laptop computers network interface card (NIC) or Personal ComputerMemory
Card International Association (PCMCIA) card. When inserted into a Host device, the
CableCARD provides the conditional access function and decrypts encrypted digital content.
Hosts developed using the OpenCableTM hardware specifications will allow a consumer to
purchase, from the retailer of their choice, a Host, which may then be connected to their home
entertainment system, much like any other piece of consumer electronics equipment. The
consumer would then receive a CableCARD, provided by the cable operator when subscribing
to encrypted digital services. If the consumer moves to an area of the country served by a
different cable operator, the consumer will simply return the CableCARD to his present cable
operator. The consumer will take the Host as he/she relocates and reconnect it upon moving to
the new cable system, obtaining a new CableCARD from the new cable provider.
Copy Control Information (CCI)

In the OpenCable standards, Copy Control Information (CCI) is used to indicate the copying
rules associated with content, and to indicate when high value content must be encrypted
across a digital interface, whether it is the CableCARD/Host physical interface, or a digital
output on a Host.
Copy Control Information (CCI) is information that describes the duplication rules for an item
of digital content. It is intended to reduce illegal duplication and subsequent distribution of
video and audio content subject to copyright restrictions. Content providers indicate illegal
duplication and distribution of entertainment content as a leading cause of revenue loss.
Although copying of content by analog equipment such as VHS VCRs would still be possible
and has been ongoing for many years, the content copied to such devices is stored at a reduced
quality level because of the nature of that equipment and the storage medium. Digital storage
devices would have no inherent qualities such that the copied content would be reduced in
quality. In fact, such equipment would be capable of perfect storage of the original digital
content. This perfect storage capability is at the root of the requirement to include CCI
information in all high value content.
The four possible CCI levels are:

CableCARD/Host Support 10-3
CCI Level Description

Copy Freely Any number of copies can be produced.
Copy No More A copy of the content has already occurred and no more copies are
permitted.
Copy Once Only one copy of the content is permitted
Copy Never Copying of content is never permitted.
Copy Protection Management System (CPMS)

The CPMS is a new PC based Motorola headend device that will support requests for the
creation of validation messages intended for CableCARDs within the system. The CPMS will
control the secure aspects of the CableCARD Copy Protection validation message. These
messages will contain authenticated fields protected with secure encryption. Authentication
must be done to prevent someone from validating a CableCARD or Host independently of the
cable headend control system and spoofing the system. The Copy Protection Management
System is physically secured and separated from the other controller functions, thus preventing
the theft of security system information. The connection between the CPMS and the Access
Control System is established over the local area network and is based upon fundamental
Internet protocols.
Another element of the CPMS is the Certificate Revocation List (CRL) used to determine if a
good or bad validation message should be sent to a CableCARD. If any of the identified
CableCARD or Host IDs exist on the Certificate Revocation List, the CableCARD will be sent
a bad validation message and the CableCARD will request that the Host display an
Authorization Failure Screen. The CableCARD will not decrypt CA encrypted video until a
good validation message is received. If the CableCARD or Host does not appear on the CRL
a good validation message is sent to the CableCARD/Host allowing the CableCARD to
decrypt high value video services. The Host would then display these high value content
services.
There will also be an optional override of the CPMS decision on validation available via a
request from the Business System or DAC. If the Business System vendor implements this
feature and this option is utilized, the contents of the CRL are ignored and the CPMS will
generate either a good or bad validation message depending on the selection of the
override.
CableCARD/Host Pairing Information Screen

After installing the Motorola CableCARD into a compatible Open Cable Host, a cable
systems telephone number is displayed on the Man Machine Interface (MMI) as well as the
pairing information which includes: the CableCARD ID, Host ID, Data value, Unit Address
and the Hosts communication capability.

The subscriber then calls the cable systems number and tells the CSR if the Host is one-way or
two-way. When it is two-way there is no need for the subscriber to read the CableCARD/Host
pairing information to the CSR from the MMI screen. If it reports as one-way then the
subscriber will need to read the CableCARD/Host information to the CSR
The information displayed on the MMI will appear as:
CableCARD ID = AAA-BBB-CCC-DDD-c
AAA = This is the manufacturer ID, Motorola was assigned 000.
BBB-CCC-DDD = This is the 9 least significant digits of the unit address (when in
decimal form).
c = This is the Luhn digit, which is a checksum defined by the OpenCable Copy
protection specification.
Host ID = EEE-FFF-GGG-HHH-c
EEE = This is the manufacturer ID
FFF-GGG-HHH = This is a unique value assigned to a Host device.
c = This is the Luhn digit, which is a checksum defined by the OpenCable Copy
protection specification.

Data Field
This is a unique randomly generated value created during the CableCARD/Host pairing
process. This value is a private security data authenticator utilized by the Motorola
Conditional Access System in performance of the functions specified in the
CableCARD Copy Protection System specification.
Unit Address = III-JJJJJ-KKKKK-LLL
This is a unique 16 digit decimal value representing the unit address of the CableCARD
with the LLL representing the checksum.
Host Communication Capability
One-way
Two-way
Unknown
DAC 6000 Support for CableCARD/Host

In this release of the DAC 6000 the interface between the CPMS and the DAC 6000 is
automated. The CPMS could be co-located with each DAC 6000, or one CPMS can be used to
service many DAC 6000s. The steps outlined below are utilized in the support of
CableCARD/Host:
1 CableCARD is installed into a Host
2 CableCARD/Host Pairing Information and the Hosts communication capability is
displayed on TV
3 Customer or Installer calls Cable Operator CSR
If the Host is determined to be one-way, the following information is provided:
CableCARD Unit Address, Serial Number, and CableCARD/Host Pairing Information
If the Host is determined to be two-way, no information need be provided other then
customer name
4 CSR adds, initializes and authorizes CableCARD in Business System
5 CableCARD information sent and added to DAC 6000 via Wirelink
6 DAC 6000 forwards CableCARD/Host pairing information to CPMS
7 CPMS checks CableCARD/Host pairing against revocation list
8 If OK, validation message is generated and sent to DAC 6000
9 DAC/RADD 6000 inserts validation message into OOB

DAC 6000 Operations to Support CableCARD/Host
Add the CPMS IP Address into the hosts File

To add the CPMS IP address into the hosts file:
6 Type su and then press ENTER.
7 Type the root password and then press ENTER.
8 Type scoedit hosts and then press ENTER.
9 Type in the IP address of the CPMS and the host name of cpms.
For example:
# CPMS
165.137.104.90 cpms
#
10 Click File > Save.

11 Click File > Exit.
12 Type ping cpms and then press ENTER.
Sample of a successful ping operation:
dac6000: /home/acc4000d/scripts% ping cpms

PING cpms (165.137.104.90): 56 data bytes
64 bytes from cpms (165.137.104.90) : icmp_seq = 0 ttl = 255 time = 0 ms
-------cpms ping statistics--------
4 packets transmitted, 4 packets received, 0% packet loss
round-trip min/avg/max = 0/0/0 ms

Define Terminal (CableCARD/Host)

A CableCARD/Host terminal is one that is defined as a terminal with certain host attributes,
which includes the CableCARD/Host pairing information. This information is used to validate
the CableCARD/Host terminal combination. The CableCARD/Host terminal is defined in the
system with the Define Terminal window. From the Define Terminal window, the operator
adds the CableCARD/Host terminal. Once a CableCARD/Host terminal is added, clicking the
Define CableCARD/Host Parameters button provides access to the Define CableCARD/Host
Parameters screen set. This screen set has two windows, the Define CableCARD/Host
Parameters and the Edit CableCARD/Host Parameters windows, which provide the capabilities
to display and edit CableCARD/Host pairing information.
Much of the information typed into the Edit CableCARD/Host Parameters window fields is
taken from the man-machine interface (MMI) display. The MMI display automatically appears
on the TV connected to the CableCARD/Host terminal when the CableCARD is first placed in
the host terminal. This information is relayed by telephone to the operator, who enters it into
the applicable window fields.
Note: If the Business System in use by the Cable Operator includes features to send and control
CableCARD/Host pairing information and validation to the DAC 6000, these
operations would be substituted with the appropriate actions on the Business System
1 In the Main Menu, click Manage Terminals. The system displays the Manage Terminals
window.

2 Click Define Terminal. The system displays the Define Terminal window:
3 In the Define Terminal window, click Add to enable the Terminal Type field.

4 Click Terminal Type. The system displays the Zoom: Terminal Type window:
5 Select the Terminal Type that represents the CableCARD/Host and click Accept.
6 Type in a Unit Address (MMI display), Serial Number, optional Account Number, the
Business System Name, the Downstream Plant Name, and ensure On Plant (filled) is
enabled.
7 Click Accept to add the terminal to the database and enable the Terminal Operation
options.

8 Click Define CableCARD/Host Parameters to display the Define CableCARD/Host

Parameters window:
Terminal ID A unique, system-generated, eight-digit integer between 1 and

16777215. The DAC 6000 uses this number to identify this specific
terminal. One of several fields (Serial Number, Account Number) that
can be used to uniquely select a terminal.

Unit Address A unique, 16-character, decimal value representing the unit address of
the CableCARD used by the DAC 6000 for communication. The
format is nnn-nnnnn-nnnnn-nnn. Required field entry. One of several
fields that can be used to uniquely select a terminal.
Serial Number A unique, twelve-character alphanumeric field for recording the serial
number of the terminal. This number is burned into the terminal
NVRAM during its manufacture. One of several fields that can be
used to uniquely select a terminal.
Account Number Customer account number that is issued by the Business System and
that can be used to uniquely select a terminal. One of several fields
that can be used to uniquely select a terminal.
Host ID A unique identifier for the Host. The first 3 digits identify the Hosts
manufacturer. This value is displayed on the host/television.
Data This is a unique randomly generated value created during the
CableCARD/Host pairing process. This value is a private security data
authenticator utilized by the Motorola Conditional Access System in
performance of the functions specified in the CableCARD Copy
Protection System specification. This value is displayed on the
host/television.
CableCARD ID A unique identifier for the CableCARD. The first 3 digits identify the
CableCARDs manufacturer. This value is displayed on the
host/television.
Override The three radio buttons control the CPMS method of determining what
Host validation message is to be generated.
Valid - CPMS generates a Valid Host validation message
regardless of the contents of its Certificate Revocation List (CRL).
Invalid - CPMS generates a Invalid Host validation message
regardless of the contents of its Certificate Revocation List (CRL).
Dont Care - CPMS determines the correct Host validation
message to generate based upon the contents of its Certificate
Revocation List (CRL).
Validation DAC 6000 interfaces to the CPMS over the headend network and
requests generation of a Host validation message. CPMS responds and
sends the message to the DAC 6000. The DAC 6000 passes it to the
RADD 6000 and then the RADD 6000 passes it to the OM.
Re-Validation Not currently supported.

9 Type in the Host ID (if necessary).

10 Type in the Data value (if necessary).
11 Type in the CableCARD ID (if necessary).
13 Click the appropriate Override button.
14 Click Validate.
15 Click Exit.
Terminal CableCARD/Host Report

A report is available that lists the status of Host validation messages created by the CPMS and
delivered to the DAC 6000 for a CableCARD/Host pairing. To run the report:
1 On the DAC 6000 Main Menu, click Manage Reports to display the Manage Reports
window.
2 Click Define Reports to display the Define Reports window.

3 Click Select to enable the Reports section of the window:
4 Highlight CableCARD/Host Terminals and click Display New.

This report includes information on the status of the last Host validation message received for a
CableCARD/Host pairing.
5 Click File> Exit to return to the Define Reports screen.
6 Click Exit.

Section 11
Manage Operations
Schedule poll operations for terminals
View currently executing operations
Control operations

11-2 Manage Operations
Manage Operations
The Manage Operations menu provides the capability to monitor and control DAC 6000 system
operations, which include: purchase/diagnostic polls, terminal refresh, channel maps, OOB
multiplex, code download, and flush and fill.
Define Operations
The Define Operations window enables you to create new DAC 6000 operations such as
terminal configuration updates (refreshes). It also provides purchase, diagnostic, and
auto-discovery polling capabilities.
1 In the DAC 6000 Main Menu, click Manage Operations.
2 Click Define Operations to display the Define Operations window:

Manage Operations 11-3
Operation Type In the list that follows, the system creates automatically generated
operation types as needed; however, the user can monitor, stop, and
resume them:
User Defined Operations include:
Refresh
Purchase Poll
Diagnostic Poll
Chronic Non-Responding Poll
Category Epoch Transition
Flush and Fill
Fill Only
Resource OCAM
Synchronize CPMS
Automatically Generated Operations include:
Global Auth Refresh
Channel Map
Multiplex
Insert System Time
Code Download
Analog Rekey
Analog Clear Service
PPV Window Auth
CEC EMM Generation
Macrovision
Physical Channel Map
Periodic ERS EMM Generation
Compute DST Interval
CableCARD SNT
CP Phone Number
Device Name The name of the device currently associated with the event (a RADD 6000
or OM 1000). If a RADD 6000 is not chosen (left blank), the operation is
performed on all RADD 6000s.

Type Identifies the event type that is mapped to the operation type.
Operation Name User or system assigned name for the operation type being performed on
the targeted terminals.
Status Status indications are as follows:
New Events that have not been processed due to start_time.
Request Sent Events that have been read and initiated.
Timeout Initiated events that did not get an acknowledgement.
Downloaded Initiated events accepted by the RADD 6000.
Retrieving Status Retrieving event status information from the
RADD 6000.
Deleting Processing a delete request.
Canceling Processing a cancel request.
Pausing Processing a stop request.
Pause Acknowledge Pause request accepted.
Delete Acknowledge Delete request accepted.
Cancel Acknowledge Cancel request accepted.
Device Offline RADD 6000 is offline or lost communication.
Category Key Security is generating the next category key.
Filling Loading the RADD 6000 from a flush and fill or fill-only
request.
Active Event is currently executing.
Build Failed RADD 6000 unable to build a terminal message.
Insert Failed RADD 6000 unable to find insertion stream.
Stopped Event paused.
Unknown Event not found on RADD 6000.
Completed Event successfully completed.
Cancelled Event cancelled.
Deleted Event deleted.
Resuming Resuming a delayed operation.
Marked Completed Events that were active but have now passed
their end time so they are marked completed.
Failed The operation failed.
Delayed A Category Epoch operation is currently active. It will

automatically be resumed after the CEC is complete.

Not Enabled System feature not enabled.
Request Sent Failed Operation manager could not send the event
to the destination task.
Start Date The designated moment the operation type starts in mm/dd/yyyy (mm =
month, dd = day, and yyyy = year) format for the date.
Start Time The designated moment the operation type starts in hh:mm (hh = hour and
mm = minutes) format for the time.
Rate Indicates how often the command set is sent.
3 Click Operation Type to display the Zoom: Operation Type window:
4 Select the Operation Type you want to add and click Accept.
5 Click Add.
6 Enter the appropriate values in the options fields and click Accept to complete the change.

Edit Refresh Operation Window
Operation Type This field indicates the operation selected on the Define Operations
window.
Operation Name Required input - user assigned name for the operation type being
performed on the targeted terminals.
Start Time Required input - the designated moment the operation type starts in
mm/dd/yyyy (mm = month, dd = day, and yyyy = year) format for the
date and hh:mm (hh = hour and mm = minutes) format for the time.
End Time Required input - the designated moment the operation type ends in
Delay Between Wait time in milliseconds before the operation type is performed on the
Terminals next targeted terminal. The minimum value is 250 milliseconds.
(milliseconds)
Repeat Enabled Indicates the operation type is to be repeated as determined by the Every

and (interval) fields.

Every Repeat rate applied to the (interval) field.
(interval) Is the unit interval (for example, days) repeated the number of times
indicated in the Every field.
All Terminals Is mutually exclusive with Terminal Range and Single Terminal. It
indicates the operation type affects all terminals in the selected RADD,
upstream plant, downstream plant, terminal type, RPD channel or
Business System.
Terminal Range Is mutually exclusive with All Terminals and Single Terminal. It
indicates a spread of terminal IDs that are targeted for the operation
type.
Starting ID The beginning terminal ID in the Terminal Range that is to be affected
by the operation type.
Ending ID The last terminal ID in the Terminal Range that is to be affected by the
operation type.
RADD Name The RADD 6000 associated with the selected event. Leaving this field
blank indicates all RADD 6000s.
Single Terminal Is mutually exclusive with All Terminals and Terminal Range. It
indicates only a single terminal, as defined by its ID or serial number, is
targeted for the operation type.
Terminal ID The unique, system-generated, eight-digit integer from 1 through
16777215. The DAC 6000 uses this number to identify a specific digital
terminal.
Serial Number This unique, 12 character alphanumeric field is used to record the serial
number of the digital terminal. This number is burned into the digital
terminal NVRAM during production and is on a barcoded label on the
bottom of the unit. It is one of three fields that you can use to uniquely
select a digital terminal.
Upstream Plant This upstream plant associated to the target terminal(s). Leaving this
Name field blank indicates all upstream plants.
Downstream Plant This downstream plant associated to the target terminal(s). Leaving this
Name field blank indicates all downstream plants.
RPD/Channel/ This is the demod channel associated to the target terminals.
Frequency
BSI Name This is the name of the business system associated to the targeted
terminal(s). Leaving this field blank indicates all business systems.
All Msgs This option causes all operations associated with a terminal refresh to be
performed when you send the refresh.
Time Zone This option sends time zone information to the digital terminal,
including local time, Universal Coordinated Time (UTC), and daylight

saving entry and exit times.

Language This option sends the default language assignment.
Warm Reset Sends a power off command to the terminal.
Output Port This options sends information that sets:
The output port on the digital terminal that is connected to the
subscriber television
The output channel number (typically 3 or 4)
The center frequency of the output channel
The frequency spacing between adjacent channels
The configuration information for an A/B switch
User Interface This option sends:
All parental control enable or disable
The volume mute enable or disable
VCR tuning enable or disable
VCR control through the IR blaster
Last channel enable or disable
Favorite channel enable or disable
TCP (time-controlled programming) enable or disable)
Interactive IR enable or disable
Purchase cancellation enable or disable
User specified language enable or disable
Out-of-Band This option sends configuration information for the out-ofband
Processor processor, including:
The EMM provider name
The network unit address
The multicast-40 address, wildcard enable or disable, and
symbol
The network wildcard enable or disable, and value
Init This option initializes all authorizations for the digital terminal.
Authorizations
Note: May cause a one second loss of video.
Virtual Channel This option configures VCM information in the digital terminal.
Control Channel This option sends information indicating how long the digital terminal
Timeout waits for a signal from the DAC 6000 before timing out.

Refresh This option refreshes all authorizations for the digital terminal.
Authorizations
Connect Message This option sends a connect message to the terminal(s) in the forward
direction.
Inband Processor This option sends in-band processor configuration information including
the:
EMM provider ID
Network unit address
Multicast-40 address
Region This option sends:
The country code
The currency region
The EPG region
The rating region
Interactive This option sends the upstream and downstream ID assignments.
Network (DVB This option sends a DVB Network Configuration message to the
only) terminal.
General This option sends information that sets:
The log port on the digital terminal to enabled or disabled
The code download function to enabled or disabled
The RF bypass capability to enabled or disabled
Purchase authentication to enabled or disabled
Multicast-16 This option sends the multicast-16 values to the digital terminal.
Phone This option sends telco communication information including the:
Line request
Dial-retry limit
Dial-retry spacing
Inactivity timeout
Phone number
Alternative phone number
Baud rate

Data size
Parity configuration
Carrier-detect timeout
Carrier-loss timeout
Note: The entries in the Criteria Panel are optional entries. You must select at least one item
in the Configure Message panel.
Edit Poll Operation Windows
Purchase Poll Operation

Diagnostic Poll Operation
window.
Operation Name Required input - user assigned name for the operation type being
performed on the targeted terminals.
Start Time Required input - the designated moment the operation type starts in
End Time Required input - the designated moment the operation type ends in
date and hh:mm (hh = hour and mm = minutes) format for the time .

Clear All Enabled for a Diagnostic Poll Operation only. Clears previously
Diagnostic collected diagnostic information before executing the new poll.
Information Prior
to Poll
All Terminals Is mutually exclusive with Terminal Range and Single Terminal. It
indicates the operation type affects all terminals in the selected RADD,
upstream plant, downstream plant, terminal type, RPD channel or
Business System.
RADD Name The RADD 6000 associated with the selected event. If a RADD 6000 is
not chosen (left blank), the operation is performed on all RADD 6000s.
Terminal Range Is mutually exclusive with All Terminals and Single Terminal. It
indicates a spread of terminal IDs that are targeted for the operation
type.
Starting ID The beginning terminal ID in the Terminal Range that is to be affected
by the operation type.
Ending ID The last terminal ID in the Terminal Range that is to be affected by the
operation type.
Upstream Plant This upstream plant associated to the target terminal(s). Leaving this
Name field blank indicates all upstream plants.
Single Terminal Is mutually exclusive with All Terminals and Terminal Range. It
indicates only a single terminal, as defined by its ID or serial number, is
targeted for the operation type.
Terminal ID This read-only field is a unique, system-generated, eight-digit integer
from 1 through 16777215. The DAC 6000 uses this number to identify
this specific digital terminal.
Serial Number This unique, 12 character alphanumeric field is used to record the serial
number of the digital terminal. This number is burned into the digital
terminal NVRAM during production and is on a barcoded label on the
bottom of the unit. It is one of three fields that you can use to uniquely
select a digital terminal.
Downstream Plant This downstream plant associated to the target terminal(s). Leaving this
Name field blank indicates all downstream plants.
RPD/Channel/ This is the demod channel associated to the target terminals.
Frequency
BSI Name This is the name of the business system associated to the targeted
terminal(s). Leaving this field blank indicates all business systems.
Router/IP Range This is the Router and IP address range associated to the target
terminals.

Power Level Causes the power level to be increased for all non-responding terminals.
Phone Instructs the RADD 6000 to poll all telco terminals.
Conditional Dial Applies to telco polling as telco terminals will not respond to a poll
request if purchases were not made.
Frequency Search Instructs the RADD 6000 to try all return path frequencies for
non-responding terminals.
Terminal Never Instructs the RADD 6000 to poll all terminals that have never been
Polled polled. This is especially useful for telco terminals, as these installs are
not polled due to the required time. This option can be selected nightly
to poll all installed terminals.
IP-Return Instructs the RADD 6000 to poll all DOCSIS, DSG and Ethernet
terminals.
RF Instructs the RADD 6000 to poll all RF terminals.
Non-Participating Selecting this option instructs the RADD 6000 to poll all telco terminals
that did not respond to the conditional dial poll.
Non-Responding Causes all non-responding terminals to be polled.
Authenticate To improve polling throughput, you can specify that the DAC 6000
Empty Purchase ignore poll report-backs that do not contain purchases (this is the default
setting). You must select this option to authenticate all poll report-back
data.
Priority Indicates priority of the poll.
Diagnostics Type Enabled for a Diagnostic Poll Operation only.
Decryptor Gets credit information.
Inband Carrier Returns status of the inband receiver.
User Processor Returns firmware & applications loaded on the
terminal.

Edit Chronic Non-Responding Tunable

The Manage Tunables selections allow each system to tune certain options according to their
specific environment.
window.
2 Click Manage Tunables to display the Manage Tunables window.
3 On the Manage Tunables window, click Edit Report Tunables to display the Edit Report
Tunables window:
Number of Polls No This field establishes the unsuccessful poll count that will
Response be reported in the Non-Responder (#) Polls Report.
Number of Days No This field establishes how many days of unsuccessful polls
Response will be reported in the Non-Responder (#) Days Report.
Number of Days Chronic This field establishes if a terminal does not respond greater
Non-Responding than this number of days then it is to be classified as a
chronic non-responder.
4 Enter the appropriate values in the options fields and click Accept to complete the change.

Edit Chronic Non-Responding Poll Operation Window
window.
Operation Name User assigned name for the operation type being performed on the
targeted terminals.
Start Time The designated moment the operation type starts in mm/dd/yyyy (mm =
month, dd = day, and yyyy = year) format for the date and hh:mm (hh =
hour and mm = minutes) format for the time.
End Time The designated moment the operation type ends in mm/dd/yyyy (mm =
hour and mm = minutes) format for the time .

Edit Flush and/or Fill Operation Window

A flush and fill operation removes the specified data from the RADD 6000 and reloads the data
to the RADD 6000.
Unless specified by Motorola, a flush and fill should not be performed; a fill only should be
performed.
window.
targeted terminals.
Start Time The designated moment the operation type starts in mm/dd/yyyy (mm =
End Time The designated moment the operation type ends in mm/dd/yyyy (mm =
Device Name The targeted RADD 6000 to be flushed and filled.
Channel Maps Removes and reloads channel map messages and data.
EMM Removes and reloads TERMINAL authentications.
This is a lengthy procedure.
Devices Removes and reloads all upstream and downstream device definitions.
Download Objects Removes and reloads code download objects.
Terminal Removes and reloads terminal configuration definition(s) (i.e. time

Configurations zone, multicast-16 address).

Flush RADD Not currently supported.
Reportback
Flush Poll Results Removes poll data.
Periodics Removes and reloads periodic messages (i.e. system time, VCM, OOB
multiplex).
CableCARD Removes and reloads the Source Name Table for CableCARDs.
Source Names
Poll Requests Removes and reloads all active and pending poll requests.
Terminal Database Removes and reloads terminals.
This is a lengthy procedure.
Configuration Removes and reloads Global Authorization Refresh and any user
Requests defined refresh.
Streams Removes and reloads downstream data stream definition.
Control Operations
The Control Operations window set provides central monitoring for the DAC 6000. This
window set enables you to pause and resume any event, retrieve status for any event, retrieve
statistics for poll and terminal refresh operations, and cancel user defined operations.

2 Click Control Operations to display the Control Operations window:
RADD Name View events for a single RADD 6000. If a RADD 6000 is not chosen
(left blank), the operation is performed on all RADD 6000s.
All (for RADD) View events for all RADD 6000s.
OM Name View events for a single OM 1000.
All (for OM) View events for all OM 1000s.
Start Time Event view window start time.
End Time Event view window end time.

All Statuses View all event statuses.

Active View all active event statuses.
Failed View all failed event statuses.
Complete View all completed event statuses.
All Types View all event types.
Auth Periodics View clear service, analog PPV, and analog rekey events.
Global Auth View Global Authorization Refresh events.
Refresh
Flush & Fill View flush and fill and fill only events.
Category Epoch View Category Epoch Transition events.
Transition
Code Download View code download events.
Database View database events.
Purchase Poll View scheduled purchase polls.
Refresh View user defined terminal refresh events.
Network View VCM, CDT, MMT, and system time events.
Diagnostic Poll View scheduled diagnostic polls.
RADD Reportback Enables viewing a RADD Reportback operation in the Display
Operation Statistics window when the Display Operation Statistics
button is clicked for a selected RADD Reportback configuration type.
Device Name The name of the device currently associated with the operation (a
RADD 6000 or OM 1000). If a RADD 6000 is not chosen (left blank),
the operation is performed on all RADD 6000s.
targeted terminals.
Status Status indications are as follows:
New Events that have not been processed due to start_time.
Request Sent Events that have been read and initiated.
Timeout Initiated events that did not get an acknowledgement.
Downloaded Initiated events accepted by the RADD 6000.
Retrieving Status Retrieving event status information from the
RADD 6000.
Deleting Processing a delete request.
Canceling Processing a cancel request.

Pausing Processing a stop request.

Pause Acknowledge Pause request accepted.
Delete Acknowledge Delete request accepted.
Cancel Acknowledge Cancel request accepted.
Device Offline RADD 6000 is offline or lost communication.
Category Key Security is generating the next category key.
Filling Loading the RADD 6000 from a flush and fill or
fill-only request.
Active Event is currently executing.
Build Failed RADD 6000 unable to build a terminal message.
Insert Failed RADD 6000 unable to find insertion stream.
Stopped Event paused.
Unknown Event not found on RADD 6000.
Completed Event successfully completed.
Cancelled Event cancelled.
Deleted Event deleted.
Resuming Resuming a delayed operation.
Marked Completed Events that were active but have now
passed their end time so they are marked completed.
Failed The operation failed.
Delayed A Category Epoch operation is currently active. It
will automatically be resumed after the CEC is complete.
Not Enabled System feature not enabled.
Request Sent Failed Operation manager could not send the
event to the destination task.
RADD Connected Indicates the DAC 6000 and RADD 6000 currently have a connection.
Start Time The designated moment the operation type starts in hh:mm (hh = hour
and mm = minutes) format for the time.
End Date The designated moment the operation type stops in mm/dd/yyyy (mm =
End Time (scrolled The designated moment the operation type stops in hh:mm (hh = hour
right) and mm = minutes) format for the time.

Actual Send Date The date when the event was actually sent to the destination (for
example, RADD 6000) so that it can already be there to be initiated on
the scheduled Start Date.
Actual Send Time The time when the event was actually sent to the destination (for
example, RADD 6000) so that it can already be there to be initiated on
the scheduled Start Time.
Actual Complete The date when the event was actually finished, which may occur sooner
Date than the scheduled End Date.
Actual Complete The time when the event was actually finished, which may occur sooner
Time than the scheduled End Time.
Cancel Operation Cancels selected event.
Pause Operation Stops selected event.
Resume Operation Restarts selected event.
Retrieve Operation Retrieves latest event status.
Status
Refresh Display Repaints screen with latest data.
Display Detail Shows lower level event breakout.
Operations
Display Operation Used for Refresh, Global Auth Refresh, and Poll operations to view
Statistics terminal statistics.
Retry Operation Causes an event to be restarted; should only be used when an event
fails.
3 Click Select and highlight the Operation you want to control.

4 Click Cancel, Pause, Resume or Retry Operation.
5 Click Exit.
Display Detail Operations Window

This window shows the individual status of all step operations, as well as each individual
RADD 6000 if all RADD 6000s were chosen.

2 Click Control Operations to display the Control Operations window.

3 Click Select and highlight the Operation for which you want to view details.
4 Click Display Detail Operations.

Device Name The name of the device currently associated with the operation (a
RADD 6000 or OM 1000).
Operation Name User or system assigned name for the operation type.
Status Identifies the status of each Detail Operation. The possible statuses are
described in Control Operations Window Fields.
Start Time The designated moment the operation type starts in hh:mm (hh = hour
and mm = minutes) format for the time.
Rate (scrolled Indicates how often the command set is sent.
right)
5 Click Exit to return to the Control Operations window.

Display Operation Statistics Window (Refresh or Global Auth Refresh)

This window displays terminal statistics for the operation indicated in the Operation Name
field.

3 Click Select and highlight the Operation for which you want to view statistics.

4 Click Display Operation Statistics. The Display Operation Statistics window is displayed:
Terminals Number of terminals commanded to perform the operation.
Commanded
Terminals Number of terminals that successfully performed the operation.
Succeeded
Terminals Failed Number of terminals that failed to perform the operation.
Refresh Screen Repaints window fields.
5 Click Exit to return to the Control Operations window.

Display Operation Statistics Window (Poll)

This window displays terminal statistics for a Poll operation.

3 Click Select and highlight the Operation for which you want to view statistics.
4 Click Display Operation Statistics. The Display Poll Statistics window is displayed:

RADD Name Displays the name of the RADD executing the operation.
RF Terminals Polled Number of RF return terminals polled.
Non-Responding RF Number of RF return terminals that did not respond to the poll
Terminals operation.
Number Number of telco return terminals commanded to dial in.
Commanded to Dial
Number of Calls Number of telco return terminals that successfully dialed in.
Received
IP-Return Terminals Number of DOCSIS, DSG and Ethernet return terminals polled.
Polled
Non-Responding IP- Number of DOCSIS, DSG and Ethernet return terminals that
Return Terminals did not respond to the poll operation.
Refresh Screen Repaints window fields.

Learning Exercise 11
1 The Define Operations window is where you go to schedule a poll operation.

2 An example of a user definable operation is a Global Auth Refresh.
3 An example of an automatically generated operation is a Channel Map.
4 In the Control Operations window you can cancel an active operation.
5 In the Edit Refresh Operation window the Operation Name field is optional.
6 A User Processor Diagnostic Poll Type gets credit information.
7 In the Edit Poll Operation window, to define a power leveling poll of
non-responders select the Power Level and Non-Responding attributes.
8 Use the Edit Flush and Fill Operation window to remove and reload all active
and pending poll requests to a RADD 6000.
9 The Chronic Non-Responding Poll Operation is always set to poll terminals that
havent responded to poll operations for the last 30 days.
10 In the Control Operations window you can retrieve the latest event status.

Define Operations Purchase Poll

Define a purchase poll on the DAC.
1 From the Main Menu, click Manage Operations.
2 Click Define Operations.
3 Click Operation Type.
4 Highlight Purchase Poll and click Accept.
5 Click Add.
6 Type Purchase Poll Thursday in the Operation Name field.
7 Type 23:00 in the Start Time field.
8 Change the End Time year to 2007.
9 Click Repeat Enabled and type a 7 in the Days field.
10 Under Criteria, assure that the diamond next to All Terminals is darkened (selected).
11 Click Accept.
Define Operations Diagnostic Poll

Define a diagnostic poll on the DAC.
2 Click Define Operations.
3 Click Operation Type.
4 Highlight Diagnostic Poll and click Accept.
5 Click Add.
6 Type Diagnostic Poll in the Operation Name field.
7 Change the End Time by adding 15 minutes to the current display.
8 Click Clear All Diagnostic Information Prior to Poll.
9 Under Criteria, click the diamond next to Single Terminal.
10 Type the Terminal ID of the DCT2500 that is on your system in the Terminal ID field.
11 Choose User Processor from the Diagnostics Type drop-down menu.
12 Click Accept.

Control Operations Purchase Poll & Diagnostic Poll

Check the status of the two polls you just built.
2 Click Control Operations.
3 Click All Types (to deselect).
4 Click Purchase Poll and Diagnostic Poll.
5 Click Accept.
6 View the Status of the two polls you defined.
Manage Reports Terminal Code Object

Check the results of the diagnostic poll by running a report.
1 From the Main Menu, click Manage Reports.
2 Click Define Reports.
3 Click Select.
4 Scroll down and highlight Terminal Code Objects.
5 Click Display New.
6 Compare the results to the DCT diagnostic.
DCT App Code Modules Diagnostic

Compare the report results to the DCT diagnostic information.
1 From a powered-up state and using the front panel buttons, press Power then Select..
2 Cursor down to the D10 App Code Modules menu selection.
3 Right arrow into the diagnostic.
4 Compare the results to the diagnostic report.

Lab Exercise 11
Define Operations Purchase Poll

1 Define a purchase poll on the DAC using the following information:
Operation Type = Purchase Poll
Operation Name = Purchase Poll - Thursday
Start Time = 23:00
End Time (year) = 2007
Repeat Enabled = Yes
Repeat Rate = Every 7th Day
Criteria = All Terminals
Define Operations Diagnostic Poll

1 Define a diagnostic poll on the DAC using the following information:
Operation Type = Diagnostic Poll
Operation Name = Diagnostic Poll
End Time = current time plus 15 minutes
Terminal Diagnostic Report Control = Clear All Diagnostic Information Prior To
Poll (select)
Criteria = Single Terminal
Terminal ID = your systems DCT2500
Diagnostics Type = User Processor
Control Operations Purchase Poll & Diagnostic Poll

Check the status of the two polls you just built.
Manage Reports Terminal Code Object

Check the results of the diagnostic poll by running a report.
Report Type = Terminal Code Object
DCT App Code Modules Diagnostic

Compare the report results to the DCT diagnostic information
Diagnostic Type = D10 App Code Modules

Section 12
Downloading Overview
List the steps involved in downloading an object
Build a service to support a download
Load objects onto the DAC and then download them to the RADD
Define code suites
Build software object assignments
Monitor the download process

12-2 Downloading Overview
Downloading Overview
The downloading function allows an MSO to deliver, upgrade/update software and applications
to terminals remotely or locally. When an MSO receives Motorola Core terminals, they will
have firmware (also referred to as base platform) resident either in Read Only Memory (ROM)
or Flash. That firmware can be upgraded to be the latest release offered by Motorola. To
upgrade a Core terminals firmware you execute what is known as a download.
When an MSO receives Motorola Advanced terminals, they will not always have firmware
resident in memory. They have Bootloader code which will allow the terminals to have
firmware (base platform) code downloaded to them.
In a local control environment, the RADD 6000, together with the DAC 6000, enables you to:
Download executable code objects to terminals.
Maintain control over how data is distributed and processed by terminals.
Components of a Download Data Stream

A download stream contains one or more of the following components:
Download Control Messages instructing the DCT how to process a downloaded object.
Object Modules containing the downloadable code or data objects. An object module may
be executable applications, application data, or firmware updates.
Download Control Messages

The following control messages can be sent to a DCT for an object:
Enable Start the specified code object. The DCT runs only one version of an object at a
time. If another version of the object is already enabled, the DCT disables the
current version before it starts a newly requested version of the object.
Disable Stop the specified code object and prevent it from being restarted except in
response to an enable control message.
Purge Remove all versions of an object from the DCT except the specified version.
Delete Delete the specified code object from the terminals memory.
The DAC 6000 controls the distribution of the following download control messages which are
in the Entitlement Management Message (EMM) data stream.
Conditional Instructs the Core terminals to tune to the specified channel to receive the
Tune Download download stream if the terminals have not already acquired the specified
Channel object.

Downloading Overview 12-3
Advanced Instructs Advanced or Core terminals to tune to the specified channel to

Set-Top Box receive the download stream if the terminals have not already acquired the
(ASTB) Tune specified object.
Download
Bootcode Instructs the Advanced terminals bootloader to download the base
Control platform. This message is a broadcast download control message.
Object Modules for Core Terminals

Normally, a downloadable object developed for the Core terminals consists of two files
supplied on an MS-DOS formatted floppy disk or a CD. The two files are:
Object File Contains the code/data to be downloaded. The object files are files
containing the terminal executable code objects. Each object file has an
associated data description file. The object file has a .obj filename
extension.
Data Contains the descriptive information about the object to enable the DLS to
Description File create the download data stream. The specific contents of this file vary
according to the type of the object. The file name has an extension .dat.
The information contained in the files includes:
Object name
Application id and version
Object type (code or data)
Object version
Object classification (basic platform, application, or loader)
Where to load
Object size
svar size
Constructor offset
Destructor offset
Text description of the object
Object Modules for Advanced Terminals

Normally, a downloadable object developed for the Advanced terminals consists of three or
four files supplied on a CD ROM. The four files are:
Object File Contains the code/data to be downloaded. The object files are files
containing the DCT executable code objects. Each object file has an
associated data description file. The object file has a .obj filename
extension.

Data Contains the descriptive information about the object to enable the DLS to
Description File create the download data stream. The specific contents of this file vary
according to the type of the object. The file name has an extension .dat.
The information contained in the files includes:
Object name
Application id and version
Object type (code or data)
Object version
Object classification (basic platform, application, or loader)
Where to load
Object size
svar size
Constructor offset
Destructor offset
Text description of the object
Object ID
Relocatable Button
Absolute Address
Permission These two files describe the permissions needed by a terminal to use a
Files specific software object. The one file name has an extension .oca. The
other file name has an extension of .ecd.
Note: These items are referred to as the objects attributes
Object Attributes
The Object Attributes describe certain information that is specific to that object. An example is
where to store the object on the terminal (i.e. Non-volatile Memory [NVM]). In some instances
this information is used by the DAC/RADD to build a control message.
The Advanced terminals have some added object attributes. They are:
Object ID
Relocatable
Absolute Address
When loading a software object onto the DAC 6000 in the Load Software Object window, the
attributes contained in the objects .dat file will be loaded into the DAC 6000s database.
These attributes can be viewed or changed on the DAC. They are located on a sub-window
accessed from the Define Software Object window called Edit Attributes.

Methods of Targeting Terminals for Downloads
Decoder Conditional
A decoder conditional is one mechanism that can be used to target downloads to a specific
terminal population. Code download messages may be addressed to specific sets of terminals
through the use of an optional message preamble. The preamble contains an expression
consisting of decoder conditional terms and logical operators. A preamble may be used in
conjunction with any other addressing mode (i.e. broadcast, terminal ID).
The term decoder conditional means if the terminal meets the condition then it should decode
the download stream.
An expression is defined on the DAC 6000 using the Define Decoder Conditional screen and
assigned to a message on the Assign Software Objects Destination panel.
Background Service
To support downloads using the DAC/RADD it will be necessary to configure a special service
referred to as a Background Service. The Define Background Service is a selection in the
Manage Services menu on the DAC 6000. It is called a Background Service since it is not a
service that a subscriber will be able to select and view. It is used as a path for the download.
The path that is currently used for downloads is the Downstream Plants Out-of-Band
frequency. Therefore the device used to do the downloads is an OM 1000.
OM 1000
A method of limiting which terminals receive a download is by configuring the Background
Service for the OM 1000 that services the Downstream Plant that the terminals are on.
Virtual Channel Map

Another method that is used to target a group of terminals for a download is to only add the
Background Service to the VCM that is assigned to the terminals to be downloaded.
Object Modules Types
Base Platform/Firmware
Provides basic video and audio capability. Provides capability to download an Application
(Core set-tops). Motorola develops base platform objects.
Applications
Provides enhanced set-top capabilities such as Electronic/Interactive Program Guide and Video
On Demand. Applications are developed by Independent Software Vendors (ISVs).

Monolithic
Application software is bundled with the Base Platform to form a monolithic object. This type
of object is designed to simplify the download process and minimize the Flash allocation
requirements. Monolithic objects are loaded onto Advanced set-tops.
Code Suite
A code suite provides the capability to perform a single download of a platform object and one
or more application objects and to sequence the loading order. Each object must be defined
and loaded to the RADD first. Then the code suite can be defined and loaded to the RADD.
When defining the code suite the object load order is identified. Base platform is always first
and always must be included in the code suite definition.
Object Assignment Options

The final steps when downloading using the DAC/RADD are establishing the object
assignment and loading the assignment out to the RADD(s). Which Object Assignment to use
will depend upon the set-top family and also the object type. The following are the Object
Assignments that are supported:
Include Object (Core Terminals)

RADD will:
Create code object insertion
Build and insert conditional tune
Build and insert enable control message
Include Delete (Core Terminals)

RADD will:
Build a delete request message for the download PID stream
(This option should be selected when it is necessary to include a delete with an include object.)
Delete Object (Both)

RADD will:
Build a delete control message for EMM stream
Purge Object (Core Terminals)

RADD will:
Build a purge control message for EMM Stream

Include Base Platform (ASTB Terminals)

RADD will:
Build and insert bootcode control message
Include Base Platform Upgrade (ASTB Terminals)

RADD will:
Build and insert ASTB tune download message
Include ASTB Application Data Object (ASTB Terminals)

RADD will:
Include Code Suite (Both)

RADD will:
Create code object insertion(s)
Enable Object (Core Terminals)

RADD will:
Build an enable control message for EMM Stream
Disable Object (Core Terminals)

RADD will:
Build a disable control message for EMM Stream

Steps to Download to Terminals

The following is a list of steps to download an object or objects to terminals using a DAC 6000
/ RADD 6000. This list also highlights the menu selections to get you to the screen to perform
the step.
Steps DAC 6000 Menu Selections
1. Add the Source(s) Manage Services > Define Source > Add
2. Add the Background Service(s) Manage Services > Define Background
Service > Add
3. Add the Background Service(s) to Manage Services > Define Background
the Virtual Channel Map(s) Service > Select > Assign to Virtual
Channel Map > Add
4. Build the Virtual Channel Map(s) Manage Plants > Define Virtual Channel
Map > Select > Build Channel Map
5. Add /Load the Software Object(s) Manage Services > Define Software
Object > Add > Load Software Object
6. Display the Software Object(s) Manage Services > Define Software
Attributes Object > Select > Display Attributes
7. Download the Software Object(s) Manage Services > Define Software
to RADD 6000(s) Object > Select > Download Software
Object
8. Add the Code Suite(s) [if desired] Manage Services > Define Code Suite >
Add
9. Download the Code Suite(s) to the Manage Services > Define Code Suite >
RADD(s) [if required] Select > Download Software Object
10. Define the Decoder Conditional(s) Manage Terminals > Define Decoder
[if required] Conditional > Add
11. Assign the Software Object(s) Manage Services > Assign Software
Object > Assign Type > Add
12. Load the Object Assignment(s) to Manage Services > Assign Software
the RADD 6000(s) Object > Assign Type > Select > Load
Object Assignment

Step 1 Add the Source(s)

Before you can add a service, you must define the source of the service by providing a unique
name, identifier, and type. This identifies each service on a system-wide basis.
window.

2 Click Define Source and the system displays the Define Source window:
Name This 80-character alphanumeric field is the name of the source.

Source Type Indicates that the source is a Service, Application or an IR Blaster.
Click the button to toggle between the choices.
Source ID Numeric identifier of the source. For the TV Guide EPG, the Source
ID needs to be set to Global. If the source is defined as Global (the
Local Definition box is not checked), enter a number between 4097
and 65535. If the source is defined as Local (Local Definition box is
checked), the Source ID is assigned by the system.
Local Definition The Local Definition box defines how the Source ID is established.
Local means the system (DAC 6000) issues one to the source. It starts
with the number one and increments. Global means the operator
enters it in the Source ID field.
Build Source The CableCARD/Host do not provide support of a guide application.
Names The mechanism to provide text identifiers with the services is the

Source Name Table, which is contained in the Network Text Table

message. This operation builds the Source Name Table with the latest
source name list and sends it to the RADD(s).
Status Indicates the Source Name Table is Built, Building or Not Built.
Refresh Screen Repaints screen with latest data.
3 In the Define Source window, click Add.

4 In the Name field, enter the name of the source, such as FW2000.
5 In the Source Type field, click the button to select either Application or IR Blaster.
6 If required, click the Local Definition button to toggle Local on (darkened).
7 The system assigns the Source ID.
8 Click Accept to add the source to the database.
9 Click Cancel then Add to add additional sources or click Exit to exit the window.
Step 2 Add the Background Service(s)

window:

2 Click Define Background Service. The Define Background Service window is displayed:
Source Name This 80 character alphanumeric field identifies the source application

and must match the name entered on the Define Source window.
Service Provider This 80 character alphanumeric field identifies the cable service
Name provider.
The Identification option enables you to select, add, change, or delete
the background service and provider options for the selected service.
The Location option enables you to select, add, change, or delete the
MPEG service number, the queuing state, and queuing device for the
selected service. You must select at least one location for each
background service.
and BSG program handle for this service.
Source & Provider These 80 character alphanumeric fields identify the name of the service
Name and the ID for the service provider. The Source Name must match the
entry for the Name field defined on the Define Source window. The
Provider Name accepts the name of the service provider.
Encryption Mode This field displays Unencrypted.
DVB Service Type N/A
3 Click Add.
4 Click Source & Provider Name to display the Zoom:Source Name window
5 Select the Source Name and then click Accept.
6 Select the Provider Name and then click Accept.
Note : The Encryption Mode is Unencrypted.

7 Click the diamond next to Location to display the Location Table Operation panel.

The Location Table Operation panel displays the following fields:
MPEG Service # This 5-digit numeric field is the MPEG Service # assigned to this
service.
Queuing State This field indicated whether queuing is enabled or disabled for this
service.
Queuing Device This field is the name of the queuing device for this service.
Port (DVB only) This field is the output port on the queuing device.
8 Click Add to display the Edit Digital Service Location window:
9 Type a number in the MPEG Service # field.

10 The Queuing State displays Enable Queuing.
11 Click Queuing Device to display the Zoom: Device Name window, select the OM name.
12 Click Accept. The Edit Digital Service Location window is displayed.
13 Click Accept. The Define Background Service - Location Table Operation panel is
displayed.

Operation panel:

16 Click Business System Name to display the Zoom: Business System Names window.
18 Type a unique, eight-digit integer in the BSG Service Handle field. The range of values is
from 32768 through 16777215 and must be coordinated with the business system. This
handle should not align with a handle that is associated with a broadcast service.
19 Click Accept to display the Define Background Service window.
20 Click the diamond next to Identification to enable Accept.
21 Click Accept.
22 Click Cancel then Add to add additional background services or click Exit to exit the
window.
Step 3 - Add the Background Service(s) to the Virtual

Channel Map(s)
To assign the Background Service(s) to the Virtual Channel Map(s):
1 In the Main Menu, click Manage Service.
2 Click Define Background Service.

3 Click Select.
4 Click Source and Provider Name to display the Zoom: Service and Provider Name
window.
5 Select the Source Name and click Accept.
6 Select the Provider Name and click Accept.

7 Click Assign To Virtual Channel Map to display the Assign To Virtual Channel Map
window:
8 Click Add to display the Edit Assign To VCM window:

9 Click Name to display the Zoom: VCM Name/Status window:
10 Select the VCM and then click Accept to return to the Edit Assign to VCM window.
11 Click Accept to return to the Assign To Virtual Channel Map window.
12 Click Add (to assign the background service to more VCMs) or
13 Click Exit to return to the Define Background Service window.
14 Click Cancel then Select to assign additional background services to VCM(s) or click Exit
to exit the window.
Step 4 - Build the Virtual Channel Map(s)

In order to activate the VCM(s) with the newly added background service(s) and have the latest
VCM(s) sent out to the terminals, you must issue a build command.
To build a VCM:

2 Click Define Virtual Channel Map. The Define Virtual Channel Map window is displayed:
3 Click Select.
4 From the VCM Information panel, highlight the VCM name that you want to build.
6 Click Yes to build the VCM.

7 Click Select (to build other VCM(s)) or Exit until you return to the Main Menu.

Step 5 Add / Load the Software Object(s)

To define a software object:
window.
2 Click Define Software Object to display the Define Software Object window:
Name This field identifies the software object entered or selected.

Version This field identifies the software object numeric release level
designator.
Group This field identifies the assigned group for the software object
(PROS, Standard, Base Platform, or ASTB Application Data) as
described in Group below.

Active Panel The Identification option enables you to select, add, change, or
delete the software object.
The Business Systems option enables you to select, add, change, or
delete the business system and BSG handle for this software object.
Software Object Name The name entered or selected from the Zoom: Object Name
window.
designator. Selecting a name from the Zoom: Object Name window
causes this field to be automatically populated.
Group This field is a drop-down list of possible groups that describe the
software object:
PROS (Permissions, Resource, Object Signatory) Advanced
terminals software objects.
Standard Core terminal software objects.
Base Platform Advanced terminal software object that can be
initially downloaded by the boot code to provide minimal TV
viewing functionality and the ability to download the
Application/Operating System (App/OS). After the App/OS is
resident, the base platform can be version updated under
App/OS control.
IR Blaster - The IR code data stream.
ASTB Application Data An application data object is
designed to load into advanced set-tops that have the base
platform. An example is a separate data object used by a VOD
application that enables the terminal to use VOD services.
File Name (without This field can be used to load an object onto the DAC. This is the
extension) name (excluding the extension) of the object to be loaded.
Insertion Rate The insertion rate in kbps.
Display Attributes Invokes the Display Software Object Attributes window, whereby
information contained in the .dat file associated to the object, must
be loaded into the system to describe the objects attributes.
Load Software Object Enables loading a software object from floppy or CD ROM. Also
there is a selection called loaded which means the required files are
in the download data directory already. Selecting loaded will cause
the information from the .dat file to be populated in the attributes
window.
Download Software Enables you to choose a list of RADD 6000s to which the object is
Object loaded.

3 Click Load Software Object to display the Load Software Object window:
This window display the following fields:

Name This field identifies the software object selected.
designator.
(PROS, Standard, Base Platform, IR Blaster or ASTB Application
Data).
File Name This is the name (excluding the extension) of the object to be
loaded.
Medium This is the type of media from which the object and associated files
are being loaded. The selections are: Floppy, CD ROM or Loaded.
4 Type the object name in the File Name field

5 Select the medium from the Medium drop-down menu.
6 Click Accept.
7 Click Cancel then Select to load additional software objects or click Exit to exit the
window.

Optional Step - Viewing the Objects Loaded onto the DAC 6000
To confirm that the object and .dat files are already loaded or have been loaded by executing
the Load Software Object operation:
4 Type cd /home/acc4000d/dls/data and then press ENTER.
5 Type lc. The system displays all the files and subdirectories within this directory.
6 Check the list to locate the two or four required files. For example if I just executed the
Load Software Object operation and typed 0-8-0754 into the file name field, the two files
that should be listed are 0-8-0754.obj (the object file) and 0-8-0754.dat (the description
file).
Step 6 Display the Software Object(s) Attributes

Note: For Core Terminal objects, the Object Id and Absolute Address fields are not applicable,
as well as the Relocatable radio button. All fields and the Relocatable radio button are
applicable for Advanced Terminal objects.
To display software object attributes:
window.
2 Click Define Software Object to display the Define Software Object window.
3 Click Select to enable Software Object Name.
4 Click Object Name; the Zoom: Object Name window appears.
5 Select a software object on the Zoom: Object Name window and then click Accept.
6 The Software Object Name, Version, and Group fields are updated on the Define Software
Object window.

7 Click Display Attributes to display the Display Software Objects Attributes window:
Name This field identifies the name of the download code object.
Version This field identifies the version of the download code object.
Each version must be represented between the numbers 00 and 99.
(PROS, Standard, Base Platform, IR Blaster or ASTB Application
Data) as it appears on the Define Software Object window.

Class This field provides an enumerated definition of the object code as

follows:
Rsrvd0 Unassigned, not used.
Rsrvd1 Unassigned, not used.
Platform Object The basic DCT code (the base platform for
DCT 5XXX OR DCT 6XXXs; OS extensions, patches, and
basic services for DCT 1000s/1200s/2000s).
Application A program such as the Electronic Program
Guide (EPG) that the platform or App/OS can call outside of
their base suite.
System Object The target operating system (App/OS) for the
DCT 5XXX OR DCT 6XXX.
Managed Object An application that is used by a registered
manager in the DCT 5XXX OR DCT 6XXX (for example, a
PROS object).
Storage (Store) This field specifies the required storage for the download object as
follows:
Vol Volatile memory.
NVM Non-Volatile Memory.
Dont Care Store anywhere.
Flash Flash memory.
Type It identifies the object type as executable code or data.
Image This is the image file name associated with the object and is
usually the same as the .dat file name.
Application Id It identifies the application associated with the object. This value
is zero for code objects not associated with applications. Also,
multiple code objects can be associated with a single application.
Application Version This value reflects the current version of the application associated
with the object. Upgrades to the application cause this value to
increase.
Size Specifies the objects loadable byte count. It does not include the
size of the static variables required for operation by the code
object.
Svar Specifies the byte count for the static variables required for
operation by the code object. Static variables are non-stack,
non-dynamic, and non-constant.
Constructor Specifies the byte location, relative to the beginning of the code
object, where the objects entry point for activation operations
may be found.

Destructor Specifies the byte location, relative to the beginning of the code
object, where the objects entry point for disable operations may
be found.
Description A text field that describes the object.
Object Id Applicable for the ASTBs only. This field is the decimal value
that represents the 32 bit unique identifier for the object on a
particular system. This value is assigned by the PROS software to
authenticate and authorize code objects.
Absolute Address Applicable for the ASTBs and only when the Relocatable radio
button is not selected (not filled-in). This field is the decimal
value for the 64 bit absolute starting address of the object.
Relocatable Applicable for ASTBs only. If this radio button is selected
(filled-in), it indicates the code object may be relocated within the
terminal. If not active, then the object is linked with an absolute
starting address as indicated in the Absolute Address field.
8 Verify the attributes for the object.

9 Click Exit.
10 Click Cancel then Select to view additional software objects attributes or click Exit to exit
the window.
Step 7 - Download the Software Object(s) to the

RADD 6000(s)
You can download an object to a destination RADD 6000 or delete an object currently
downloaded to a RADD 6000.
window.
4 Click Object Name to display the Zoom: Object Name window.

5 Select a software object on the Zoom: Object Name window and then click Accept.
Object window.
7 Click Download Software Object to display the Download Software Object window:

8 Click Add to display the Edit Download Software Object window:
9 Click All (to deselect) and then click Name to display the Zoom: Device Name window.
10 Select the desired RADD from the Zoom window and click Accept.
11 Click Accept.
12 Click Exit.
13 Click Cancel then Select to download additional software objects to a RADD(s) or click
Exit to exit the window.
Optional Step - Display Object Load Status

DAC 6000 system that have been downloaded to each RADD 6000.
To display the object status for a RADD:

2 Click Define RADD to display the Define window window:

6 Click Accept.

7 Click Display Object Load Status. The Display Object Load Status window is displayed:
RADD Name Nine-character name of the RADD 6000 device.

Object Name The name assigned to the object.
Object Version The version number of the code object.
Object Group Type of code object (for example, Base Platform, Standard, etc.)
Load Status Indicates if the object has been downloaded to the RADD 6000
(Complete or In Progress).
Refresh Screen Repaints the window with updated information.
8 The Status should eventually be Complete. If it never changes from In Progress to

Complete then the object is not loaded onto the RADD and then cannot be downloaded to
the terminals. Click Exit until you return to the Main Menu.
Step 8 Add the Code Suite(s) [if desired]

The core code suite is applicable to the core terminals (i.e. DCT1700/1800/2000/2500) while
the advanced code suite is applicable to the advanced terminals (i.e. DCT6412). It provides the
capability to perform a single download of a platform object and one or more application
objects. Each object must be defined, as well as the core code suite itself.
To define a code suite and download it to the RADD 6000(s):
window.

2 Click Define Code Suite to display the Define Code Suite window:
3 In the Define Code Suite window, click Add.

4 In the Code Suite Name field, type a name for the code suite (for example, CCS1).
5 In the Version field, type the version in nn.nn format (for example, 01.00).
6 In the Group drop-down list, select Core or Advanced Code Suite.
7 Click the diamond next to Business Systems.


8 Click Add to display the Edit Resource/Software Object Business System window:
9 Click Business System Name to display the Zoom: Business System Names window.
10 Select a Business System and click Accept.
11 On the Edit Resource/Software Object Business System window, enter a value in the BSG
Service Handle field and click Accept to return to the Define Code Suite window. The
business system name and BSG Handle appear in the Table Operation panel.
12 Click the diamond next to Identification and then click Accept.


13 In the Define Code Suite window, click Define Components to display the Define Code
Suite Components window:
14 Click Add to display the Edit Code Suite Component window:

16 Select the firmware object (for example, 0-8-0754) and click Accept.
18 Select the firmwares background service (for example, FW2000) and click Accept.
19 In the Edit Code Suite Component window, click Accept.
20 Click Add to display the Edit Code Suite Component window.
22 Select the first application object to be loaded (for example, tvguide_) and click Accept.

24 Select the applications background service (for example, TV1522) and click Accept.

26 In the Define Code Suite Components window, click Exit.
27 Click Cancel then Add to add additional core code suites or click Exit to exit the window.
Step 9 Download the Code Suite(s) to the RADD(s) [if

required]
To download a code suite to a RADD 6000(s):
window.
2 Click Define Code Suite to display the Define Code Suite window.
3 Click Select.
4 Click Code Suite Name to display the Zoom: Code Suite window.
5 Select the Code Suite to be downloaded (for example, CCS1) and click Accept.
6 Click Accept.


7 In the Define Code Suite window, click Download Software Object to display the
Download Software Object window:
8 In the Download Software Object window, click Add to display the Edit Download
Software Object window:

9 Click the All button (to deselect) and click Name to display the Zoom: Device Name
window.
11 Click Accept.
12 Click Refresh Screen the Object Status should be Complete to indicate the code suite has
been downloaded to the RADD 6000(s).
13 Click Exit.
14 Click Cancel then Select to download additional core code suite to a RADD(s) or click
Exit to exit the window.
Step 10 - Define the Decoder Conditional(s) [if required]

You can enable DCTs to receive and process downloaded applications and data. The
DAC 6000 enables you to create or remove associations between specific terminal types and
the objects defined as downloadable. The association between a set of terminals and a
downloadable object is referred to as conditional tuning. For example, this association enables
you to specify the groups of terminals that are to receive and copy updated files to their
databases.
Define Decoder Conditional

You can address sets of downloadable code to specific sets of digital terminals. A set of
predefined expressions are provided that you can use to perform specific downloads. You can
select existing strings, add new strings, and delete strings on the Define Decoder Conditional
window.

To define decoder conditional information:

1 In the DAC 6000 Main Menu, click Manage Terminals to display the Manage Terminals
window:
2 In the Manage Terminals window, click Define Decoder Conditional to display the Define
Decoder Conditional menu.

Name Name of the decoder conditional (i.e. QUOD_ROM).

Expression String command that defines the population for the Conditional Tune. An
example of an expression for a DCT1000 QUOD is: (rom_id(4)).
3 Click Add on the Define Decoder Conditional window to enable Name.

4 Type a name for the new expression in the Name field.
5 Type the expression in the Expression field.
6 Click Accept to add the new expression to the database.
7 Click Cancel then Add to add additional decoder conditionals or click Exit to exit the
window.
Step 11 - Assign the Software Object(s)

To assign a software object:
window.

2 Click Assign Software Object to display the Assign Software Object window:
Assign Type This field is the type of object assignment. Valid selections are as
follows:
Include Object
Delete Object
Include Base Platform
Include Base Platform Upgrade
Purge Object
Include ASTB Application Data Object
Include Code Suite
Enable Object
Disable Object
Description This 28 character alphanumeric field describes the object.
Object Name This eight-character alphanumeric field is the name of the object.
Version This field is the version number of the object. The format is xx.yy,
where xx is the major version and yy is the minor version.
Group This field identifies the assigned group for the software object (PROS,
Standard, Base Platform, IR Blaster or Native Suite).

Service Name This 80 character alphanumeric field identifies the name of the
background service.
Start Date This field is the date the download starts. The date is comprised of two
two-digit integer fields and a four-digit integer field using the format
mm/dd/yyyy, where mm is the month, dd is the day, and yyyy is the year
(for example, 01/05/2000).
Start Time This field is the time the download starts. The time is comprised of two
two-digit integer fields using the format hh:mm, where hh is the hour
from 0 (zero) through 23, and mm is the minute from 0 (zero) through
59 (for example, 06:05).
Stop Date This field is the date the download ends. The date is comprised of two
(for example, 01/05/2000).
Stop Time This field is the time the download ends. The time is comprised of two
Object Assignment Same as Assign Type above.
Type

3 Click Assign Type to display the Zoom: Assign Type window.

4 Select an Assign type and then click Accept.
5 Click Add to display the Edit Assign Software Object window:
follows:
Include Object
Delete Object
Purge Object
Include Core Suite
Enable Object
Disable Object

Standard, Base Platform, or Native Suite).
Active Panel The Identification option enables you to add the object, associated
Options source, platform ID and schedule for the software object.
The Destination option enables you to specify the object destination of a
single terminal or broadcast.
The Include delete option enables you to delete objects out of the
terminals.
follows:
Include Object
Delete Object
Purge Object
Include Core Suite
Enable Object
Disable Object
Standard, Base Platform, IR Blaster or ASTB Application Data).
Source & Provider These 80 character alphanumeric fields identify the name of the service
Name and the ID for the service provider. The Source Name must match the
entry for Name field defined on the Define Source window. The
Provider Name accepts the name of the service provider.
Assignment This alphanumeric 28 character field describes the object assignment.
Description
Platform Id The type identifier burned into the terminal ROM. The Platform ID is
used for the boot code control message.
Auto Enable When active, it indicates the entire native suite is enabled immediately

after it is downloaded.
Auto Purge When active, it indicates the existing native suite must be purged after
the new native suite is downloaded.
Start Date & Time This field is the date and time that the download starts. The date is
comprised of two two-digit integer fields and a four-digit integer field
using the format mm/dd/yyyy, where mm is the month, dd is the day, and
yyyy is the year (for example, 01/05/2000). The time is comprised of
two two-digit integer fields using the format hh:mm, where hh is the
hour from 0 (zero) through 23, and mm is the minute from 0 (zero)
Stop Date & Time This field is the date and time that the download ends. The date is
Enable Timeouts This flag enables/disables the Object Enable and Segment Zero
timeouts. When Enable Timeouts is active (filled), the timeouts are
enabled.
Object Enable This field specifies how long the digital terminal waits for the download
Timeout (Minutes) to complete. The digital terminal tries to acquire and enable the object
for the specified number of minutes before it times out.
Segment Zero This field specifies the number of minutes the digital terminal waits for
Timeout (Minutes) the zero segment of the download object. The digital terminal waits this
long after tuning the download channel to acquire the first segment of
the download object being acquired. If it does not receive it in the
specified number of seconds, it times out. This parameter limits the time
that a digital terminal tries to tune an object that does not exist.
Core Suite Timeout This flag enables/disables the Core Timeout.
Core Timeout This field specifies the number of minutes the digital terminal waits for
(Minutes) the core suite download to complete.


7 Select the Object Name and then click Accept.
8 Click Source & Provider Name to display the Zoom: Service Name.
9 Select the Service & Provider Name and then click Accept.
10 Type in a Description, Start Date & Time and Stop Date & Time. Select Auto Enable and
Auto Purge as applicable. Type in the Platform ID if loading platform code to ASTBs.
Select timeouts if applicable and enter the timeout value(s).
11 Click the diamond next to Destination to display the Destination Panel.
This window includes the following fields and options:

Addressing Addressing schemes are:
Broadcast - Sends download objects and control messages to all
digital terminals.
Terminal Index - Sends download objects and control messages to a
specific digital terminal.
Terminal ID This field is a unique, system-generated, eight-digit integer from 1
through 16777215. The DAC 6000 uses this number to identify a
specific digital terminal. It is one of three fields that you can use to
uniquely select a digital terminal.

Name This 80 character alphanumeric field is the name associated with this
conditional expression.
Expression This is the conditional expression that is executed by the DAC 6000 for
this object. Expressions are sets of predefined commands in the
DAC 6000 that you can use to perform downloads.
Enabled When active (filled), this flag enables the decoder conditional
expression.
12 From the Addressing pull-down menu, select Broadcast or Terminal Index.

13 Type in a Terminal ID if Terminal Index was selected from the Addressing pull-down
menu.
14 Click Enable to activate a decoder conditional and then click Name to display the Zoom:
Decoder Conditional window. Select a decoder conditional and then click Accept.
15 Click the diamond next to Include Delete if you want to target an object or objects to be
deleted during this load. The Include Delete Table Operation window is displayed.
This window includes the following fields and options:


16 Click Add to display the Edit Include Delete window:
17 Click Object/Resource Name to display the Zoom: Object Name window.

18 Select the Object Name and then click Accept.
19 Click Accept.
21 Click Cancel then Add to add additional assignments or click Exit to exit the window.
Step 12 - Load the Object Assignment(s) to the

RADD 6000(s)
To load the object assignment out to the RADD:
window.
2 Click Assign Software Object to display the Assign Software Object window.

4 Select an Assign Type and then click Accept.

5 Click Select and highlight the Object Assignment to be loaded.
6 Click Load Object Assignment. A confirmation window is displayed:
7 Click Yes.
8 Click Cancel then Select to load additional assignments or click Exit to exit the window.
Methods to Check, Monitor and Control a Download

To view the object load status:
window.

5 Click Select and highlight the object.
6 Click Display Object Load Status to view the status of the object load.

RADD Name This field identifies the RADD to which the object has been loaded.
Object Version This field is the version number of the object. The format is xx.yy,

Object Group This field identifies the assigned group for the software object (PROS,
Load Status This field shows the current status of the software object load to the
RADD. Statuses include In Progress and Complete.
7 Click Refresh Screen to update the status information being displayed.
Display Detail Assignment

To view the detailed assignment information:
window.
5 Click Select and highlight the object.

6 Click Display Detail Assignment. The Display Detailed Assignments is displayed:

RADD Device This field identifies the RADD to which the object is being or has been
loaded.
Detailed This field lists each assignment element for the selected object.
Assignment Type Examples include: code tune download, object enable and code object
insertion.
Status This field shows the current status of the detailed assignment types load
to the RADD. Statuses include In Progress and Complete.

Control Operations
To monitor and/or control the downloads:
3 In the Type Filter panel, click All Types (to deselect) and then click Code Download.
4 Click Accept.
5 Click Select and then highlight the desired download.
6 Click Display Detail Operations to see the details.
7 Click Exit.
8 Or click Cancel Operation, Pause Operation, Resume Operation or Retry Operation to
control the download.
9 Click Exit.

DCT 2500 Download Lab

Step 1 - Add the Sources
Add a source to the database for the 2.46 firmware for the DCT 2500s:
3 Click Add.
4 Type FW2500 in the Source Name field.
5 Select Application from the Source Type pull-down menu.
6 Enable the Local Definition check box.
Add a source to the database for the 72.25 TV Guide application:

3 Click Add.
4 Type TVGUIDE in the Source Name field.
Step 2 - Add Background Services

Add the background service for the 2.46 firmware to the database:
2 In the Manage Services window, click Define Background Service.
3 Click Add.
5 Highlight FW2500 from the Zoom window, click Accept.
8 Click Add.
9 Type 10 in the MPEG service number field.


12 Highlight om001, click Accept.
13 Click Accept.
15 Click Add.
19 Click Accept.
21 Click Accept.
Add the background service for the TV Guide application to the database:
3 Click Add.
5 Highlight TVGUIDE from the Zoom window, click Accept.
8 Click Add.
13 Click Accept.
15 Click Add.

19 Click Accept.
21 Click Accept.
Step 3 - Add the Background Services to the Virtual Channel Map

Add the background service for the 2.46 firmware to the virtual channel map:
3 Click Select.
5 Highlight FW2500 from the Zoom window, click Accept.
6 Click Accept.
7 Click Assign To Virtual Channel Map.
8 Click Add to display the Edit Assign To VCM window.
9 Click Name to display the Zoom: VCM Name/Status window.
10 Highlight MOT1 and click Accept.
Add the background service for the TV Guide application to the virtual channel map:
3 Click Select.
5 Highlight TVGUIDE from the Zoom window, click Accept.
6 Click Accept.

Step 4 - Build the Virtual Channel Map

In order to activate the VCM with the newly added background services and have it sent out to
the terminals, you must issue a build command.
To build a VCM:
3 Click Select.
4 From the VCM Information panel, highlight MOT1.
Step 5 Add/Load the Software Objects

Add the firmware software object to the database:
window.
2 Click Define Software Object.
3 Click Add to enable Software Object Name.
4 Click Load Software Object to display the Load Software Object window.
5 Type 00c-0246 in the File name field
6 Select Loaded from the Medium drop-down menu.
7 Click Accept.
8 Click Exit.
9 Click Yes to the Discard changes? pop-up.
Add the TV Guide application software object to the database:

window.
5 Type tvg7225r in the File name field

7 Click Accept.
8 Click Exit.
Step 6 Display the Software Objects Attributes

To verify software object attributes for the 2.46 firmware:
window.
4 Click Software Object Name; the Zoom: Object Name window appears.
5 Highlight 00c-2500 02.46 and then click Accept twice.
Object window.
7 Click Display Attributes to display the Display Software Objects Attributes window.
Object Name : 00c-2500
Version ( Maj./Min. ) : 02.46
Group: Standard
Class : Platform Object
Storage : Flash
Type : Executable
Image: 00c-0246
App ID : 1
App Version : 246
Size : 751648
Svar : 4096
Constructor : 0
Destructor : 0
Description : DCT2500 02.46
To verify software object attributes for the TV Guide application:

window.

5 Highlight Tv_Guide 72.25 and then click Accept twice.
Object window.
Object Name : Tv_Guide
Group: Standard
Class : Application
Storage : NVM
Type : Executable
Image: tvg7225r
App ID : 2010
App Version : 7225
Size : 476996
Svar : 92240
Constructor : 67764
Destructor : 67892
Description : TV Guide Interactive
Version 72.25

Step 7 - Download the Software Objects to the RADD 6000

To download the 2.46 firmware object to the RADD 6000:
window.
5 Highlight 00c-2500 02.46 and then click Accept.
6 Click Accept. The Software Object Name, Version, and Group fields are updated on the
Define Software Object window.
7 Click Download Software Object to display the Download Software Object window.
8 Click Add to display the Edit Download Software Object window.
9 Click the All button (to deselect).
10 Click Name.
11 Highlight radd001 and then click Accept.
12 Click Accept.
To download the TV Guide application object to the RADD 6000:

window.
5 Highlight Tv_Guide 72.25 and then click Accept.
14 Click Name.
11 Click Accept.


DAC 6000 system that have been successfully downloaded to the RADD 6000.
To display the firmware and application object load status on the RADD:
5 Highlight radd001 and click Accept.
6 Click Accept.
7 Click Display Object Load Status. Both objects Load Status should be Complete.
Step 8 Add the Core Code Suite

The core code suite is applicable to the core terminals (i.e. DCT1700/1800/2000/2500). It
provides the capability to perform a single download of a platform object and one or more
application objects. Each object that will be a component of the core code suite must be defined
and downloaded to the RADD or RADDs.
To define a core code suite and download it to the RADD 6000(s):
window.
2 Click Define Code Suite.
3 Click Add.
4 Type CS1 in Code Suite Name field.
5 Type 01.00 in the Version field.
6 Select Core Code Suite from the Group drop-down list.
8 Click Add.
9 Click BSI Name.
10 Highlight Default and click Accept.
11 Type 16777012 in the BSG Service Handle field and click Accept.
13 In the Define Code Suite window, click Define Components.
14 Click Add.

15 Click Object Name.

16 Highlight 00c-2500 02.46 and click Accept.
18 Highlight FW2500 and click Accept.
20 Click Add.
21 Click Object Name.
22 Highlight Tv_Guide 72.25 and click Accept.
24 Highlight TVGUIDE and click Accept.
Step 9 Download the Core Code Suite to the RADD

To download a core code suite to the RADD 6000:
window.
3 Click Select.
4 Click Code Suite Name.
5 Highlight CS1 and click Accept.
6 Click Accept.
7 Click Download Software Object.
8 Click Add.
10 Click Name.
12 Click Accept.

Step 10 - Define the Decoder Conditional

Define the decoder conditional to assure the code suite is loaded only on the DCT 2500s:
window
4 Type DCT2500 in the Name field.
5 Type family_id(12) in the Expression field.
Step 11 - Assign the Software Objects

To assign the Code Suite:
window.
4 Highlight Include Code Suite and then click Accept.
5 Click Add to display the Edit Assign Software Object window.
7 Highlight CS1 and then click Accept.
8 Type CS1 in the Assignment Description field.
9 Type Current Date and Time (MM/DD/YYYY), (HH:MM) in the Start Date & Time fields.
10 Type One Month later than Current Date and Time (MM/DD/YYYY), (HH:MM) in the End
Date & Time fields.
12 From the Addressing pull-down menu, select Terminal Index.
13 In the Terminal ID field, type the ID of the DCT 2500 in the headend.
14 Click Enabled to activate a decoder conditional and then click Name to display the Zoom:
Decoder Conditional window.
15 Highlight DCT2500 and then click Accept.

Step 12 - Load the Object Assignments to the RADD 6000

To load the Code Suite object assignment out to the RADD:
window.
5 Click Select and highlight CS1.
6 Click Load Object Assignment. A confirmation window is displayed.
7 Click Yes.
Check, Monitor and Control the Downloads

To view the object load status of the Code Suite:
window.
5 Click Select and then highlight CS1.
7 Verify the load is In Progress and then Complete

To view the detailed assignment information for the Code Suite:
window.


6 Click Display Detail Assignment.
7 Verify the detail assignments for the object. The Statuses should be Complete.
Control Operations
To monitor the Code Suite download:
4 Click Accept.
5 Click Select and then highlight Download Control for CS1. Click Display Detail
Operations
6 Verify the details for the download. The Status should be Active.

DCT 6412 Download Lab
Step 1 - Add the Sources

Add a source to the database for the 12.31 Thin Client for the DCT 6412s:
3 Click Add.
4 Type TC6412 in the Source Name field.
Add a source to the database for the 73.44 TV Guide application:

3 Click Add.
4 Type TVG6412 in the Source Name field.
Step 2 - Add Background Services

Add the background service for the 12.31 Thin Client to the database:
3 Click Add.
5 Highlight TC6412 from the Zoom window, click Accept.
8 Click Add.


13 Click Accept.
15 Click Accept.
Add the background service for the TV Guide application to the database:
3 Click Add.
5 Highlight TVG6412 from the Zoom window, click Accept.
8 Click Add.
13 Click Accept.
15 Click Accept.
Step 3 - Add the Background Services to the Virtual Channel Map

Add the background service for the 12.31 Thin Client to the virtual channel map:
3 Click Select.

5 Highlight TC6412 from the Zoom window, click Accept.

6 Click Accept.
Add the background service for the TV Guide application to the virtual channel map:
3 Click Select.
5 Highlight TVG6412 from the Zoom window, click Accept.
6 Click Accept.
Step 4 - Build the Virtual Channel Map

In order to activate the VCM with the newly added background service and have it sent out to
the terminals, you must issue a build command.
To build a VCM:
3 Click Select.
4 From the VCM Information panel, highlight MOT1.

Step 5 Add/Load the Software Objects

Add the Thin Client software object to the database:
window.
5 Type tc1231c3 in the File name field
7 Click Accept.
8 Click Exit.
Add the TV Guide application software object to the database:

window.
5 Type tvg7344r in the File name field
7 Click Accept.
8 Click Exit.
Step 6 Display the Software Objects Attributes

To verify software object attributes for the 12.31 Thin Client:

window.
5 Highlight TC_P3_CS and then click Accept twice.
Object window.
Object Name : TC_P3_CS
Group: Base Platform
Class : Platform Object
Storage : Flash
Type : Executable
Image: tc1231c3
App ID : 2199
App Version : 1231
Size : 4084712
Svar : 0
Constructor : 0
Destructor : 0
Description : Thin Client App
Object ID 144113664
Absolute Address 469893140
Relocatable Not Selected
To verify software object attributes for the TV Guide application:

window.
5 Highlight Tv_Guide (Object Version 73.44) and then click Accept twice.

Object window.
Verify the attributes for the object.
Object Name : Tv_Guide
Group: ASTB Application
Data
Class : Application
Storage : NVM
Type : Executable
Image: tvg7344r
App ID : 2010
App Version : 7344
Size : 649024
Svar : 0
Constructor : 0
Destructor : 0
Description : ASTB Relocatable
Application
Object Id -------
Absolute Address 0
Relocatable Not Selected

Step 7 - Download the Software Objects to the RADD 6000

To download the 12.31 Thin Client object to the RADD 6000:
window.
4 Click Software Object Name to display the Zoom: Object Name window.
5 Highlight TC_P3_CS and then click Accept.
10 Click Name.
12 Click Accept.
To download the TV Guide application object to the RADD 6000:

window.
4 Click Software Object Name to display the Zoom: Object Name window.
5 Highlight Tv_Guide (Object Version 73.44) and then click Accept.
10 Click Name.
12 Click Accept.


DAC 6000 system that have been successfully downloaded to the RADD 6000.
To display the Thin Client 73.44 and application tvg7344r object status on the RADD:
6 Click Accept.
7 Click Display Object Load Status. Both objects Load Status should be Complete.
Step 8 Add the Advanced Code Suite

The advanced code suite is applicable to the advanced terminals (i.e. DCT6200/64xx). It
provides the capability to perform a single download of a platform object and one or more
application objects. Each object that will be a component of the advanced code suite must be
defined and downloaded to the RADD or RADDs.
To define a advanced code suite and download it to the RADD 6000(s):
window.
3 Click Add.
4 Type CS6412 in Code Suite Name field.
5 Type 01.00 in the Version field.
6 Select Advanced Code Suite from the Group drop-down list.
8 Click Add.
10 Highlight Default and click Accept.
11 Type 16777105 in the BSG Service Handle field and click Accept.
13 In the Define Code Suite window, click Define Components.
14 Click Add.

15 Click Object/Resource Name.

16 Highlight TC_P3_CS and click Accept.
18 Highlight TC6412 and click Accept.
20 Click Add.
21 Click Object/Resource Name.
22 Highlight Tv_Guide (Object Version 73.44) and click Accept.
24 Highlight TVG6412 and click Accept.
Step 9 Download the Advanced Code Suite to the RADD

To download an advanced code suite to the RADD 6000:
window.
3 Click Select.
4 Click Code Suite Name.
5 Highlight CS6412 and click Accept.
6 Click Accept.
7 Click Download Software Object.
8 Click Add.
10 Click Name.
12 Click Accept.

Step 10 - Define the Decoder Conditional

Define the decoder conditional to assure 12.31 Thin Client is loaded only on the DCT 6412s:
window
4 Type DCT6412 in the Name field.
5 Type rom_id(612) in the Expression field.
Step 11 - Assign the Software Objects

To assign the 12.31 Thin Client object:
window.
4 Highlight Include Base Platform and then click Accept.
7 Highlight TC_P3_CS and then click Accept.
8 Click Source & Provider Name to display the Zoom: Service Name.
9 Highlight TC6412 & Cable Company and then click Accept.
10 Type tc1231c3 in the Description field.
11 Type 612 in the Platform Id field.
13 Type One Month later than Current Date and Time (MM/DD/YYYY), (HH:MM) in the
End Date & Time fields.
15 From the Addressing pull-down menu, select Broadcast.

To assign the Code Suite:

window.
7 Highlight CS6412 and then click Accept.
8 Type CS6412 in the Description field.
10 Type One Month later than Current Date and Time (MM/DD/YYYY), (HH:MM) in the End
Date & Time fields.
12 From the Addressing pull-down menu, select Broadcast.
13 Click Enable to activate a decoder conditional and then click Name to display the Zoom:
Decoder Conditional window.
18 Highlight DCT6412 and then click Accept.
Step 12 - Load the Object Assignments to the RADD 6000

To load the 12.31 Thin Client object assignment out to the RADD:
window.
5 Click Select and highlight tc1231c3.
7 Click Yes.
To load the Code Suite object assignment out to the RADD:

window.
5 Click Select and highlight C6412.
7 Click Yes.
Check, Monitor and Control the Downloads

To view the object load status of the 12.31 Thin Client object:
window.
4 Highlight Include Base Platformt and then click Accept.
5 Click Select and then highlight tc1231c3.
To view the object load status of the Code Suite:

window.
5 Click Select and then highlight CS6412.

To view the detailed assignment information for the 12.31 Thin Client object:
window.
5 Click Select and highlight tc1231c3.
To view the detailed assignment information for the Code Suite:

window.

Control Operations
To monitor the 12.31 Thin Client object download:
4 Click Accept.
5 Click Select and then highlight Download Control for TC_P3_CS. Click Display Detail
Operations
6 Verify the details for the download. The Statuses should be Active.
To monitor the Code Suite download:

4 Click Accept.
5 Click Select and then highlight Download Control for CS6412. Click Display Detail
Operations
6 Verify the details for the download. The Status should be Active.

Section 13
OCAP Overview
List the steps to configure an OCAP common object download on the DAC
List the steps to configure an OCAP application object download on the DAC
Monitor the download process

13-2 OCAP Overview
OCAP Overview
The OpenCable Applications Platform (OCAP) specification is a middleware software layer
specification. The intention of the OCAP specification is that:
The services and applications of interactive televisions be developed so that they run on any
North American cable television system
Services and applications run independent of set-top or television receiver hardware or
operating system software
Manufacturers and retail distributors of set-tops, television receivers and other devices build
and sell capable devices that will support all currently available services delivered by cable
operators to consumer devices via lease from cable operators
The OCAP object download is designed to load firmware and applications to set-tops,
television receivers and other devices that will support all currently available services delivered
by cable operators.
OCAP Server Connectivity
This diagram depicts the loading of firmware and applications to downstream devices (i.e. set-
tops, television receivers).

OCAP Overview 13-3
Application files are broadcast as part of the MPEG-2 transport stream from an object carousel
server called the Digital Storage Media-Command and Control (DSM-CC). The XAIT
(Extended Application Information Table) contains the application signaling information. The
signaling information would inform the receiver that the application exits, when the application
is allowed to run and where everything it needs to run exists. The CVT (Code Version Table)
contains the firmware signaling information.
The DAC configures the CVT and XAIT controls messages sent out by the RADD. The
DAC supports creation and transport of multiple XAIT/CVT messages.
CVT, Code Verification Table, contains information for a Common Download. Each
CVT message contains the download command for a single Common Download object.
XAIT, Extended Application Information Table, contains information for an OCAP
Application Download. A single XAIT message can contain download commands for one or
more applications.
OCAP Downloads
There are two types of OCAP downloads that you can configure on the DAC: common and
application. The OCAP common download applies to the download of OCAP firmware only,
while the OCAP application download is limited to the download of OCAP applications. An
OCAP application download assumes the presence of OCAP firmware.
Steps to Configure a OCAP Common Download on the DAC

1 Define the Common Object on the Define OCAP Object window and add it to the
database.
2 Create an assignment for the common object by selecting "Include Common Download" as
the Assign Type on the Assign OCAP Object window.
3 On the Assign OCAP Object window, click Load OCAP Assignment to start the
download for the common OCAP object.
Steps to Configure an OCAP Application Download on the DAC

1 Define the Application Object on the Define OCAP Object window and add it to the
database.
2 Create a suite of application objects by selecting the Define OCAP Suite window. Add a
name for the grouping, and then enable (fill) the Components radio button.
3 Create an assignment for the suite by selecting "Include Application Download" as the
Assign Type on the Assign OCAP Object window.
4 On the Assign OCAP Object window, click Load OCAP Assignment to start the
download for the common OCAP object.

13-4 OCAP Overview
Add a Common OCAP Object

window:

OCAP Overview 13-5
2 Click Define OCAP Object and the system displays the Define OCAP Object window:
Name This 80-character alphanumeric field is the name of the OCAP object.
Group Indicates that the OCAP object is a Common or Application OCAP
object

13-6 OCAP Overview
3 In the Define OCAP Object window, click Add.

4 In the Name field, enter the name of the OCAP object.
5 Select the group from the Group drop-down menu.
6 Click the diamond next to Common Attributes to display the Host Identification panel:
This panel includes the following fields:
Vendor ID This field identifies the vendor ID assigned to the host that is being
downloaded to.
Hardware Version This field identifies the hardware version of the host that is being
ID downloaded to.
Originator PID The field identifies the PID on which the carousel server is broadcasting
the common object.
Code Filename The field identifies the full path and file name of the OCAP code
download file.
Code Version The field identifies the full path and file name of the code version
Certificate File certificate file for this OCAP code download.

OCAP Overview 13-7
7 Type the hosts vendor ID in the Vendor ID field.

8 Type the hosts hardware version ID in the Hardware Version ID field.
9 Type the PID in the Originator PID field.
10 Type the full path and name of the code file in the Code Filename field.
11 Type the full path and name of the code version certificate file in the Code Version
Certificate File field.
13 Click Accept to add the common OCAP object to the database.
14 Click Exit to exit the window.
Assign the OCAP Object

To assign an OCAP common object:
window.
2 Click Assign OCAP Object to display the Assign OCAP Object window:

13-8 OCAP Overview
Assign Type Valid selections are as follows:

Include Common Download
Include Application Download
Description This 28 character alphanumeric field describes the object.
Group This field identifies the assigned group for the OCAP object (Common
or Application).
Start Date This field is the date the download starts. The date is comprised of two
(for example, 01/05/2000).
Start Time This field is the time the download starts. The time is comprised of two
Stop Date This field is the date the download ends. The date is comprised of two
(for example, 01/05/2000).
Stop Time This field is the time the download ends. The time is comprised of two
Object Assignment Same as Assign Type above.
Type

OCAP Overview 13-9

4 Select Include Common Download and then click Accept.
5 Click Add to display the Edit Assign OCAP Object window:

Group This field identifies the assigned group (Common or Application).
Active Panel The Identification option enables you to add the object, a description
Options and a schedule.
The Preamble option enables you to associate a decoder conditional
with the OCAP download.
The Destination option enables you to specify the frequency,
modulation mode, downstream device, PID and download command.

13-10 OCAP Overview

or Application).
OCAP Suite This field is the name of the OCAP Suite. An OCAP Suite is used to
support OCAP Application downloads.
Description This alphanumeric 28 character field describes the object.

OCAP Overview 13-11

7 Select the object name and then click Accept.
8 Type in a description, start date & time and stop date & time.
9 Click the diamond next to Preamble to display the Preamble Panel:
This panel includes the following fields and options:

decoder conditional expression.
Expression This is the decoder conditional expression that is executed by the
DAC 6000 for this object.
expression.

13-12 OCAP Overview

Tuned Channel This field identifies the assigned tuned channel for the OCAP common
download broadcast.
Frequency This field identifies the assigned frequency for the OCAP common
download broadcast.
Downstream This field identifies the downstream edge device (i.e. OM1000).
Device
PID Number This field identifies the PID value assigned to the OCAP object
broadcast.
Transport This field identifies the modulation (64 or 256 QAM) in use.
Download This field identifies the command being sent in the OCAP common
Command object download. Valid selections are:
Download Now
Deferred Download
Download Now, No Exceptions

OCAP Overview 13-13
12 Click Add to display the Edit Destination window:
13 Click either Tuned Channel or Frequency.

14 Type in either the tuned channel or the actual frequency.
15 Click Downstream Device to display the Zoom: Device Name window.
16 Select the Device Name and then click Accept.
17 Type the PID in the PID Number field.
18 Click the Transport drop-down menu and select QAM-64 or QAM-256.
19 Click the Download Command drop-down menu and select Download Now, Deferred
Download or Download Now, No Exceptions.
20 Click Accept.
Load the OCAP Common Object Assignment to the

RADD 6000(s)
To load the OCAP common object assignment out to the RADD:
window.
2 Click Assign OCAP Object to display the Assign Software Object window.
4 Select Include Common Download and then click Accept.

13-14 OCAP Overview
7 Click Yes.

OCAP Overview 13-15
Control Operations
To monitor and/or control the download:
4 Click Accept.
5 Click Select.

13-16 OCAP Overview
6 Click Exit.
7 Or click Pause Operation, Retrieve Operation Status or Retry Operation to control the
download.
8 Click Exit.

OCAP Overview 13-17
Add an Application OCAP Object

window:

13-18 OCAP Overview
2 Click Define OCAP Object and the system displays the Define OCAP Object window:
Name This 80-character alphanumeric field is the name of the OCAP object.
Group Indicates that the OCAP object is a Common or Application OCAP
object

OCAP Overview 13-19
3 In the Define OCAP Object window, click Add.

4 In the Name field, enter the name of the OCAP object.
5 Select the group from the Group drop-down menu.
6 Click the diamond next to Application Attributes to display the Host Identification panel:
This panel includes the following fields:
Transport Choice This radio button identifies the transport choice of object carousel. The
Object Carousel - source and provider name field identifies the service being used for the
Source/Provider
download. The component tag identifies the component stream inside a
Name
Component Tag service that contains the object carousel
Transport Choice This radio button identifies the transport choice of HTTP. The URL
HTTP - identifies the URL being used for the download.
URL
Auto Select The field identifies if the service shall be automatically selected.

13-20 OCAP Overview
Abstract Service The field is the unique number assigned to identify the abstract service
ID
Abstract Service The field is the unique name assigned to identify the abstract service.
Name
Application This setting controls the state of the application. Valid selections
Control Code include:
AUTOSTART will be started automatically when the receiver
changes to that service. This allows the broadcaster to automatically
start an application associated with the current show (e.g. a news
ticker for CNN).
PRESENT will not be started automatically, but will be added to the
receiver's list of available applications. The user can then choose to
start this application by choosing it from that list. This may be used
on a sports broadcast to indicate that a sports statistics application is
available, but it will only be started if the user chooses to do so.
KILL or DESTROY will be automatically killed by the receiver. For
instance, this could be used at the end of a show to indicate that an
application associated with that show should be killed. The only
difference between these two control codes is that an application
with a control code of KILL will be granted the option to keep
running if the application chooses to. Applications with a control
code of DESTROY will always be killed.
REMOTE. This indicates that the receiver must switch to a different
service in order to start this application.
Organization ID This field is the unique number assigned to identify the terminal
manufacturer.
Application ID This field is the unique number assigned to identify the application.
Privileged This field is the privileged certificate ID. This is used to help
Certificate ID authenticate any applications that want to use functionality reserved for
the monitor application.
Application Name This field is the unique application name. (255 characters maximum)
Application This field includes any command line arguments for the application to
Parameters use.
Base Directory This field identifies the directory that is used as the base directory for
relative path names.
Classpath This field identifies a further extension for the class path where the
Extension classes of the application are searched in addition to the base directory.
Initial Class This field identifies the name of the object in the file system that is the
class implementing the Xlet interface.
Version Number This field identifies the version of the application.

OCAP Overview 13-21
Visibility Valid selections are:

Invisible -The application shall not be visible either to applications
or to users via a navigator with the exception of any error reporting.
System Only - The application shall not be visible to users but shall
be visible to applications via an application listing API.
Visible - The application shall be visible to users and visible to
applications via an application listing API.
Priority This field establishes application priority when there is more than one
application with the same application ID. A larger integer value
indicates a higher priority.
Storage Priority This field indicates application storage priority. Applications are stored
in the order of their storage priority (highest first). Valid priorities are:
0 Application is not to be stored
1-10 Reserved
11-255 Application stored according to the specified priority and
subject to available storage constraints
Launch Order This field indicates the order of applications with the same application
identification and priority. Only the application with the highest launch
order is entered in the Application Database.
Registered API These fields are the registered API names that the application is
Names - requesting access to.
Name1
Name2
Name3
Name4
7 Toggle to the desired Transport Choice.

8 Type in and choose all the appropriate information for the application object that is being
added.
10 Click Accept to add the application OCAP object to the database.

13-22 OCAP Overview
Add the OCAP Suite

To define an OCAP suite:
window.
2 Click Define OCAP Suite to display the Define OCAP Suite window:

OCAP Overview 13-23
3 In the Define OCAP Suite window, click Add.

4 In the OCAP Suite Name field, type a name for the suite (for example, OCAP Suite 1).
5 Click the diamond next to Components.

13-24 OCAP Overview
6 Click Add to display the Edit OCAP Suite Component window:
7 Click Name to display the Zoom: OCAP Object Name window.

8 Select an OCAP object and click Accept.
9 Repeat 6 to 9 to add other applications to the suite.
Assign the OCAP Object

To assign an OCAP application object:
window.
2 Click Assign OCAP Object to display the Assign OCAP Object window.
4 Select Include Application Download and then click Accept.

OCAP Overview 13-25
5 Click Add to display the Edit Assign OCAP Object window:

Group This field identifies the assigned group (Common or Suite).
Active Panel The Identification option enables you to add the object, a description
Options and a schedule.
The Preamble option enables you to associate a decoder conditional
with the OCAP download.
The Destination option enables you to specify the frequency,
modulation mode, downstream device, PID and download command.

13-26 OCAP Overview
or Suite).
OCAP Suite This field is the name of the OCAP Suite. An OCAP Suite is used to
support OCAP Application downloads.
Description This alphanumeric 28 character field describes the object.
5 Click OCAP Suite to display the Zoom: OCAP Suite Name window.
6 Select the OCAP suite name and then click Accept.
7 Type in a description, start date & time and stop date & time.
8 Click the diamond next to Preamble to display the Preamble Panel.

OCAP Overview 13-27

decoder conditional expression.
Expression This is the decoder conditional expression that is executed by the
DAC 6000 for this object.
expression.

13-28 OCAP Overview

Tuned Channel This field identifies the assigned tuned channel for the OCAP common
download broadcast.
Frequency This field identifies the assigned frequency for the OCAP common
download broadcast.
Downstream This field identifies the downstream edge device (i.e. OM1000).
Device
PID Number This field identifies the PID value assigned to the OCAP object
broadcast.
Transport This field identifies the modulation (64 or 256 QAM) in use.
Download This field identifies the command being sent in the OCAP common
Command object download. Valid selections are:
Download Now
Deferred Download
Download Now, No Exceptions

OCAP Overview 13-29
11 Click Add to display the Edit Destination window:
12 Click Downstream Device to display the Zoom: Device Name window.

13 Select the Device Name and then click Accept.
14 Click Accept.
Load the OCAP Application Object Assignment to the RADD

6000(s)
To load the OCAP common object assignment out to the RADD:
window.
2 Click Assign OCAP Object to display the Assign Software Object window.
4 Select Include Application Download and then click Accept.

13-30 OCAP Overview
7 Click Yes.

OCAP Overview 13-31
Control Operations
To monitor and/or control the download:
3 In the Status Filter panel, click All Statuses (to deselect) and then click Active.
5 Click Accept.
6 Click Select.

13-32 OCAP Overview
7 Click Exit.

Section 14
System Maintenance
Perform a database and a full system backup
Verify a successful database backup
Optimize the DAC 6000 database
Clean the DAC 6000 tape drive

14-2 System Maintenance
Recommended Activities
This section of the training class covers the recommended procedures that should be performed
at regular intervals to ensure controller integrity.
Daily - Backup Database Files

The DAC 6000 database tables contain information about your system, digital set-tops,
headend devices, and subscriber authorizations. You can backup the database by setting the
DAC 6000 for automatic daily backup. During a database backup, the DAC 6000 copies the
database to disk and then to a tape. You can also create a manual backup at any time.
An error message is generated if:
A tape is not in the tape drive.
The tape in the tape drive is not write-enabled.
There is an I/O error on the tape device, which indicates a problem with the tape drive.
There are database backup errors in the transaction log.
Two or more hours elapse before the backup is completed.
The disk-to-disk backup fails.
The backup is not complete until the data is successfully copied to both the disk and the tape.
Prepare for Database Backups

To prepare for both automatic and manual database backups:
Purchase at least 11 tapes (see Backup Tape Rotation). The DAC 6000 uses digital audiotape
(DAT) tapes with 12-GB to 24-GB capacity. To reduce the potential for errors and/or data loss
during backup and retrieval, use the highest quality tape available for backup purposes. Use
data-grade DAT tapes with the official Digital Data Storage-3 (DDS-3) logo. While Motorola
cannot guarantee the performance of any tape, it has been our past experience that Sony model
DGD-125 DAT tapes have performed well.
1 To protect the tapes from excessive wear, label and use them as follows:
Label Insert
Monday Monday morning for 1 AM Tuesday backup.

Tuesday Tuesday morning for 1 AM Wednesday backup.
Wednesday Wednesday morning for 1 AM Thursday backup.
Thursday Thursday morning for 1 AM Friday backup.
Friday 1 Fridays between the 1st and 7th of the month.
Friday 2 Fridays between the 8th and 14th of the month.

System Maintenance 14-3
Label Insert
Friday 3 Fridays between the 15th and 21st of the month.

Friday 4 Fridays between the 22nd and 28th of the month.
Friday 5: Fridays between the 29th and 31st of the month.
Saturday: Saturday morning if there is a weekend operator.
Sunday: Sunday morning if there is a weekend operator.
Note: In addition to the Day of the Week identifier, put the date when the tape was first used.
This will allow you to determine when to remove the tape from circulation.
2 To write-enable the DAT tapes, slide the tab to the right as illustrated in Figure 15-1.
Write-enabled
position
Figure 14-1 DAT Tape in Write-Enabled Position
3 Each morning check the whologin.dat file to verify that no errors were encountered during
the backup.
4 Remove the backup tape from the drive and insert the next tape. For example, insert the
tape labeled Monday on Monday morning. Unless the default backup time was changed at
your site, the backup occurs at 1:00 AM to capture all data from the previous day.
Use a different Friday tape each week to provide weekly backups in case anything happens
to the daily tapes. Some sites have a weekend operator and change the tapes on Saturday
and Sunday. At other sites, the Friday tape stays in the drive and is used for the Friday,
Saturday, and Sunday night backups. Either method is acceptable. Be sure the backup runs
each weekend day even if you use the same tape.
On Monday morning, remove the Friday (or Sunday) tape from the DAC 6000, store it in a
fireproof safe or off site, and insert the Monday tape. The storage location must be clean,
cool, and dry. Store the tapes in their protective case standing vertically rather than lying
flat.

5 Retire tapes after one year of use. Use a red marker to label the tapes "OLD" and put them
in a safe place so they are not used again. Discard the old tapes after making one month of
backups with the new tapes. Do not jeopardize your business by using old tapes.
Schedule Automatic Database Backups

Motorola strongly recommends that you back up the DAC 6000 database to disk and magnetic
tape every day (seven days a week). When your system is installed, a daily automatic backup
to disk and tape occurs at 1:00 AM, provided that you put a tape in the tape drive. If you do not
put a tape in the tape drive, the database is backed up to disk only.
To schedule an automatic backup of the DAC 6000 database to disk and tape every night:
5 Type db_scheduler and then press ENTER.
6 Type 5 and then press ENTER. At the Hours prompt, type in the desired hour for the backup
to start and then press ENTER. At the Minute prompt, type in the desired minute for the
backup to start and then press ENTER. The scheduling information and a confirmation
message are displayed. Type y to create the schedule or n to abort the scheduling operation.

7 Type 7 and then press ENTER to exit the database scheduler script.
Disable Automatic Database Backups

To disable automatic nightly database backups:
6 Type 6 and then press ENTER.


Perform a Manual Database Backup

In addition to performing a daily automatic database backup, you can manually initiate a
database backup at any time.
Because the database backup does not interrupt DAC 6000 activity, you can use the system
during the backup.
To initiate a manual database backup:
1 Insert a write-enabled tape in the tape drive.
6 Type db_dump_tape and then press ENTER to save the database to a disk file called
acc4000dump and copy the file to a tape.
7 Remove the tape and store it in a fire/flood/tornado-proof location.
Verify a Backup
Check the whologin.dat file to verify that the database backup ran successfully.
To check the whologin.dat file:
5 Type cd /home/acc4000d/data and then press ENTER to change the directory.
6 Type tail whologin.dat and then press ENTER to display the last 10 lines of the whologin.dat
file. If the backup was successful, the log file contains the following lines displaying the
date and time of the backup:
~ Starting Database Backup To Tape DATE: 03/22/02 TIME: 02:00:01
~ Starting Backup Tape Verification DATE: 03/22/02 TIME: 02:11:01
~ Finished Backup with Tape Verification DATE: 03/22/02 TIME: 02:13:01
Tape backup verified successfully
If the backup did not complete successfully, call the TRC at 1-888-944-HELP.
Check Timestamp of a Tape

To check the date of a tape.
1 Insert the tape in the tape drive.


6 Type cpio ivtB I /dev/ntape and then press ENTER. The following lines are an example of
what will be displayed. In this example the date and time of the backup was March 2nd of
the current year at 9:59 am.
-rw-rw-r-- 1 acc4000d acc4000 74 Mar 2 09:59 /work/dbbudate

1 block
Daily Restore Database Backup Tape to Spare DAC (if applicable)

To restore the saved DAC 6000 database from a tape to a disk for loading to the spare
DAC 6000:
1 Stop the application (Manage Controller / Manage System / Shutdown DAC 6000).
2 Click Yes to confirm shutdown. Wait until the shutdown completes. The Logger window
disappears when the DAC 6000 application shutdown is complete.
3 In the xterm window, type cd /home/acc4000d/scripts and then press ENTER to change the
directory if needed.
4 Type db_restore_tape and then press ENTER to restore the database from a tape to the
acc4000dump disk file and load the database from the acc4000dump file. When the prompt
redisplays, the restore process is complete.
5 Start the application by typing start_acc& and then press ENTER.
Weekly - Optimize Database (DB Maintenenace)

Weekly optimization of the database tables on the DAC 6000 increases response time. Perform
this procedure more frequently if the performance of your DAC 6000 seems slower than
normal.
Note: Before performing any configuration changes or updates, ensure that the DAC 6000
database was backed up recently and verify that the database backup tapes data is
valid.
Database maintenance/optimization requires the Business System Interface[s] (Wire

Link[s]) be shutdown for the entire procedure. Contact you Business System
administrator for the preferred procedure to set the Business System Interface[s]
offline.

Schedule an Automatic DB Maintenance

To schedule an automatic database maintenance of the DAC 6000:

7 Type c to continue and then press ENTER. At the Hours prompt, type in the desired hour for
the backup to start and then press ENTER. At the Minute prompt, type in the desired minute
for the backup to start and then press ENTER. At the Day of the Week prompt, type in the
desired day to run and then press ENTER. At the Runlevel prompt, type in 5 and then press
ENTER. At the Reboot at completion prompt, type y to have a reboot execute upon the
completion of the maintenance or n for a reboot not to be executed upon the completion of
the maintenance. The scheduling information and a confirmation message are displayed.
Type y to create the schedule or n to abort the scheduling operation.

Disable Automatic DB Maintenance

To disable automatic database maintenance:


Perform a Manual DB Maintenance

1 Stop the application (Manage Controller / Manage System / Shutdown DAC 6000).
2 Click Yes to confirm shutdown. Wait until the shutdown completes. The Logger window
disappears when the DAC 6000 application shutdown is complete.
3 In the xterm window, type db_maintenance_script 5 and then press ENTER. The script runs
for approximately 10 to 60 minutes depending on the size of the database. When the
prompt redisplays, the optimization process is complete.
4 Type su and then press ENTER.
5 Type the root password at the prompt and then press ENTER.
6 Type init 6 and then press ENTER to restart the DAC 6000.
Weekly - Clean the Tape-Drive Heads

The manufacturer recommends cleaning the tape-drive heads after every 25 hours (DAT tape
drive) of operation. It may be easier to clean the tape-drive heads once a week.
DAT Tape Drive

1 Insert the cleaning cassette into the drive
2 The drive automatically identifies the tape as a cleaning cassette and runs the tape.
3 After approximately 10 seconds, the cassette will eject automatically.
4 The cleaning cassette will not be rewound. A new length is used with each cleaning. After
the cassette is used up, discard it and use a new one.

Monthly - Perform a DAC 6000 System Backup

A system backup brings the system down and therefore is not scheduled to be executing
automatically.
A system backup requires the Business System Interface[s] (Wire Link[s]) be shutdown
for the entire procedure. Contact you Business System administrator for the preferred
procedure to set the Business System Interface[s] offline.
To perform a DAC 6000 system backup:

1 Locate a new tape and then put it into the DACs tape drive.
window.
3 Click Manage System to display the Manage System window:
4 Click Backup System to display the sys_backup window:

5 Type the root password at the prompt and then press ENTER to initiate System Backup.
6 When the backup is complete, type su and then press ENTER.
7 Type the root password at the prompt and then press ENTER.
8 Type init 6 and then press ENTER to restart the DAC 6000.
9 Remove the tape. Label it with the current date and store it in a fire/flood/tornado-proof
location.
Monthly - Perform a DAC 6000 UKL Backup

1 Locate a new tape and then put it into the DACs tape drive.
window.
5 Type ukl_dump in the /home/acc400d/scripts directory and then press ENTER.
6 Remove the tape. Label it with the current date and store it in a fire/flood/tornado-proof
location.
Other Procedures
Check Scheduled Operations/Scripts

5 Type cron_check and then press ENTER.


Appendix A
Linux Command Summary
The following Linux commands are provided for reference. Note that variable entries are
italicized, fields enclosed in brackets [ ] are optional, and italicized text without brackets is
required.
cat file Display the contents of a file.
cd directory Change directories (move from one directory to another)
Omit a directory entry to move to your home directory.
cp source_file Copy a file or group of files
target_file (or)cp files
directory
date Display or change the date and time
diff Compare 2 files line by line.
find directories -name Display all files that match the name variable.
name -print
grep [options] text List all lines in a file that match the specified text string.
[files]
ls [options] Display the contents of a directory.
lp file Print the contents of file.
man Displays the documentation (manual) on the screen.
mcopy path file path Copy a DOS file to/from Linux.
file
mv file new file Move (rename) a file.
pg [options] files Display the text of a file one screen at a time.
ps [options] Check status of processes.
pwd Print the working directory.
rm [options] files Delete a file or files.
su (or) su name Change to the root login name or to another login name.
tail file Display the end of file.

Appendix B
Generate Reports
View, save, and print DAC 6000 reports

B-2 Generate Reports
Reports Overview
The Define Reports window enables you to select one of the DAC 6000 reports and print them,
save them in a file, or display them on-screen.
Note: You can display only one report at a time.
Available Reports
The reports window enables you to view and save information for the following report
parameters (categories):
Active Carrier This report lists the physical channel maps name, type, tuned channel
Definition Table numbers with their corresponding frequencies and descriptions.
Amplitude Level This report displays the amplitude level for each demodulator. It
includes RPD name, upstream plant name, minimum, maximum, and
average power level per demod, number of terminals on-plant and the
interactive return path ID.
Attributes and This report lists the terminal attributes values and the number of
Downloads terminals set to/not set to the listed values. It also displays the
scheduled code downloads. It includes the object name and version,
source name, downloads start and stop times, insertion rate and
preamble information.
Authorized DCTs This report lists the DCT authorizations. It includes the terminal ID
and service name for the digital services, digital programs, analog
services and analog programs defined in the DAC 6000.
Base Platform PID This report lists the background services and their MPEG and PID
numbers.
Blemished This report displays the last seven days of not uploadable purchases
Purchases (also known asorphan purchases) and a failure status.
Business Systems This report names all the business systems and their respective
Objects associated objects. It includes the business system name, object name,
object version, and BSG handle for the object.
Business System This report lists each Business System and the associated packages.
Packages The package information includes: name, type, provider name and
BSG handle.
Business System This report lists the BSI names, codes Master BSI names and codes.
Relationships
CableCARD/Host This report lists all the CableCARD/Host terminals defined in the
Terminals DACs database.
Channel This report lists the channel map index, the virtual channel number, the
channel name and the channel type for all defined VCMs in the DAC
6000.

Generate Reports B-3
Code Download This report lists the defined assignments, active download control
Status operations, active code insertion operations and bandwidth and defined
decoder conditionals.
Code Suite This report lists all code suites and their respective components.
Component List
Component This report lists the components of a package. It includes each package
Packages name, package type, package start time, package stop time, periodic
rate and package cost for digital services and programs and analog
services and programs.
DAC DCP Inventory This report lists an inventory of all the Digital Convergence Platform
List (DCPs) in the DACs database. It includes each terminals name,
serial number, unit address and whether it is on-plant.
DSG Configuration This report lists the quantity of DSG RADDs and DSG Plants. It also
lists DSG RADD addresses, DSG Plants port to PID mapping and
download PIDs.
DVB Headend This report lists the DVB network Ids, physical channel map names,
and downstream plant names.
DVB Services This report lists all the digital services and applications. It includes
their name, tuned channel, source number, downstream plant name,
queueing device, port name, language and DVB service type.
DVB Transport This report includes the headend name, transport stream IDs,
Stream originating NIDs, symbol rates, modulation, FEC inner and outer
coding, frequencies and logical port names.
Download This report lists the code download bandwidth assigned per RADD. It
Bandwidth includes the objects names, versions, background services, insertion
rate and the total bandwidth.
Downstream DCTs This report lists the terminal types per downstream plant. It includes
each terminal's ID, serial number, upstream plant, upstream frequency
(for RF) and phone number (for telco).
Downstream This report lists the source, service provider, queue device, RF output
Services device and tuned channel for the downstream services on each
downstream plant.
Failed This report lists the terminal ID, purchase time, poll date, and status
Authentication for all terminals in the system that failed authentication.
IRT This report lists the IRT name, the ACP IDs, the decrypting and
encrypting ACP unit addresses and the names and identification
numbers of the services assigned to the decrypt ACPs.
Intermittent Non- This report lists the number of polls on which the report is based and
Responder the following information for the terminal: serial number, date and
time last responded, number of power levels, downstream plant,
upstream plant, RPD and RPD channel, Business System and if it is

On Plant
MCSC Mated This report lists the MediaCipher Smart Cards unit addresses, serial
numbers and status.
MCSC Unmated This report lists the MediaCipher Smart Cards unit addresses, serial
numbers and date and time of last operation.
Multiple RADD This report lists the terminal ID and serial number of the DCTs on
DCTs each RADD.
Non-Responding This report lists the terminal ID and serial numbers of all
Active DCTs non-responding active terminals.
Non-Responding This report lists the terminal ID, terminal type, and serial numbers of
DCTs all non-responding terminals.
Non-Responding This report lists the terminal ID, terminal type, and serial numbers of
Terminals On Plant all non-responding terminals that are on plant.
Non-Responder (# ) This report lists the DCTs that have not responded to polling within (#)
Days this number of days. This number (#) is a system tunable. It includes
the following information for each DCT: serial number, date and time
last responded, number of failures, number of power levels,
downstream plant, upstream plant, RPD name and channel, Business
System and whether it is On Plant.
Non-Responder (#) This report lists the DCTs that have not responded to polling within (#)
Polls this number of polls. This number (#) is a system tunable. It includes
the following information for each DCT: serial number, date and time
last responded, number of failures, number of power levels,
downstream plant, upstream plant, RPD name and channel, Business
System and whether it is On Plant.
Object For downloaded objects in the system, this report lists object name,
object version, source name and download type.
Objects Per This report lists all objects supported by the business systems. It
Business System includes the object name, version, business system name, and BSG
handle.
OCAP Application This report lists the components of any defined OCAP application
Suite code suite. It also lists any defined decoder conditionals.
OCAP Common This report lists any defined OCAP common download assignments.
Download It also lists any defined decoder conditionals.
Out of Band/Ret This report lists all the terminals. It includes their ID, type, serial
Freq number, downstream OOB frequency, return path channel (for RF) and
phone number (for telco).
PPV Analog This report lists all analog PPV programs per Business System. It
Programs Per includes their source name, provider name, program name, start time,

Business Sy. and program handle.

PPV Digital This report lists all digital PPV programs per Business System. It
Programs Per includes their source name, provider name, program name, start time
Business Sy. and program handle.
PROS Value This report lists each PROS object and the associated tier value.
Package This report lists the package name, package start and end time,
Component package periodic rate, component types, names and time or version.
Package/Terminal This report lists all terminals that are authorized for either VIP or
combination packages. It includes the terminals serial number,
package name and BSI index.
Packages Business This report lists the package name, package type, associated business
Systems system and BSG handle for all packages.
Path Response This report lists the number of responding and non-responding DCTs
Status on each demod card on all upstream plants.
Poll Summary This report lists the details of scheduled polls. It includes the polls
start and end times, total number of terminals in the DAC, total
number of terminals on-plant, total number of RF return terminals,
total number of telco return terminals, total number of set-tops polled
and total number of set-tops that responded. It also includes the total
number of purchases collected and lists total count of any purchases
that are 35 to 60 days old. Finally it lists the information at the RADD
level which includes the RADDs name, number of set-tops polled,
number of set-tops that responded and time of poll completion.
Program This report lists all programs in the database, including the unique
service index, source name, program name and start time.
Purchase History This report lists archived collected purchase information for Fone-Way
and Two-Way terminals. The information includes records uploaded to
the business system and those not yet uploaded. The information
includes terminal IDs (unique terminal identifier), service index
(unique internal service identifier), purchase time (when the program
was purchased), and poll date (date/time when the purchase was
collected).
Purchase Summary This report displays the last seven days purchase collection counts per
RADD.
Purchases polled This report lists all purchases polled over the last 24 hour window.
over last 24 hours
RADD Configuration This report lists all the configured RADDs. It includes, for each
RADD, its name, downstream plant name, OM name, stream ID, PID
number, PID type and PID bandwidth.
RADD Ret. Path This report lists all the return path info for each RADD. It includes,
Config for each RADD, its name, downstream plant name, RF upstream plant

name with RPD name or telco upstream plant name.

Service This report lists all services and application services in the database,
including the source name, tuned channel, channel service number,
downstream plant, queue device and language.
Services per This report lists all services and includes the source and provider
Business System name, Business System and BSG handle.
Services with This report lists all services by Business System and includes the
Business Systems source name, service provider and BSG handle.
Simulcrypt Services
Source This report lists the source name, source ID, virtual channel, MPEG
number, and service provider ID for global and local service and
application sources.
Terminal This report lists all terminals in the database including the terminal ID,
terminal type, serial number, and unit address (in hexadecimal format).
Terminal Attribute This report lists the terminal attributes in the hierarchy above the
terminal level. It also includes the terminal attributes values.
Terminal Code This report lists all the terminal code objects. It includes terminal IDs,
Objects serial numbers, object name, object version and object status
Terminal Counts by This report lists terminals counts for both DSPs and RADDs and
Downstream Plant shows the following counts for each: all terminals, all terminals on-
plant, all terminals on-plant and with IPPV enabled and all terminals
on-plant and autodiscovered.
Terminal Counts by This report lists terminals counts for all defined packages and shows
Package the following counts for each: authorized terminals and all terminals
on-plant.
Terminal Counts This report lists terminals counts for RADDs, DSPs, VCMs, Business
Summary Systems and shows the following counts for each: all terminals and all
terminals on-plant. Also it lists the terminal counts of the each
terminal type defined on a return path. In addition it displays the total
counts of CNR terminals, terminals with IPPV enabled, non-
responding terminals for 60 days and responding terminals.
Terminal Counts by This report lists terminals counts for all USPs and shows the following
Upstream Plant counts for each: all terminals, all terminals on-plant, all non-
responding terminals and all chronic non-responding terminals.
Terminal - Readable This report lists all terminals in the database including the terminal ID,
unit addresses terminal type, serial number, and unit address (in decimal format).
Terminals This report shows all of the objects that are specifically authorized for
Authorized Objects each DCT. It lists the terminal serial number, BSG handle, Business
System, object name and version.
Terminal per This report lists all terminals in the database by Business System and

Business System includes the serial number, type, subtype and account number.
Terminals with This report lists all terminals in the database including the serial
Business Systems number, type, subtype and Business System.
Timezone
Tuned Channel This report lists, for each Carrier Definition Table (CDT), the tuned
channel numbers and their corresponding frequencies.
Unknown Terminal
Registration
Upstream DCTs This report lists the terminals per upstream plant. It includes the
terminal ID, terminal type, serial number and downstream plant for
upstream DCTs.
Upstream This report lists the terminal IDs, type, serial number, downstream and
Downstream Plants upstream plant for terminals.
VIP Authorized This report lists the serial number, unit address and install date of each
set-top that is authorized for the VIP package.

Select and Display a Report

To select a report:
1 On the DAC 6000 Main Menu, click Manage Reports to display the Manage Reports
window.
2 Click Define Reports to display the Define Reports window:
Report Name This is the name of the report.

Report Description This is the description of the report.
Display New This option generates a new report of the type selected and displays it
in the report window.
Display Last This option displays the last report generated on the Define Reports
window.
3 Click Select to enable the Reports section of the window.

4 Select the report that you want to view and then click Display New to generate and store a
new report of the type that you selected, or click Display Last to display a stored copy of
the selected report from the last time it was generated:
5 Click Exit Emacs on the File drop-down menu to close the report.
Print a Report
To print a report:
1 While the report is displayed, Select Print Buffer from the File drop-down menu to print
the report.
Save a Report
To save a report:
1 While the report is displayed, Select Save Buffer As on the File drop-down menu.
2 Type a name for the file or hit ENTER to save it as the default name.
Note: It saves it to the following directory: /home/acc4000d/scripts/msorpt/output

3 Click Exit Emacs on the File drop-down menu to close the report.

Appendix C
Manage Time Zones
Time zone management enables users with privileged permissions to set and change daylight
savings time (DST) transitions for the DAC 6000. International customer time zones, as well as
non-standard time zones are also supported.
When a time zone is defined, it is assigned an external handle; predefined time zones, which
cannot be modified or deleted, have assigned handles 1 through 50. Privileged users can define
and add their own time zone definitions, which can be modified and deleted. A unique external
handle is also required for each of these time zones; the external handle can be a maximum of
five digits (values 51 through 65535).
The DAC 6000 time zone management is decoupled from set-top time zone management,
although it is automated for release V2.90 and higher (previous releases still require a script
that is implemented manually from the DAC 6000). Automated set-top time zone management
has an algorithm resident on the DAC 6000 that computes the appropriate DST interval. It
schedules a background set-top time zone refresh for every 15 days. After exiting into standard
time, it computes next years DST time interval and sends it to set-tops that implement DST.
DAC 6000 time zone changes take affect after the DAC 6000 is rebooted; however, the
DAC 6000 does not have to be rebooted for set-top time zone changes.

C-2 Manage Time Zones
Define Time Zone Window

The Define Time Zone window is the primary time zone management window that specifies all
of the attributes necessary to implement entry into and exit from DST.
1 From the Main Menu, click Manage Time Zones.
2 Click Define Time Zone to display the Define Time Zone window.
External Time The value must be unique; valid time zone handles are from 1-65535.
Zone Handle Values 1 through 50 are predefined and cannot be applied to user-

Manage Time Zones C-3
defined time zones.

External Time An 80 character alphanumeric plus symbols field (for example,
Zone Name special_East_DST). The name must be unique. Used when assigning
time zones to the DAC 6000 or the set-tops.
Predefined Activates (fills) to indicate a predefined External Time Zone Handle
value (1-50) was entered. Predefined time zones cannot be modified or
deleted.
Standard Time The standard time zone name from three to nine alpha characters, upper
Zone - Name and lower case (for example, EST, EuST).
Standard Time It is the sign of the offset from the Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). A
Zone Sign plus sign (+) indicates the standard local time is ahead of (East of)
GMT. A minus sign () indicates the standard local time is behind
(West of) GMT.
Standard Time It is the local standard time offset from GMT in hours, minutes
Zone - Time (HH:MM) format where hours range from 0-23 and minutes range from
0-59. For example, US standard time is 5 hours behind GMT.
DST Observance - The DST zone name from three to nine alpha characters, upper and
Name lower case (for example, EDT, EuDT).
DST Observance - Determines the active fields in the Daylight Savings Time Rule panel.
Format All fields are active if the Month.Week.Day format is selected. The
week field is de-activated if the Month.Day format is selected. All of the
fields are inactive if No DST is selected.
DST Observance The time difference in hours, minutes (HH:MM) format of daylight
Delta from savings time from standard time. Hours range from 0-2 and minutes
Standard Time range from 0-59; the maximum is 2 hours. It is always a positive value.
Enter DST - Month A drop-down list (Jan-Dec) to select the month DST commences. Not
active if No DST is the selected format.
Enter DST - Week A drop-down list (1st-Last) to select the week of the month DST
commences. Not active if either Month.Day or No DST is the selected
format.
Enter DST - Day A drop-down list to select the day of the week DST commences. If the
format is Month.Week.Day, the drop-down list is Sun-Sat. If the format
is Month.Day, the drop-down list is 1-31. Not active if No DST is the
selected format.
Enter DST - Time The time in hours, minutes (HH:MM) format that indicates when the
delta is applied to enter DST. Hours range from 0-23 and minutes range
from 0-59.
Exit DST - Month A drop-down list (Jan-Dec) to select the month DST ends. Not active if
No DST is the selected format.
Exit DST - Week A drop-down list (1st-Last) to select the week of the month DST ends.

Not active if either Month.Day or No DST is the selected format.

Exit DST - Day A drop-down list to select the day of the week DST ends. If the format
is Month.Week.Day, the drop-down list is Sun-Sat. If the format is
Month.Day, the drop-down list is 1-31. Not active if No DST is the
selected format.
Exit DST - Time The time in hours, minutes (HH:MM) format that indicates when DST
ends (return to standard time). Hours range from 0-23 and minutes
range from 0-59.
Copy Time Zone Invokes the Copy Time Zone window, which is used to define a new
time zone based on an existing one, for example, modifying a
predefined US Eastern time zone and saving it as a user define time
zone.
Add a User Defined Time Zone

Note: Two identical time zones with the same or different names cannot coexist in the system.
At least one time zone attribute must be different. Do not add a time zone that has
identical attributes with an existing time zone.
1 Click Add.
2 Type a unique value greater than 50 but less than or equal to 65535 in the External Time
Zone Handle field.
3 Type a unique name that is less than or equal to 80 alphanumeric plus symbol characters in
the Time Zone Name field.
4 Type a unique 3-to-9 alpha character name in the Standard Time Name field.
5 Click the Sign pull-down menu. Select + East if the standard time precedes GMT. Select
West if the standard time follows GMT.
6 Type the difference between the local standard time and GMT in hours, minutes (HH:MM)
format where hours range from 0-23 and minutes range from 0-59.
7 Type a unique 3-to-9 alpha character name in the Daylight Savings Time Name field.
8 Select a format to be applied to the Daylight Savings Time Rule panel. If No DST is
selected, proceed to step 18.
9 Type the time difference between the standard time and DST in the Delta field. This value
is always positive. The value is in hours, minutes (HH:MM) format where hours range from
0-2 and minutes range from 0-59; the maximum value is 2 hours.
10 Select a month (Jan-Dec) when DST starts.

st
11 If Month.Week.Day is the format, select a week (1 -Last) of the month when DST starts.
12 Select a day (Sun-Sat or 1-31, as determined by the format selection) when DST starts.
13 Type the time in hours, minutes format (HH:MM) when DST starts. Hours range from 0-23
and minutes range from 0-59.
14 Select a month (Jan-Dec) when standard time resumes.
st
15 If Month.Week.Day is the format, select a week (1 -Last) of the month when standard time
resumes.
16 Select a day (Sun-Sat or 1-31, as determined by the format selection) when standard time
resumes.
17 Type the time in hours, minutes format (HH:MM) when standard time resumes. Hours
range from 0-23 and minutes range from 0-59.
18 Click Accept.
Copy Time Zone

The Copy Time Zone window expedites creating a new time zone definition from an existing
one, for example, modifying a US Eastern Time Zone and saving it as a user defined time zone.
Note: Two identical time zones with the same or different names cannot coexist in the system.
At least one time zone attribute must be different. When copying a time zone, ensure
that at least one attribute is changed from the original so they are not identical.
1 Click Manage Time Zones.
2 Click Define Time Zone.
3 Click Select.
4 Click External Time Zone Handle & Name to display the Zoom: Ext TZ Handle/Time
Zone Name window.
5 Highlight the time zone name and click Accept.
6 Click Accept.

7 Click Copy Time Zone to display the Copy Time Zone window.
8 Type a unique handle number for the new time zone in the External Time Zone Handle
field.
9 Type the name for the new time zone in the Name field.
10 Modify at least one of the original time zone settings.
11 Click Accept to update the database with the new time zone.
12 Click Exit.

Assign DAC Time Zone

Assign DAC Time Zone is the window used to select the time zone definition that is assigned
to the DAC 6000.
2 Click Assign DAC Time Zone to display the Assign DAC Time Zone window.
3 Click External Time Zone Handle & Name to display the Zoom: Ext TZ Handle/Time
Zone Name window.
4 Highlight the time zone name.
5 Click Accept.

6 Click Accept to display a confirmation pop-up window.

7 Click Yes.
8 Click Exit.
Display Time Zone Information

The Display Time Zone Information window displays the assigned time zone definitions by
hierarchy.
10 Click Display Time Zone Information.
The window displays the following information:
DAC 6000 Time Zone

Standard Time Offset from GMT The sign field indicates the offset from
GMT. A plus sign (+) indicates the
standard local time is ahead of (East of)
GMT. A minus sign () indicates the
standard local time is behind (West of)
GMT.
The time field indicates the local standard

time offset from GMT in hours, minutes

(HH:MM) format where hours range from
0-23 and minutes range from 0-59.
STD Name The standard time zone name from three to
nine characters, upper and lower case (for
example, EST, EuST).
Enter Daylight Savings Date & Time Shows the month/day/year and time DST
commences.
Daylight Savings Delta Time from Standard The time difference in hours, minutes
Time (HH:MM) format of daylight savings time
from standard time. Hours range from 0-2
and minutes range from 0-59; the
maximum is 2 hours. It is always a positive
value.
DST Name The DST zone name from three to nine
characters, upper and lower case (for
example, EDT, EuDT).
Exit Daylight Savings Date & Time Shows the month/day/year and time
standard time resumes for the defined time
zone.
Current DAC Date & Time The current local time of the DAC 6000
time zone.
Set-top Time Zone

Hierarchy Indicates the applicable level for the
defined time zone:
System - all system terminals.
Downstream plant - all terminals associated
with a particular downstream plant.
Time Zone External Handle The value must be unique; valid time zone
handles are from 1-65535. Values 1
through 50 are predefined and cannot be
applied to user defined time zones.
Standard Time Zone Name The standard time zone name from three to
nine characters, upper and lower case (for
example, EST, EuST).
Standard Time Zone Offset It is the difference from GMT in hours,
minutes (HH:MM) format. A plus sign (+)
indicates the standard local time is ahead of
(East of) GMT. A minus sign () indicates

the standard local time is behind (West of)

GMT.
DST Observance Delta from Standard Time The time difference in hours, minutes
(HH:MM) format of daylight savings time
from standard time. Hours range from 0-2
and minutes range from 0-59; the
maximum is 2 hours. It is always a positive
value.
Enter Daylight Savings Local Date & Time Shows the month/day/year and time DST
starts for the defined time zone.
Exit Daylight Savings Local Date & Time Shows the month/day/year and time
standard time resumes for the defined time
zone.
Current Date & Time The current local time of the time zone.
11 Click Exit.

Terminal Attributes
If a Downstream Plant is currently not in the same time zone as the DAC/RADD then you can
establish the correct time zone using a terminal attribute.
To define terminal attributes:
2 Click Define Terminal Attributes. The system displays the Define Terminal Attributes
window.
3 Click Downstream Plant.
4 Click Add.
5 Click Attribute to display the Zoom: Terminal Attribute window.
6 Highlight timezone_index and click Accept.
7 Click External Time Zone Handle & Name to display the Zoom: Ext TZ handle/ Time
Zone Namewindow
8 Highlight the time zone for the downstream plant and click Accept.
9 Click Name to display the Zoom: Downstream Plant Name window.
10 Highlight the downstream plant and click Accept.

11 Click Accept. A pop-up window is displayed.
12 Click OK.
13 Click Accept to complete the add.


Display Time Zone Information

To see the currently assigned time zone definitions by hierarchy:
2 Click Display Time Zone Information.

Glossary
Acronym List
AAL5-CP ATM Adaptation Layer 5-Common Part
AC or ac Alternating Current
AC Access Controller
AC-3 Audio Compression-3
ACC 4000 Addressable Controller Computer
ACC 4000D Addressable Controller Computer (Digital)
ACP Access Control Processor
ACSM Automatic Channel Scheduling and Maintenance (Motorola BCS Department)
A/D Analog to Digital (Converter)
ADM 1000G Add/Drop Multiplexer 1000 Groomer
ADSL Analog Digital Signal Line
ADM 1000 Add/Drop Multiplexer 1000
AGC Automatic Gain Control
AM Amplitude Modulation
AML Amplitude Modulating Link
ANI Automatic Number Identification
ANIC Addressable Network Interface Card
ANIC-A Addressable Network Interface Controller-A
ANSI American National Standards Institute
APC Angle Physical Contact connector
API Application Interface
ARU Automated Response Unit
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange
ASEM Access Subnetwork Element Manager
ASG Automated Seed Generator
ASI Asynchronous Serial Interface
ASTB Advanced Set-Top Box
ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ATP Acceptance Test Plan
BB Baseband
BER Bit Error Rate
B-ISDN Broadband Integrated Services Digital Network
BNC British Naval Connector

2 Glossary
BOOTP Bootstrap protocol (UNIX)

bps bits per second
BPSK Bipolar-Phase Shift-Key modulation scheme
BSG Billing/Business System Gateway
BSI Billing System Interface
BSITL Business System Interface Transaction Logger
BTSC Broadcast Television Systems Committee
BW Bandwidth, in Hz
C6M Commander 6 Modulator
C6/8U Commander 6/8 Upconverter
CAT Conditional Access Table
CATV Cable or Community Access Television
CBI Character Based Interface
CBIS Cincinnati Billing Information Systems
CCITT Consultative Committee for International - Telegraph and Telephone
CDC Control Data Channel
CDG Code Download Generator
CDMA Code Division Multiple Access
CDT Carrier Definition Table
CEC Category Epoch Change
CFL Customer Features List
CFS Carousel File System
CFT2200 Consumer Friendly Terminal 2200
CHEE Cable Headend Encryption Engine
CIE Commission Internationale de IEclairage (Commission on Illumination)
CLR Cable Loss Ratio
C/N Carrier-to-Noise
CNR Carrier-to-Noise Ratio
CPU Central Processing Unit
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
CRT Cathode Ray Tube
CS 1000 Carousel Server 1000
CSG Cable Services Group
CSMA/CD Carrier-Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection
CSO Composite Second Order beat
CTB Composite Triple Beat
CTL Cable Television Laboratories
CVS Cable Video Store
CW Continuous Wave
DA Distribution Amplifier (Video)
D/A Digital to Analog (Converter)
DAC 6000 Digital Addressable Controller 6000

Glossary 3
DANIS Digital Access Network Interface Subsystem

DAT Digital Archive Tape
dB Decibel
dBc Signal level expressed in dB relative to the desired reference carrier level
dBi Measures gain in decibels above an isotropic radiator (antenna)
dBm Decibel referenced to 1 mW
dBmV Signal level expressed in dB relative to 1 mV across a impedance of 75 ohms
DBS Direct Broadcast Satellite
DC or dc Direct Current
DC Data Collector
DCA-CR(FR) Data Commander - Frame
DCA-DF Data Commander - FM-Band Demodulator
DCA-DS Data Commander - Sub-Band Demodulator
DCA-MF Data Commander - FM-Band Modulator
DCA-MS Data Commander - Sub-Band Modulator
DCA-PC Data Commander - Power Controller
DCA-SE Data Commander - Squelch Eliminator
DC II DigiCipher II
DCR Digital Cable Radio
DCSI Data Collector System Interface
DCT 1000 Digital Consumer Terminal 1000
DCT Discrete Cosine Transform
DES Data Encryption Standard
DES DigiCipher II Encoded Signals
DFB Distributed Feedback Laser
DGI Data Generator Interface
DHEI Digital Headend Equipment Interface
DIMM Dual In-Line Memory Module
DIU/M Data Insertion Unit/Module
DLS DownLoad Server
DNS Domain Name Server
DOLL Digital Off-Line Loader
DPM Data Path Modulator
DPT Data Provider Translator
DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory
DS/E Digital Scrambler Encoder
DS-16 Data Splitter-16
DSR-4400 Digital Satellite Receiver-4400
DSR-4500 Digital Satellite Receiver-4500
DSP Digital Signal Processor

4 Glossary
DSS Digital Satellite System

DTS Decoding Time-Stamp
DVB Digital Video Broadcast
DVS Digital Video System
DVT Design Verification Test
DWT Digital Wireless Terminal
EAS Emergency Alert System
EBS Emergency Broadcast System
ECC Encryption Control Center
ECC Error Correction Code
ECDS Entitlement Control Data Structure
ECM Entitlement Control Message
EEB Entitlement Engine Board
EECS Encryption Engine Board
EEE Encryption Engine Element
EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (chip)
EES Encryption Engine System
EIA Electronics Industry Association
ELBB End-of-line Big Burst
EMM Entitlement Management Message
EMS Encoder Management System
EPG Electronic Program Guide
EPPV Enhanced Pay-Per-View
EPROM Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory
EROM Erasable Read-Only Memory
ES&F Enhanced Store and Forward
ESA Earth Station Antenna
ESD Electrostatic Discharge
FCC Federal Communications Commission
FDMA Frequency Division Multiple Access
FEC Forward Error Correction
FEM Feature Expansion Module
FIFO First-In-First-Out buffer
FIR Finite Impulse Response
FM Frequency Modulation
FSI File Server Interface
FSIC File Server Interface Controller
FSK Frequency Shift Key
FTP File Transfer Protocol
FTTC Fiber-to-the-Curb
FTTN Fiber-to-the-Node
GCR Group Configuration Request

Glossary 5
GHz Gigahertz
GMT Greenwich Mean Time
GMT/UDT Greenwich Mean Time/Universal Date and Time
GPS Global Positioning System
GUI Graphical User Interface
HCT 1000 Headend Configuration Tool 1000
HDTV High Definition Television
HFC Hybrid Fiber Coax
HFW Hybrid Fiber /Wireless
HITS Headend In The Sky
HMS Headend Management System
HPA High Power Amplifier
HRC Harmonically Related Carriers
HSCI High Speed Cable Interface
HSI High Speed Interface
HSSIO High Speed Serial I/O
HSTM High Speed Transport Multiplex
HTML Hypertext Markup Language
HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol
Hz Hertz
IBB In-Band Barker
IC Integrated Circuit
ICC Incremental Coherent Carriers
ICM Inverse Channel Map
IDE Integrated Drive Electronics
IDI Inband Device for Insertion
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
IF Intermediate Frequency
IM 1000 In-band Modulator 1000
IMTV Interactive Media Television signals
INTS Interoperable Network Technology System
IP Internet Protocol
IPG Interactive Program Guide
IPGT Interactive Program Guide Translator
IPPV Impulse Pay-Per-View
IR Infrared
IRC Incrementally Related Carriers
IRD Integrated Receiver Decoder
IRE Institute of Radio Engineers
IRT 1000/2000 Integrated Receiver Transcoder 1000/2000
ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network
ISI Inter-Symbol Interference

6 Glossary
ISP Internet Service Provider

ISV Independent Software Vendor
ITEM 1000 Integrated Transport Encryption Multiplexer 1000
Kbps Kilobits per second
kHz Kilohertz
KLS 1000 KeyList Server 1000
LAN Local Area Network
LASER Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation
LED Light Emitting Diode
LNA Low Noise Amplifier
LNB Low Noise Block Downconverter
MAC Media Access Control
MAM Multiple Application Manager
Mb Megabit
Mbps Megabits per second
MB Megabyte
MCNS Multimedia Cable Network System
MCPC Multiple Channels Per Carrier
MCSODA MediaCipher OSD (On Screen Display) DES (Data Encryption Standard) Audio
ME 1000 Message Editor 1000
MHz Megahertz
MIB Management Information Base
MIPS Millions of Instruction Per Second
MMDS Multi-channel Multi-point Distribution Service
MMT Modulation Mode Table
MPAA Motion Picture Advisory Association
MPEG Moving Picture Experts Group
MPEG-2 Moving Picture Experts Group, rev. 2 of standard
MPS Modular Processing System
ms milliseconds
MSO Multiple System Operator
MUX Multiplexer
MVP Modulating Video Processor
NC 1500 Network Controller 1500
N/C No Connection (i.e. open circuit)
NCS Network Control System
NCTA National Cable Television Association
NDIS Network Driver Interface Specification
NDP Network Data Processor, NDP 1000
NEC National Electric Code
NESC National Electric Safety Code
NFPA National Fire Protection Association

Glossary 7
NRZ Non-Return to Zero

NTD Network Termination Device
NTP Network Time Protocol
NTS Network Time Server
NTSC National Television Systems Committee
NVMEM Non-Volatile Memory
NVOD Near Video On-Demand
NVRAM Non-Volatile Random Access Memory
OAM Operations and Maintenance
OAM&P Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning
OBB Out-of-Band Barker
OBTM Out-of-Band Transport Multiplex
OC Optical Carrier (SONET)
OCAM Object Conditional Access Message
OLES Off-Line Encryption System
OLL Off Line Loader
OM 1000 Out-of-band QPSK Multiplexer/Modulator 1000
OOB Out-of-Band
OQPSK Offset Quadrature Phase Shift Key
OSD On-Screen Display
OSI Open Systems Interconnection
OSS Operational Support Systems
OTN Optical Transition Node
PAL Phase Alternation by Line
PAT Program Association Table
PCR Program Clock Reference
PDCS Private Data Carousel System
PDF Program Development Facility
PDU Protocol Data Unit
PEG Public/Educational/Government
PES Packetized Elementary Stream
PID Packet IDentifier (MPEG-2 value)
PING Packet INternet Grouper
PLL Phase-Lock Loop
PMT Program Map Table
POTS Plain Old Telephone Service
PPP Point-to-Point Protocol
PPV Pay-Per-View
PROM Programmable Read-Only memory
PROS Permissions, Resource, and Object Signatory
PSI Program Specific Information
PSK Phase Shift Key

8 Glossary
PSL Pay Service Loader

PTS Presentation Time-Stamp
QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
QIC Quarter-Inch Cartridge
QPSK Quadrature (4-level) Phase Shift Key
QR Quantum Reach
QVP Quad Video Processor
RADD 6000 Remote Addressable DANIS/DLS
RAID Redundant Array of Independent Disks
RAM Random Access Memory
RF Radio Frequency
RFI Radio Frequency Interference
RMS Root Mean Square
ROM Read-Only Memory
RPC Remote Procedure Call
RPD 1000 Return Path Demodulator 1000
RPD 2000 Return Path Demodulator 2000
S/N Signal-to-Noise
SA Scientific-Atlanta
SABRE SONET/ATM BiCMOS Receiver/Transmitter
SAC Subscriber Authorization Center
SAR Segmentation And Re-assembly processor
SAW Surface Acoustic Wave
SBM Simulated Bit-mapped Mode
SC Service Controller (Level-One Gateway)
SCC Service Control Channel
SCPC Single Channel Per Carrier
SCSI Small Computer System Interface (pronounced skuzzy)
SCTE Society of Cable & Telecommunication Engineers
SDC Service Data Channel
SDM SmartStream Device Manager
SDRAM Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory
SDU Service Data Unit
SECAM Sequential Couleur Avec Memorie (sequential color with memory)
SEM SmartStream Encryptor Modulator
SM Service Multiplexer, ITEM 1000 kernel processor
SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers
SMS Subscriber Management System
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
SONET Synchronous Optical Network
SPDIF Sony-Phillips Digital Interface
SPI Synchronous Parallel Interface

Glossary 9
SQL Structured Query Language

SSTM Single Service Transport Multiplex
STS Synchronous Transport Signal
STU Set Top Unit
SVRAM Synchronous Video Random Access Memory
SVT II Starvue II Terminal
TAC Total Addressable Control
TAXI Transparent Asynchronous Xmit/Receive Interface
TCP Time Controlled Programming
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TDC Transdata Combiner 16
TDMA Time Division Multiple Access
TFTP Trivial File Transport Protocol
TLE Transmission Line Equalizer
TMX Transport ReMultiplexer
TNA Telephone Network Adapter
TRC Technical Response Center
TS Transport Stream
TSODA Transport Sync OSD DES Audio
TTY Teletype
TVRO Television Receive Only
UCS Uplink Control System
UDM User Data Message
UDP User Datagram Protocol
UDT Universal Date and Time
UHF Ultra High Frequency
UIS User Interface Subsystem
UKL Unit Key List
UMS Uplink Management System
UPM User Processor Module
UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply
URC Universal Remote Control
URC-IPG Universal Remote Control - Interactive Program Guide
URL Uniform Resource Locator
UTC Universel Temps Coordonne (universal coordinated time)

10 Glossary
UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair

VBI Vertical Blanking Interval
VCAS Virtual Channel Authoring System
VCI Virtual Channel Indicator
VCM Virtual Channel Map
VCN Virtual Channel Number
VCT Virtual Channel Table
VDT Video Dial Tone
VHF Very High Frequency
VLSI Very Large Scale Integrated (Circuit)
VOD Video On-Demand
VoP Velocity of Propagation
VPI Virtual Path Indicator
VRAM Video Random Access Memory
VRAM Volatile Random Access Memory
VSB Vestigial Side Band
8VSB 8 level Vestigial Side Band
WWW World Wide Web
XM Cross Modulation

Glossary 11
Definitions of Terms
802.2
Standards for the logical link control sub-layer of the data link layer.
802.3
CSMA/CD (Ethernet) standards, which apply at the physical layer and the Media Access Control
(MAC) sub-layer.
10 Base T
The IEEE standard for twisted pair Ethernet. It uses telephone wiring and standard RJ-45
connectors. It is wired in a star configuration and requires a hub.
100 Base T
The group of proposed IEEE 802.3 physical layer specifications for 100 Mbps Ethernet (Fast
Ethernet) over various wiring specifications.
AAL5-CP
ATM Adaptation Layer 5Common Part. A protocol used to segment and reassemble digital data
streams for ATM transport.
AC or ac
(Alternating Current) An electrical current where the polarity is periodically reversed.
ACC-4000D
Addressable Control Computer 4000 Digital, original name of the DAC 6000.
Access Control
All functions required for encrypting the digital signals and providing them to subscribers
individually or in groups. It includes tagging individual program services, virtual channel
mapping, all other features which are not video and audio program or low speed data related,
text services and program guides. Access requirements are specified for each program in a
service by the ECM stream and if a unit possesses access rights that match access requirements,
will allow the unit to access the program. Access requirements may change on a program-by-
program basis. Access Rights (entitlements) are delivered to each individual unit by the EMM
stream and determine the units service access capabilities, for example, defined tiers will
determine any individual units ability to receive a service. Access rights are generally delivered
to a unit and will remain in effect for some period of time. Immediate changes to access rights
are also possible.
access control data
A stream of 8-bit characters sent by the access controller to manipulate various devices in an
addressable system. It contains global, group, and specifically addressed commands to
controlled devices, such as set-top terminals.
access control element (ACE)
Element that provides the system security handling on the DCT 1000. See TSODA for more
information.
access requirements

12 Glossary
Access requirements are specified for each program in a service by the ECM stream and if a
unit possesses access rights that match access requirements, will allow the unit to access the
program. Access requirements may change on a program-by-program basis.
access rights
Access rights (entitlements) are delivered to teach individual unit by the EMM stream and
determine the units service access capabilities, e.g., defined tiers will determine any individual
units ability to receive a service. Access rights are generally delivered to a unit and will remain
in effect for some period of time. Immediate changes to access rights are also possible.
Access Subnetwork Element Manager (ASEM 1000)
A Motorola BCS software component (ASEM 1000) of the digital headend system that instructs
the ITEM 1000 to provide downstream in-band network services. It also coordinates the
delivery of ECM messages from the DAC 6000 to the ITEM 1000.
ad Inserts
A commercial break within a network schedule that can be sold locally. An audio signal (or the
equivalent) cues the local affiliate to cover the break and air the local spot.
adaptive equalization
A function of the DCT 1000 that minimizes the effects of micro reflections found in cable plants
and in-home wiring.
Add/Drop Multiplexer (ADM 1000)
Equipment that provides the ability to groom more than one MPEG transport stream at the
headend. This allows for the injection of local digital signals or substitution of programming as
received from any given transponder.
address
A unique identifier, generally a number, assigned to a device within a system.
addressability
The capability of controlling operations of remote devices by sending a command from a central
computer.
addressable
The ability to control Subscriber Services from the Headend via a uniquely addressed Device.
addressable controller
An access control computer used to control addressable set-top terminals.
adjacent channel interference
Interference in a given channel, caused by the operation of an adjacent channel.
AFP
AppleTalk Filing Protocol - Protocol that lets workstations access files from remote file servers.
The protocol corresponds to layer 6 of the OSI Reference Model.
AGC
(Automatic Gain Control) The process of maintaining a pre-determined signal level output by
monitoring a specific frequency over a range of temperatures.
Alamar

Glossary 13
A broadcast automation system used at NDTC that controls playback of logged elements from
Master Control.
alignment
The process of tuning or adjusting (either manually or electronically) equipment such as an earth
station antenna and receiver, to maximize sensitivity and signal reception capabilities.
AM/FM/PM Modulation
The process of changing a waveform by varying the amplitude, frequency or phase to transmit
information. - Amplitude Modulation/Frequency Modulation.
Amplifier
Device used to increase the operating level of an input signal.
Amplifier Interstage Tilt
A predetermined difference between the high and low channel provided by a plug-in electronic
card.
Amplifier Tilt
The output signal level difference between the high and low channels. The high channel is
always greater in signal level.
amplitude
The vertical distance between two points of a waveform or signal expressed in voltage. The size
or magnitude of a voltage or current wave form; the strength of a signal.
amplitude modulating link (AML)
A terrestrial microwave link using amplitude modulation.
amplitude modulation (AM)
A method of modulation in which the amplitude (or power) is varied and the frequency remains
constant. Used in the luminance portion of the television signal.
analog channel
A frequency band 6 MHz wide allocated within a cable frequency bandwidth that carries an
analog television signal. Each Analog Channel carries one video and one associated audio
signal at a time. (See also Digital Channel.)
antenna
Any structure or device used to collect or radiate electromagnetic waves.
antenna array
An antenna comprised of a number of identical radiation elements in a regular arrangement and
excited to obtain a prescribed radiation pattern.
Antitaping
The process of altering the video signal such that normal (or unmodified) VCRs cannot record the
signal with high entertainment quality.
API

14 Glossary
Abbreviation of application program interface, a set of routine, protocol, and tools for building
software applications. A good API makes it easier to develop a program html by providing all
the building blocks. A programmer puts the blocks together.
Most operating environments, such as MS Windows, provide an API so that programmers can write
applications consistent with the operating environment. Although APIs are designed for
programmers, they are ultimately good for user because they guarantee that all programs using
a common API will have similar interfaces. This makes it easier for users to learn new
programs.
ATM
Asynchronous Transfer Mode - An international packet switching standard established by CCITT,
in which the network routing instructions and control information are part of the message itself.
ATM will operate at speeds of 2 Gbps and features the transmission of uniform cells of 53
bytes length each. Of that total, 48 bytes represent the payload while 5 bytes represent the
header. The header portion of the message unit identifies the owner of the transmitted
information. ATM headers also identify the circuit number to which the message is sent. The
header also contains error control information. Because each of the cells (which may be
thought of as "packets") is of identical length, whether completely full of data or empty, they
can be switched quickly through a network. In part, that advantage arises because the work
doesn't have to spend time examining each packet to read its address information and assess the
length of the packet. Cell relay systems, such as ATM, are desirable when transmitting vide
ATM connection
An association established at the ATM layer to support communication between to end-to-end
entities. Generally, the connection can be either a virtual channel connection or a virtual circuit
connection. The ITEM 1000 currently supports only virtual channel connections.
ATM Router
Delivery of digital signal by ATM.
attenuation
Difference between power transmitted and power received because of loss through transmission
mediums. Expressed in decibels.
audio loop-thru
An audio connection that would allow the audio signal to be passed through a particular piece of
equipment.
Augmented Message Stream (AMS)
A message stream that has been divided for insertion into transport packet payloads, and include
a single pointer byte in the first position of each payload only when that payload contains the
start of one or more messages, and optional padding bytes. An augmented message stream is
converted into transport packets labeled with a single PID through the addition of transport
packet headers and transport adaptation fields.
Authorization Station (AS)
The AS allows users to authorize/de-authorize/trip certain services within an Integrated
Receiver Decoder (IRD) or the entire IRD itself. Currently, this is designed only for IRDs with
the intention for it to be enhanced for Integrated Receiver Transcoders (IRTs).
Automated Call Distribution (ACD)

Glossary 15
An automated system that answers phone calls and directs them to the appropriate Areas.
Automatic Number Identification (ANI)
ANI makes use of a phone system feature, which provides the phone number of the party calling.
The phone number is used to identify a Subscriber. The ANI takes the order. This is another
type of order source in addition to the Business Systems.
Automated Response Unit (ARU)
A person-to-machine mechanism for responding to incoming customer calls, where information
is taken by reading touch-tone signals originating by telephone. An ARU can be programmed
to provide answers to the most common interface inquiries and/or to route calls to the
appropriate department, and can accept information such as account numbers or similar
identification. Frequently used for PPV ordering.
back end
The system(s) that are responsible for the routing of set-top terminal dependent communications
and managing the relationship to other devices responsible for delivering the message. This
term is used in reference to the current TAC system only.
backward compatible
Also referred to as downward compatible, describing a new product that can be used with
equipment or media originally designed for use with an older product.
Bandwidth
Range of useable frequencies, measured in Hz, transmitted over a communications line or
channel.
barker channel
1. A Channel dedicated full-time to advertising other Channels or Services. 2. Override for an
unauthorized selection of a Channel or Service. This override is used to indicate the
unauthorized status of the Channel, or Service, or the promotion of other Services.
base map
A map containing streets, roads and landmarks. Base maps do not contain strand routing or
design.
base mode
Mode that an Encoder should be in, if there is not an Event. Usually this is a Static Service.
baseband
Transmission scheme in which the entire bandwidth, or data-carrying capacity, of a medium (such
as coaxial cable) is used to carry a single digital pulse, or signal, between multiple users.
Because digital signals are not modulated, only one kind of data can be transmitted at a time.
Contrast with broadband.
baseband channel
Connotes that modulation is used in the structure of the channel, as in a carrier system. The usual
consequence is phase or frequency offset. The simplest example is a pair of wires that transmits
direct current and has no impairments such as phase offset or frequency offset that would
destroy wave form.
baseband scrambling

16 Glossary
A scrambling technology effect by inversion of the video element of the signal. Baseband
scrambling is generally more secure than RF Scrambling.
beat
A general term used to describe any high-frequency pattern in a television picture.
Bi-directional
Two-way cable communications (NCTA definition).
Billing System Interface
An interface between the billing and access control system that enables automatic billing of
authorized services.
Binary Numeration System
A system of numeration, based on 2, in which the numerals are represented as sums of powers of
2 and in which all numerals can be written using the symbols 0 and 1.
B-ISDN
Broadband ISDN is a high-bandwidth version of ISDN intended to support applications such as
full-motion video and image. It uses a basic signaling rate of 150 Mbps and is expected to
support additional bandwidth in increments of about 50 Mbps, up to about 600 Mbps. (CED
4/94)
Bit Error Rate (BER)
Percentage of bits in a transmittal received in error.
bit rate
The speed, at which bits are transmitted, usually expressed as bits per second (bps).
blanking interval
The time during which the electron gun is turned off while scanning from one line to the next.
bootstrap protocol (bootp)
The communication protocol used to transfer initialization information between digital headend
network elements and a central server. At power up, network elements issue a Bootp request.
The Bootp server receives the request and responds with a Bootp reply that specifies startup
information and operating parameters for the requesting device.
broadband
Wide bandwidth equipment or systems that can carry a relatively large proportion of the
electromagnetic spectrum. A broadband communications system can accommodate broadcast
as well as other services. Service requires 50-600 Mbps transport capacity.
broadband communication
Term characterizing both digital and analog transmission systems. If used to describe digital
systems, transmission speed is given in bits per second (bps). If used to describe analog
systems, transmission bandwidth is given in cycles per second (Hertz, abbreviated Hz).
Broadband communication is generally understood to indicate either a fast data rate digital
system or a wide bandwidth analog system.
broadband communication systems

Glossary 17
Systems, digital and analog, that employs broadband communication. Examples of digital
broadband communication systems include DS-3 systems with rates of 44.736 megabits per
second (Mbps) and fiber digital distributed interface (FDDI) systems with rates of 100 Mbps.
Examples of analog broadband communication systems include a broadcast television station
with a 6 MHz bandwidth channel or an entire cable television system with a bandwidth of 550,
750 or even 1,000 MHz.
broadcast automation
The automated process that downloads a file from traffic and builds a schedule of breaks, spots
promos to control the playback of logged elements automatically in Master Control.
broadcast service providers
The entity providing PPV schedules. May be superseded by MPS.
BTSC
The defacto multichannel television sound standard adopted by the Broadcast Television Systems
Committee for stereo audio television broadcast.
burst
1. In data communication, a sequence of signals counted as one unit in accordance with some
specific criteria or measure. 2. A color burst.
Business System Interface (BSI)
The interface between a Customers computer system and the Authorization Center for the
purpose of providing access and control of video programming Devices.
busy time
For Headend and set-top equipment processing time during which later transactions are ignored.
byte
A group of bits treated as a unit used to represent a character in some coding systems. A byte
typically consists of eight bits and represents an amount of information roughly equivalent to a
single printed or typewritten character. In special purpose data storage or memories, a byte may
consist of more or fewer than eight bits.
Cable Headend Encryption Engine (CHEE)
Part of KeyList Server (KLS) that does actual encryption of digital programming signals. For
local control only.
cable loss
An electrical characteristic of coaxial cable that causes signal level reductions. The signal level is
reduced or attenuated because of distance and because of the signals frequency. The longer the
cable, or the higher the frequency, the greater the loss. Excessive cable loss will cause a
customers television reception to degrade
Cable Loss Ratio (CLR)
Ratio of cable attenuation at two frequencies is approximately equal to the square root of the ratio
of the two frequencies.
cable splice
A mechanical or electrical connection to join two cables together.
Cable Television Laboratories (CTL)

18 Glossary
A cable television research and development consortium founded in 1988 and located in
Louisville, CO. Projects include cable test s of high definition television (HDTV), development
of advanced cable architecture, and improvements in field testing and cable operations
technology. Commonly referred to as Cablelabs.
Cable Tilt or Slope
The difference in gain between the lowest and the highest frequencies in a CATV system.
carriage rules
The set of contractual agreements and/or restrictions that determines which Services are carried
over which Channels from what Headends and when.
carrier
An electromagnetic wave in which some feature is changed in order to transmit information.
Carrier-Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD)
Protocol for channel access method used by Ethernet and IEEE 802.3 in which devices transmit
only after finding the data channel clear for some period of time. When two devices transmit
simultaneously, a collision occurs and the colliding devices delay their retransmissions for a
random length of time.
carrier symbol rate
The number of symbols per second modulated onto the carrier.
Carrier-to-noise ratio (C/N or CNR)
A primary measurement of transmitted signal quality. In cable television, the ratio of peak carrier
power to root mean square (RMS) noise power in a 4 MHz bandwidth or the ratio of the carrier
level to the level of noise also found in the channel of interest. The measure of channel quality
is expressed in decibels with respect to a bandwidth around the carrier frequency. C/N results
for optical storage media are usually stated with respect to a 30 kHz bandwidth, which is much
narrower than the bands usually used to carry video or digital information. As a result, C/N has
value mostly as an arbitrary figure of merit with which everyone is familiar.
cascade
In the trunk system, the cascade is the number of amplifiers ordered sequentially from the
headend. In the distribution system, it is the number of line extenders ordered sequentially from
the bridging amplifier.
C-band
The band of frequencies ranging from 3.7 to 4.2 GHz (for downlink) and 5.7 to 6.2 GHz (for
uplink).
cell size
A pre-determined area to be covered by a given system design.
CFT2200
Motorola BCS Consumer Friendly Terminal, analog set-top terminal used in the cable subscribers
home.

Glossary 19
channel
A frequency band 6 MHz wide that carries a television signal. Each Channel carries one video and
one associated audio signal (programming) at a time. (See also Display Channel, Output Channel,
and RF Channel.) A portion of the spectrum assigned for the operation of a specific carrier and the
minimum number of sideboards necessary to convey intelligence.
channel combiner
An electronic or passive device that accepts the radio frequency (RF) signals from many sources
and combines them for transmission on the cable.
channel map
A list of frequencies corresponding to channel designations.

channel mapping
Allows customized tuning parameters to be given to a set-top terminal.
character generator
An alphanumeric text generator. Usually used to display messages on a TV set.
characters per second (cps)

A measure of transmission speed where a character refers to eight data bits and may include a start
bit and one, one and one-half, or two stop bits.
client/server
A distributed system model of computing that brings computing power to the desktop, where users
(clients) access resources from servers.
clunk
1.93 milesUsed for calculating the radius of blackout areas. Used only by DBS.
coaxial cable (or coax)
A type of cable that has two conductors sharing the same axis. Consists of a center conductor,
insulating dielectric, conductive shield and optional protective covering.
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)

A spread spectrum technology that has been developed to increase capacity over analog
technologies and allow more efficient use of the spectrum. Essentially, the technology works by
spreading signals across the broad frequency spectrum and assigning a unique code to each.
Receivers then pluck the properly coded signals out of the mix.
Code Download Server (DLS)

The Motorola BCS software application that, together with the DAC 6000, downloads IR Blaster
and executable code objects to digital cable terminals. The DLS provides the message stream of
code objects for the download to digital cable terminals. The DLS formats the objects as a message
stream that is output continuously to the OM 1000 out-of-band modulator via the headend LAN.
cold install

20 Glossary
The ability to install a Set-top terminal that is not pre-authorized. Also includes the ability to
facilitate the Authorizations for that set-top terminal using a touch tone phone. See big hammer.
collection
Collection is the process of obtaining programming, generally associated with network
broadcaster news.
color burst
In the NTSC color system, this refers to a burst of approximately nine cycles of 3.58 MHz
subcarrier included in the composite video signal. This serves as a color-synchronizing signal to
establish a frequency and phase reference for the receiver.
combiner or combining network

A passive network that permits the combining of several signals into one output with a great degree
of insulation between each input.
Commander-6 Upconverter (C6U)
A Motorola BCS device that provides frequency translation of the TV-IF output signal from the
IRT.
Commercial Integrated Receiver-Decoder (IRD)

The device used by a headend to receive signals from a satellite. (See also IRD.)
compatibility
Ability of one device to interconnect with another. In data communications, compatibility requires
devices to have the same code, speed, and signal level.
Composite Second Order Beat (CSO)

A clustering of second order beats 1.25 MHz above or below the visual carriers in cable systems.
A ratio, expressed in decibels, of the peak level of the visual carrier to the peak of the average level
of the cluster of second-order distortion products located 1.25 MHz above or below the visual
carrier.
Composite Triple Beat (CTB)

A clustering of third-order distortion products around the visual carriers in cable systems;
A ratio, expressed in decibels, of the peak level of the visual carrier to the peak of the average level
of the cluster of the third-order distortion products centered around the visual carrier;
The number of triple beats (distortion products) occurring in cable television broadband
transmissions.
compression
Reduction in amplitude of one portion of a waveform relative to change in another portion of a
waveform.

Glossary 21
compression ratio
The ration between uncompressed (source) signal data rate and compressed signal data rate.
The number of services carried per transport multiplex depends on the Compression Ratio,
which in turn depends on desired program quality. The lower the ratio, the higher the bandwidth,
and quality. Ex: 4-to-1 ratio for sports is needed to match the 10-to-1-ratio quality acceptable for
films.
Concatenated Trellis Error Correction
Concatenated FEC (Forward Error Correction) is a technique where two types of FEC are used to
protect transmitted data. Commonly, Trellis Coning and Reed Solomon encoding are used.
concatenation
The linking together of various data structures.
conditional access table
A table carried in the PID1 stream of a transport multiplex that lists the PID numbers of all EMM
streams in a transport multiplex and indexes each EMM stream to an EMM provider ID.
conductor
A substance that controls or directs heat, light, sound or an electrical charge.
connection ID
A value assigned by the ASEM to identify a service. ASEM and the ITEM use the connection ID to
activate or deactivate a service.
Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and Telephone (CCITT)

Former name for the international organization that is now called the International
Telecommunication Union Telecommunication Standardization Sector, or ITU-TSS; the ITU-TSS
develops communications standards, known as "Recommendations", for all internally controlled
forms of analog and digital communication. Recommendation X.25 is an example of an ITU-TSS
standard.
Consumer Integrated Receiver-Decoder (IRD)

The device used by a subscriber to receive signals directly from a satellite. (See also Integrated
Receiver Decoder).
Continuous Wave (CW)
Used as a carrier to broadcast signals.
controller
A Device used to send instructions and signals to set-top terminal in a stand-alone environment (e.g.
ACC 4000).
controller (addressable)
PC-based operating system for control of an addressable database that is communicated to
addressable set-top terminals.
controller event number

A Cable Data term which is the same as Authorization Code Number.

22 Glossary
converter
An analog Device that the Subscriber uses to receive programming on a cable system. It is the last
Device used before the Product is consumed. The preferred term is set-top terminal.
Cathode Ray Tube (CRT)

A vacuum tube in which a hot cathode emits electrons that are accelerated as a beam through a
relatively high voltage anode, further focused or deflected electro statically or electro magnetically,
and allowed to fall on a fluorescent screen.
Cross Modulation (XM)

A form of television signal distortion where modulation from one or more television channels is
imposed on another channel or channels.
cycle
Alternating waves starting at zero amplitude, increasing to a maximum amplitude, decreasing to

zero amplitude, further decreasing to a minimum value amplitude and finally increasing back to
zero amplitude.
Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC)
A form of error detection. Accomplished by reading a block of incoming data operating on the
binary number equivalent of this block (e.g. dividing by another binary number) and noting the
remainder. If this remainder is the same as a character transmitted in the message, it is assumed that
the transmission was error free.
DAC 6000
Digital Addressable Controller 6000, Model of local control device manufactured by General
Instrument. Controls analog and digital set-top terminals.
Daemon
A UNIX process that runs in the background.
Data Collector (DC)

A device that stores and accumulates purchase information from a customers DCT 1000.
Data Encryption Standard (DES)
A standard cryptographic algorithm for the protection of data.
Data Generator Interface (DGI)

An application running on a host computer that downloads data to be multiplexed into the digital
Data Stream.
data path
Refers to the equipment and data of the out-of-band control stream and return-path data streams.
data rate

Glossary 23
In data communication, the speed of data transmission expressed in terms of bits per second (bps).
Two prefixes are often used to shorten or abbreviate the data rate expressions: K for kilo, or times
on thousand, and M for mega, or times on million. Thus one Mbps means one million bits per
second. Sometimes, the data rate multiplier is assumed and is not stated in conversation, as in
fourteen dot four (14.4 Kbps) or nineteen dot six (19.6 Kbps).
data stream
Information that flows from the access controller through digital headend equipment to the
subscribers DCT 1000. A character stream that carries Device instructions from the addressable
controller to various headends. Also, the information being sent down the cable by the data path
Device at the headends to the set-top terminals.
dB (decibels)
A unit that expresses the ratio of two power levels on a logarithmic scale. A unit of measurement
expressed as the ratio of two power levels on a logarithmic scale. Equation: dB = 10 log10 P1/P2
dBc
The ratio expressed in decibels, relative to the gain or loss to a reference carrier level. Example:
The audio carrier level is referenced as being X dB below the visual carrier level, or X dBc.
dBi
The unit of measure for antenna gain that applies to both transmit and receive antennas. The term
dBi measures gain in decibels above an isotropic radiator (a point source) and thus only theoretical.
It provides a convenient measure of a real antennas performance (gain) since it represents a unity
gain transmission.
dBm
Decibel referenced to a milliwatt. Power levels at the reception and transmission sites are
typically given in dBm. The level at any point in the system is expressed as dB above 1
milliwatt. Equation: dBm = 10 log [(power in mW)/(standard level of 1 mW)]
dBmV
Decibels referenced to a millivolt. Expression of signal amplitude. It is the ratio of the signal power
in a 75-ohm system to a reference power when one millivolt is across 75 ohms. Typically, for cable
television systems, the standard for measurement is referenced to the power corresponding to the
applied voltage of 1 millivolt across a 75-ohm resistor. The level at any point in the system
expressed in decibels above the 1-millivolt standard is said to be the level in dBmV. Equation:
dBmV = 20 log [voltage in mV/standard level of 1 mV]
DC or dc
(Direct Current) Flow of electrons in one direction that does not vary appreciably from a given
value.
DCT
(Discrete Cosine Transform) A source coding technique for compression of digital video.
decoder

24 Glossary
A Customer or Headend Device capable of decoding an analog Scrambled Service. The device used
to restore a signal to its original format after it was scrambled or encoded.
Decoding Time-Stamp (DTS)
A field that may be present in a PES packet header that indicates the time that an access unit is
decoded in the system target decoder.
decryption
The process of unscrambling an encrypted signal back into its original format.
defining process
Process that provides needed functionality for the Scheduler system

delivery
The unique combination of a Service and a Channel at one Headend is a Delivery.
demodulation
An operation to restore a previously modulated wave.
demultiplex
The reverse of multiplexing. The process of recovering many channels from one high-speed signal
into which the channels were previously combined.
density
The mass per unit volume of a substance under specified or standard conditions of pressure
and temperature.
descramble
A unique method that makes an unintelligible video signal intelligible.
dielectric
A non-conductive insulating material between the center conductor and shield of a coax.
DigiCable
Technology for distribution of digital video, audio and text information.
DigiCipher
Program delivery technology developed by Motorola BCS based on compressed and encrypted
digital video.
DigiCipher II
An Encoder/Compressor manufactured by Motorola BCS that converts analog broadcast signals to
digital and packetizes multiple services onto a single MPEG-II data stream.

Glossary 25
DigiNet
A proprietary Motorola BCS network connecting UCS with other DCII equipment. Similar to
Ethernet, but has a higher throughput.
DigiNet Protocol
A proprietary Motorola BCS protocol used for communications between Motorola BCS products
(DCII, IRTs, etc.). MPS and UCS communicate via an Ethernet-based network using TCP/IP
protocol and DigiNet protocol on top of that.
digital
A method of storing, processing and transmitting information through use of distinct electronic or
optical pulses that represent the binary digits (bits) 0 and 1. Pertaining to the class of devices or
circuits in which the output varies in discrete steps (i.e., on/off operations or pulses).
Digital Access Network Interface Server (DANIS)

The Motorola BCS device that serves as a front-end subsystem of the DAC 6000 and generally off-
loads it of time-intensive or real-time tasks.
digital audio
Audio programming represented in digital format.
digital bypass
The ability to bypass digital reception, allowing reception of analog services.
digital cable terminal
A device installed in a subscribers home that accepts and decrypts digital and analog services for
presentation on a supported receiver or output device such as a television.
digital channel
A frequency band 6 MHz wide allocated within a cable frequency bandwidth that carries the
MPEG-II Transport Stream of multiple video, audio, data and text components. In cable usage,
Digital Channels are aimed at MPEG-II capable set-top terminals. (See also Analog Channel.)
digital circuit
A fully digital connection for the transmission of voice or data, or both. A digital circuit generally
offers higher capacity, has lower error rates, and is more reliable than an analog circuit.
digital compression
The reduction of storage space and/or transmission data rate necessary to store or transmit
information represented in a digital format. Common digital compression methods include the
suppression of long strings of 1s and 0s, delta transmission (sending only the difference between
two sampled signals in successive period). For video applications, compression methods include
matching the characteristics of picture quality to the limitations of the human eye.
digital compression certification
Signifies that a cable system is ready to deliver and maintain digitally compressed services.
Digital Consumer Terminal (DCT 1000)

26 Glossary
Equipment installed in a subscribers home that, when authorized, can be tuned to an incoming
television signal to decode it and present a viewable output. It is also used to increase the channel
load of the television set.
digital cross-connect
Cross-connects a variety of electrical and optical signals
Digital Satellite System (DSS)

Marketed under the name DirecTv.
digital service map
The table that identifies how digital services are distributed within the transport scheme, satellite,
and cable.
digital signal processor (DSP)
A microprocessor that acts upon digital signals in any of a thousand ways. An extremely powerful
device, in effect a step above a conventional microprocessor.
digital transmission
The sending of information represented by a finite number of signal states. For example, binary
transmission has only two possible signal states, 64 quadrature amplitude modulation (64 QAM) has
sixty four possible signal states. The advantages of digital transmission over analog transmission
include better noise immunity, the ability to regenerate and re-time the signal to its original quality,
and the relative ease of combining or multiplexing several signals.
digital video
Video signals represented in a digital format.
digital-to-analog (D/A) converter
Mechanical or electronic device used to convert discrete digital numbers to continuous analog
signals.
diplex filter
A device that provides signal branching on a frequency division basis.
Direct Broadcast Satellite (DBS)
Direct-to-set-top terminal broadcast service.
directional coupler
A passive electronic device that couples a set value of RF energy from the input signal, allowing
the remaining RF energy to pass through the output port.
display channel
The channel number that a subscriber sees displayed on the set-top terminal.
distortion
An undesired change in a signal waveform within a transmission medium. A non-linear
reproduction of the input waveform.
distribution system

Glossary 27
The part of the CATV system consisting of the trunk and feeder cables used to carry signals from
the headend to subscriber.
Dolby
Technology for coding of audio information; Dolby Labs, Inc.
Domain Name Server (DNS)
Internet electronic-mail system for translating names of network nodes into addresses.
downconverter
Generally used in satellite receivers, the circuit that lowers a high frequency signal to a lower,
intermediate range.
downlink
Satellite to earth transmissions.
downstream
The flow of signals from the cable system headend through the distribution network system to the
subscriber set-top terminals. Transmitting the data stream from the addressable controller to
headend equipment and set-top terminals. Downstream capability is required in all addressable
cable systems.
drop cables
The cable that connects the feeder portion of the distribution system to the subscribers home.
DS-0, DS-1, DS-3
Digital service levels 0, 1 and 3. DS-0 is the worldwide standard speed for one digital voice signal
(64,000 bps). DS-1, in North America, equals 24 voice channels or 1.544 Mbps. DS-3 equals 28
DS-1 channels, or 44.7 Mbps.
D-Tip Protocol
Interface by which the billing system communicates with the AC and controls both analog and
digital set-top terminals. Is a serial protocol that supports digital set-top terminals and functions
and includes digital set-top terminal parameters. Translations from the D-Tip protocol to BSI
RPC calls are done at a modified y-box. D-Tip supports current AC analog set-top terminal types,
digital set-top terminal types & parameters, set-top terminal polling, report-back of purchases,
diagnostic & non-responding data, and subscriber messaging.
dual-up converter
Headend equipment that converts IF signals from the IRT to usable television frequencies.
dynamic event
Events with beginning or ending times which may vary during Product Delivery (e.g. a live sporting
Event).
dynamic service
A Service on which Events are provided.
earth resistance meter

28 Glossary
A device used to measure resistivity in the ground.

Earth Station Antenna (ESA)
The device used to receive and transmit electronic signals between the earth and communications
satellites.
ECM
Entitlement Control Message. A message describing the access requirements for a service. The
DAC 6000 creates these messages for a service requiring encryption. The ITEM 1000 incorporates
these message into the ECM data stream.
EEPROM
Electronically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory - A device that can be erased
electrically and reprogrammed.
egress
In cable television, unwanted electrical signal leakage from a cable system.

electron gun
An electron emitting electrode and associated elements, especially in a cathode-ray tube, that
produces a beam of accelerated electrons.
Electronic Program Guide (EPG)
The electronic listing of programs provided to the Subscriber via the set-top terminal.
Elementary Stream
One stream of a given type of unique data within a packet multiplex (MPEG-II). I.e., video, audio,
text, data. Each elementary stream is uniquely identified within the stream by its Packet ID (PID).
Also known as Packet Elementary Stream (PES).
Embedded Control Messaging Stream
Special data stream included as part of the satellite-received transport multiplex containing access
control commands and messages typically received from a local access controller.
Emergency Broadcast System (EBS)

A voluntary plan coordinated by the Federal Communications Commission for broadcasting of
emergency information. Under this plan, radio and television stations agree to give up their regular
programming in the event of a local, state, or national emergency.
EMM Provider ID
Unique number that identifies the source of encryption for a data stream. Used in conjunction with
the unit-addressed EMM to enable a Motorola BCS TSODA to decrypt an encrypted data stream.
encoder
Equipment used to convert data by scrambling or digitizes programming signals and applying a key
for encoding each channel.
encoder hit
A process which enables or re-enables scrambling on a selected Encoder or Encoders.

Glossary 29
Encoder Management System (EMS)
Allows users to view the activity and state of the TSPs within an Encoder.
encryption
The operation performed on a data stream that prevents its use by unauthorized terminal devices
attached to the system. Encryption is a digital process inherently applied to digital signals. (Note:
encryption is not the same as scrambling.)
Encryption Engine Element (EEE)

Element that provides the system security handling on the encoder and key server. See TSODA for
more information.
encryption key
One of two keys (7-bits standard, 28-bits enhanced) maintained by the addressable controller and
sent to downstream terminals. They are used primarily to decrypt incoming tag data placed onto a
service's RF signal.
Enhanced Pay-Per-View (EPPV)

PPV programming with numerous start times. Also known as Dynamic Pay-Per-View.
Entitlement Control Message (ECM)
A message describing the access requirements for a service. These MPEG-2 formatted messages
carry service component information such as Working Keys and Program Keys; a message
describing access rights of a program. The DAC 6000 creates these messages for a service requiring
encryption. The ITEM 1000 incorporates these messages into the ECM data stream.
Entitlement Management Message (EMM)

A message enabling digital terminals to decrypt a service. These MPEG-2 formatted messages carry
system wide information such as Category Keys to specific set tops, a message delivering
authorization privileges and related access control information to a specific DCT 1000 or group of
DCT 1000s. The DAC 6000 inserts these messages into the EMM data stream that is distributed
out-of-band.
entry connector
A type of distribution cable connector utilized to connect the cable to an active or passive device in
the network. See feed-thru an pin connector.
EPG inserter
An add/drop multiplexer that inserts EPG data in the out-of-band data stream
epoch
The defined lifetime of a given key.

equalization

30 Glossary
1. A means of introducing tilt into the response of an amplifier or other device to compensate for
slope caused by the frequency vs. Attenuation characteristics of coaxial cable. 2. Adjustment of the
frequency response of an amplifier or network so that it will affect all signal components within a
specific bandwidth to result in a desired overall frequency response. Means of improving circuit
quality by equalizing different distortions; may be a function of a modem.
equalizer
A passive device or circuit with a tilted frequency response opposite that of the cable preceding
it, to compensate for the response of the cable.
error burst
A sequence of transmitted signals containing one or more errors occurring within a short period of
time, compared to the average incidence of errors; a sequence of errors sufficient to cause loss of
synchronization between sending and receiving stations and requiring re-synchronization.
error control
A system that detects and corrects errors in transmitted data.
error rate
The ratio of the number of characters of a message or data stream incorrectly received to the number
of characters of the message or data stream received. The probability that a bit, character, or block is
in error within a given sample size.
Ethernet
IEEE standard network protocol that specifies how data is placed on and retrieved from a
common transmission medium. Has a transfer rate of 10 Mbps. Forms the underlying transport
vehicle used by several upper-level protocols, including TCP/IP and XNS. See CSMA/CD for a
description of Ethernet's media-access method. Compare with Token Ring.
Ethernet hub
An Ethernet network used to control interaction and data flow between digital headend devices.
event
Program of limited duration (e.g. a movie or concert) that appears at a particular time and date
on a particular Service. A single pay-per-view service provided to cable subscribers beginning at
a specified time and lasting for a pre-determined interval.
event authorization
A process wherein a terminal receives permission to decode a signal on a cable channel beginning at
the event's specified time and lasting for the duration of the event. Each event is identified by its
Service Code.
event number
A system-wide unique identifier for an Event.
event packages
A Package, which consists of one or more Events, offered for sale to the Subscriber.

Glossary 31
event tag number

A Motorola BCS specific Service Code used by set-top terminals to recognize authorization of an
Event.
event types
A specific type of Event: Normal, Periodic, Multiple Channel, Premium Service, Dynamic and
Special.
expansion loop
A type of loop formed to compensate for expansion or contraction caused by temperature.
extended basic
An extended tier of services, in addition to Basic, offered to the subscriber for an additional fee.
F connector
A type of connector that connects coaxial cable to equipment.
Fabry-Perot Return Laser
A low power laser utilized for the transmission of data signals from the network back to the
headend.
face plate
The plate containing the electronics that can be disconnected from the mechanical housing in taps,
splitters and directional couplers.
facilitate
Process data as throughput; receive from one source and send to an entity without changing
the data.
fading
1. A fast or slow deterioration of signal quality caused by increasing loss in an electromagnetic
propagation path. 2. A gradual decrease (fade-out) or increase (fade-in) in the brightness level of an
image.
fast Ethernet
A 100 Mbps technology based on the 10BASE-T Ethernet CSMA/CD network access method.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
U.S. Government agency that was established to regulate the electronics industry.
feeder cable
Coaxial cables that takes signals from the trunk line to the subscriber area.
feederline equalizers
An equalizer mounted in a tap housing installed in the feeder (distribution) cable to reduce the low
channel signal.
feed-thru connector
A distribution cable connector which allows the cable to feed thru and the cable center conductor
to be accessed directly for connections.

32 Glossary
fiber optics
Hair-thin glass fibers that allow light beams to be bent and reflected with low levels of loss.
Field Addressable Management Systems (FAMS)
A subsystem created to decentralize the scheduling and management of PPV and Special Events.
File Server Interface (FSI)

Extracts user-selected MPEG-2 transport streams and services and performs timebase recovery to
remove network hitter, and encrypt and re-multiplex the services onto a single DCII
encoder-compatible DS3 output transport multiplex.
File Server Interface Controller (FSIC)

Configures and controls the FSI(s) and initiates the delivery of Entitlement Management Messages
to commercial IRDs and IRTs.
fingerprinting
The process of visibly displaying the IRD unit address on the active portion of a video signal.
firewall
Separate hardware/software that acts as a B-1 level security gateway between the NDTC database(s)
and external entities.
flash EPROM
PROM (Programmable Read-Only Memory) technology providing nonvolatile storage that can be
electrically erased in the circuit and reprogrammed; developed by Intel and licensed to other
semiconductor companies.
flat bottom loop
A loop installed in distribution cables to compensate for weather changes (expansion and
contraction).
flatness board
An electronic network used in amplifiers to change the signal frequency response to compensate for
cable response and amplifier signature.
FM Modulator
Converts baseband TV signals to an intermediate frequency (IF).

footprint
The area of the earths surface to which a satellite transmits.
forward error correction (FEC)

Glossary 33
An encoding technique applied to data before transmission to reduce the number of errors
introduced by transmission. The receiving device decodes the FEC to recover the original data.
The technique used for improving the accuracy of data transmission. Excess bits are included
in the outgoing data stream so error correction algorithms can be applied when it is received. In
data communication, the formatting of data with extra error detection and correction bits at the
sending end of a transmission. The bits are used, upon reception, to detect and correct a finite
number of transmission errors. This is the method used as an alternative to data re-transmission
when an error is detected. A recovery procedure in which the receiving hardware analyzes bit
patterns and corrects small errors, without requiring re-transmission of the block containing the
errors.
frame
In image technology, refers to one complete screen image in a timed sequence of images. An NTSC
frame consists of 525 video lines visible for 1/30th of a second displayed as two interleaved fields
of 1/60 second each.
frame rate
The rate at which images in a motion image sequence are displayed on a screen. Broadcast video is
displayed at 30 frames per second, film at 24 frames per second.
frequency
The number of vibrations per second of an electromagnetic signal, expressed in cycles per
second, or Hertz. The number of times an electromagnetic wave repeats an identical cycle in a
unit of time (usually one second). One Hertz (Hz) is one cycle per second. A kHz (kilohertz) is
one thousand cycles per second; a MHz (Megahertz) is one million cycles per second; a GHz
(Gigahertz) is one billion cycles per second.
Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA)
Carves up telephone channels by frequency, instead of time (i.e., TDMA) and assigns specific
frequencies for each user, as opposed to CDMA).
frequency mapping
A table that defines a specific channel and its related RF Frequency in the set-top terminal.
For Motorola BCS international set-top terminals, a table sent out to define the tuned Channel and
its related RF Frequency and spacing.
In an IRD, a table that defines the tuned Channel and its related L-Band frequency.
frequency range
That range of frequencies over which a device performs or meets its specifications.
frequency response
The gain versus frequency characteristic of a circuit, device, or network.
frequency-agile
The ability to easily tune to other frequencies.
front end

34 Glossary
TCI Addressable Control System Product Delivery subsystem (includes a Database). This term is
used in reference to the current TAC system only.
FSK
(Frequency Shift Keying) A type of frequency modulation in which the signal shifts the output
signal between pre-determined values. Also, a type of signaling in which various frequencies are
used to represent different characters to be transmitted.
FTP
File Transfer Protocol - Upper level TCP/IP service allowing files to be copied across a network.
full-motion video
A description of the video capability of a teleconferencing system. An older term that was used to
indicate that a system had some degree of video support, not just still picture or still image support.
May or may not indicate smooth video motion.
full-service package
Package that contains all Events offered on a Service.

functions
set-top terminal actions performed one time as a result of an instruction sent to the set-top terminal
(e.g. Initialize or Clear Parental Guidance. (See also Features).
fusion splice
A technique of joining two pieces of optical fiber together.
gain
A measure of amplification, usually expressed in dB. The gain of a CATV amplifier is usually
specified at the highest frequency of operation. The amplification amount of input to output power,
generally expressed in decibels.
gain distortion
Distortion that results when all of the frequency components of a signal are not transmitted with the
same gain or loss. Also known as frequency distortion.
geostationary
Describes a satellite in orbit 22,300 miles above the equator that revolves around the Earth with
an angular velocity equal to that of the Earths rotation about its own axis. The satellites
position relative to the Earths surface is constant (stationary), so little or no ground antenna
tracking is needed. Also known as geosynchronous.
ghost

Glossary 35
A weak image of the received picture, offset either to the left or right of the primary image, which is
the result of transmission conditions which create secondary signals which are received earlier or
later than the primary signal. A ghost displaced to the left of the primary image is designated as
leading, and one displaced to the right is designated as lagging. When the total variations of the
ghost are the same as the primary image, it is designated as positive; when it is the reverse, it is
designated as negative.
GigaHertz (GHz)
One billion cycles per second.

glitch
1. A narrow horizontal bar moving vertically through a television picture. 2. A short duration pulse
moving through the video signal at an approximate reference black level on a waveform monitor. 3.
A random error in a computer program. 4. Any random, usually short-term unexplained
malfunction.
global event cancellation
The process of de-authorizing an Event at the Headend and performing a global set-top terminal
de-authorization for each Customer through a Device dependent recognized command.
global tag
A Tag that is automatically assigned to an Event allowing a global Purge of the Event afterwards,
rather than a separate Purge from each set-top terminal. Must be used for the same Event on all
Headends.
Graphical User Interface (GUI)
An application programmer interface that supplies a tool set to easily build and manipulate
graphical displays for users to interact with. These displays have pre-defined windows, buttons,
help facilities, etc. and are used to present menus, forms, and display information to the user.
ground
An electrical connection or common conductor that, at some point, connects to the earth.
ground grid
A system of interconnected bare conductors arranged in a pattern over a specified area and on or
buried below ground level, the purpose of which is to provide a ground potential.
grounding rod
A 5/8 x 8 copper-clad steel rod that is driven into the ground to provide an electrical ground for
the drop cable or is used as an electrical ground for the cable plant, typically at amplifier locations,
power supplies, etc.
ground wire
A copper wire used to connect the ground block at cable drops and the cable plant to a suitable
ground.

36 Glossary
grounding block
A device that is used in the drop cable to provide the means to connect an electrical ground. It
consists of an F-81 barrel connector and a lug for attaching a ground wire.
group delay
1. The phase delay of the envelope as defined by all of the frequencies within the channel bandpass
as it passes through a circuit or network. Group delay is usually very close in value to envelope
delay and transmission delay, and in the case of vanishing spectrum bandwidth of the signal these
quantities become identical. 2. In the propagation of electromagnetic signals consisting of several
frequencies, the difference in propagation transmission times between the highest and lowest
frequencies through a device or circuit.
guard band
A frequency band between two channels, which gives a margin of safety against mutual
interference.
Harmonically-Related Carriers (HRC)
A cable plan where each video carrier is a perfect multiple of 6 MHz. This technique is used to
mask composite triple beat distortion by zero-beating those distortions with the video carriers.
headend
An electronic control center of the CATV system where incoming signals are amplified, processed,
and combined for transmission to subscribers.
Headend Configuration Tool (HCT 1000)

A Motorola BCS PC-based tool for provisioning network devices in a digital CATV headend or
broadband interactive network. The HCT 1000 helps set up embedded code images, assign IP
addresses to network devices, and set up start-up parameters.
Hertz (Hz)
The unit for measuring the frequency with which an alternating electromagnetic signal cycles
through the zero-value state between lowest and highest states. One hertz (abbreviated Hz) equals
one cycle per second. Frequency measurement in hertz is employed to define the bands of the
electromagnetic spectrum that are used in voice and data communications, or to define the
bandwidth capacity of a transmission medium.
heterodyne
Combining two carriers to create a new carrier (sum or difference of the original carriers) or
using a local oscillator to shift a carrier frequency.
high channel input level
The signal level of the highest channel measured at the input to the electronic device (amplifier, tap
etc.)
High Definition Television (HDTV)

The next generation standard for what is generically called Advanced Television with a resolution
of about 1,000 lines/frame and about 1,400 pels/line.

Glossary 37
high pass filter
A filter that passes frequencies above a given frequency and attenuates all others.
High Power Amplifier (HPA)
A device that amplifies an upconverted signal. It is used at the uplink to produce sufficient power
for transmission to the satellite.
High Speed Cable Interface (HSCI)
The physical interface on the back of the DCT that delivers the currently tuned MPEG
transport.
High-Speed Transport Multiplex (HSTM)
A self-defining, MPEG-2 compliant, packet-based digital data stream composed of multiple services
plus PID0 and PID1 control streams.
hot install
When a set-top terminal is installed at Subscriber Location, which has already been Initialized and
set up with Services, the set-top terminal is operational.
HTML
Hypertext Markup Language - The official language of the World Wide Web.
hub
One or more headends located at satellites to a central headend. In large population centers,
transmitting signals by microwave links to hubs may be more economical than a trunk line. Hubs
are not as complex as the central headend, since they merely relay and distribute the signals.
Huffman Coding
The technique where variable length is used to reduce the overall amount of data needed to
represent a given amount of information. The length of a code word is determined by the
relative probability of its occurrence. Thus, the most frequently used words get the shortest
length.
iconoscope
A television camera tube equipped for rapid scanning of an information storing , photoactive
mosaic.
Inband Device for Insertion (IDI)
This is a headend device that transforms User Datagram Protocol (UDP) packets into serial data.
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers - An international professional society that issues its
own standards and is a member of ANSI and ISO.

38 Glossary
impedance
The total opposition to AC electron current flow within a device. This includes a resistive
element and a reactive element. This characteristic is expressed in ohms and is typically 75
ohms for coaxial cable and other components used in the CATV industry.
impediment
Impediment within this context means any blocking of the video signal, either through the output of
0 IRE in the active video portion of the signal or text superimposed upon the black background.
Impulse Pay Per View (IPPV)
Two-way, real time impulse purchasing of PPV products.
In-band Modulator (IM 1000)
The Motorola BCS IM 1000 links the digital headend equipment with the distribution system by
converting a digital input stream to an IF output signal that can be upconverted and distributed.
in-band transport
Where DCT messages are delivered on multiple transport streams also containing program
elementary streams. (Typical DCII transport mode.) All DCTs receive some of their control
messages via in-band transport.
Incremental Coherent Carriers (ICC)
A cable plan in which all channels except 5 and 6 correspond with the standard channel plan.
The technique is used to reduce composite triple beat distortions. Synonymous with ICC
(Incrementally Related Carriers).
Incrementally Related Carriers (IRC)
A cable plan in which all channels except 5 and 6 correspond with the standard channel plan. The
technique is used to reduce composite triple beat distortions. Synonymous with ICC (Incremental
Coherent Carriers).
independent service
A feature of cable service in which different set-top terminals can have different authorizations in
one subscriber site.
infrared
The frequency range used for hand held wireless remote controls.
ingress
The unwanted interfering radio frequency (electrical) signals into a cable television system. Contrast
with egress.
initialization
The process by which digital headend network elements obtain configuration information and
operating parameters at power up.
insertion gain
A change in signal level, expressed in decibels, caused by the inclusion of a circuit, circuit section,
or item of equipment in a network.

Glossary 39
insertion loss
The loss incurred when a device such as a directional coupler is inserted into a circuit. It is
equal to the difference in signal level between the input and output of such a device (in dB).
Instrument Society of America (ISA)
The 16-bit bus design used for Intel-based personal computers.
Integrated Circuit (IC)
An electronic circuit made by manipulating layers of semi-conductive materials.

Integrated Receiver Decoder (IRD)
A headend or consumer device that receives digital satellite signals and decodes them for viewing.
Integrated Receiver Transcoder (IRT 1000\2000)

Motorola BCS digital headend equipment (IRT 1000\IRT 2000) that receives digital satellite signals
and remodulates data from QPSK to QAM for cable plant transmission in the IF mode.
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)

1. An international standard for dial-up digital transmission over a public telephone network. Its
stated purpose is to deliver more bandwidth to the end user than analog by moving the signaling
out of band and deliver a host of new services to users. ISDN uses a Basic Rate Interface and
Primary Rate Interface. The BRI, also known as "2B + D," consists of two bearer channels and
one data channel. Each bearer channel represents a 64 kbps channel and each data channel
represents a 16 kbps signaling and control data stream. The PRI, also known as "23B + D,"
features a 1.544 Mbps data stream. In Europe, the PRI is a "30B + D" data stream of 2.048
Mbps. Signaling System 7 is key to ISDN's future because it removes signaling from the
network and puts it on a separate packet switching network. The first ISDN call placed in this
country occurred in 1986, but has yet to catch on widely. (CED 4/94)
2. Integrated Transport Encryption Multiplexer (ITEM 1000)
3. Motorola BCS cable headend hardware component that provides a junction point between
digital service providers and cable subscribers. It processes a concentrated optical input
containing information from many providers and encrypts and distributes multiple serial output
streams.
interface
A shared boundary between elements in a system defined by common physical interconnection

characteristics or signal characteristics.
1. interference
2. Any undesirable signal or distortion which tends to interfere with the reception of a desired
signal (such as aircraft fading, RF beats, or ghosting from reflecting objects such as
mountains or buildings).
3. Intermediate Frequency (IF)
4. The frequency produced in a heterodyne circuit when a local oscillators frequency is mixed
with the incoming RF signal. In a receiver, the resulting frequency after down-conversion and
before modulation.

40 Glossary
5. intermodulation
6. The modulation of the components of a complex wave by each other, as a result waves are
produced that have frequencies equal to the sums and differences.
intermodulation distortion
Non-linear distortion in a system, characterized by the appearance of frequencies equal to the sums
and differences of integral multiples of frequencies present at the input. Harmonic components also
present in the output are usually not included as part of intermodulation distortion.
Internal Owner
Category to which ownership of a set-top terminal is assigned (e.g., Internal Owner of field is
used for Subscribers). Internal Owners are used to identify default set-top terminal status coupled
with available Authorizations.
internet
The world's largest inter-network, comprising large backbone nets (MILNET, NSFNET, and CREN,
for example) and an array of regional and local campus networks worldwide. It uses the Internet
protocol suite. Access to the Internet requires IP connectivity, or the ability to Telnet to -- or PING
-- other systems.
Internet Service Provider (ISP)

Commercial organization that provides Internet access to individuals and organizations; for
example, CompuServe and America Online.
interoperability
The ability of computers and programs from various vendors to operate together. Also used to
denote the ability of differing systems or elements to interoperate or operate together to some
degree.
interoperable
Non-proprietary. Open to use by external entities (e.g., the system will be useable by any make or
model of set-top terminal).
Interoperable Network Technology System (INTS)

The INTS provides a high speed digital pipeline to deliver Services and information including
required data to control and operate the digital cable network.
interstitial
Time between purchasable broadcast Events.
intrusion detection
A system that detects the intrusion/motion of unauthorized personnel and alerts the proper party for
response.
Internet Protocol (IP)

In TCP/IP, the standard for sending the basic unit of data, an IP datagram, through an Internet.

Glossary 41
IP address
Internet Protocol address. A public standard address used for packet- and connection-type
communications.
IPG
Interactive Program Guide, a TV-Guide type service developed by NLS, to be provided via some
NLS set-top terminals. Note that EPG is a similar service owned by another company; EPG is also
provided via some NLS set-top terminals.
IR Blaster
A transmitter used to transfer data via infrared to a peripheral device, such as transmission from
a hand held wireless remote control to a television or set-top terminal.
Isonchronous
Defines the characteristics of the clock that is associated with synchronous data. An isochronous
clock has a jitter specification that defines position of the edges of the clock at any instant in time.
In general, the assumption is that a PLL can be designed for a correctly specified isochronous clock,
where this may not necessarily be the case for a synchronous clock.
K Factor
A rating factor given to TV transmission and reproducing systems to express the degree of
subjective impairment of the TV picture.
Equipment located in the cable headend used to deliver encrypted keys to headend and distribution
devices.
Kilohertz (kHz)
1,000 hertz (Hz) or 1,000 cycles per second (cps). Normally applied to analog signals.
Klystron
A velocity-modulated tube comprising, in principle, an input resonator, a drift space, and an output
resonator. Commonly used in AML microwave transmitters.
Ku-band
The microwave frequency band approximately between 11 and 13 GHz used in satellite
broadcasting. Frequency band from 11.7 to 12.7 GHz used for a variety of satellite communications
services. One of the differences between KU-band and C-band satellite communications is that the
satellite dish needed to receive KU-band transmission is typically only about three to four feet
across, compared to the C-band dish that is several yards across.
L-band
RF frequency band from 950 to 2150 MHz.

lightning arrester

42 Glossary
A device that attempts to route the power generated by a lightning strike to an earth electrical
ground.
linear distortion
Distortion resulting from a channel having a linear filter characteristic different from an ideal
linear low-pass or band-pass filter; in particular, amplitude characteristics that are not flat over
the pass band and phase characteristics that are not linear over the pass band.
local access programming
In cable, video programming provided by local government or schools, and sometimes produced by
a local cable operator, to benefit the community.
Local Control
The ability to control authorization of set-top terminals and services in a cable system from a local
site, preferably the system headend.
log files
Files containing history of processes or errors that occurred while processes were running. These
files can be useful in tracing problems.
loop-back
Sending a signal back to the transmitter. This can be done electrically or physically at several
different points.
loop-back device
A network device, often at a customer location, that, on command, intercepts received messages and
re-transmits them back into the network. The device is used to troubleshoot suspected or reported
network problems. If, for example, a diagnostic signal can be received and re-transmitted back to
the network, then network operations personnel can eliminate many network segments as possible
sources of failure.
lossless
When data is decompressed all of the original data can be recovered.

lossy
Discarding information and relying on human perception characteristics to minimize the effects of
the data reduction, i.e. not sending some high frequency information that represents very fine detail.
Or limiting the amount of data used for chrominance (color) since humans are more sensitive to
changes in luminance (intensity).
low channel input level

The amplitude of the lowest system channel at a given point in the network.
Low Noise Amplifier (LNA)
A low noise signal booster used to amplify the weak signals.
Low Noise Block Downconverter (LNB)

Glossary 43
A microwave amplifier and converter that modifies a block or range of frequencies

simultaneously to an intermediate frequency range, typically 950 to either 1450 MHz or 1750
MHz.
low pass filter
A filter that passes all frequencies below a specified frequency and blocks those frequencies above
the specified frequency.
MacroVision
The encoding technology that alters video data to disable VCR recording of an event.
Media Access Control (MAC)
This is the lower sub-layer of the Data Link layer in the ISO OSI model and is used to describe the
mechanisms used to arbitrate access to a shared medium.
MAC address
A proprietary address used for upstream/downstream communications.
MCSODA
The MPS decrypt/encrypt chips are called MCSODAs, which stands for MediaCipher OSD (On
Screen Display) DES (Data Encryption Standard) Audio. It is the next generation of the TSODA
chip. It has the same capabilities as the TSODA; but in addition to DES signal decryption and
encryption, it also decrypts and encrypts DVB/CSA signals.
Megabyte (Mb)
A unit of measurement equal to 1,024 x 1,024 bytes, or 1,024 kilobytes; 8 million bits.
Megahertz (MHz)
Unit of frequency equal to one million cycles per second.

message
A data structure that is of variable length, starting with a type byte and ending with a CRC.
Messages may be shorter or longer than a transport packet, but are typically shorter than a PES
packet.
message-level multiplexer
A headend device allowing for the insertion of messaging on a packet level.

message stream
A flow of contiguous messages.
microwave
The point-to-point transmission of signals at high frequencies. Usually above 2 GHz.
microwave transmitter
The device used to relay signals from one tower to another.

Millions of Instruction Per Second (MIPS)

44 Glossary
A measure of the computing power measured in terms of the number of instructions it can execute
in seconds.
modem
A device that converts data from one form into another, such as from one usable in data
processing to one usable in telephonic or RF transmission.
Modulating Video Processors (MVP)
A type of Motorola BCS scrambler.
modulation
The controlled variation of frequency, phase and/or amplitude of a carrier wave of any frequency in
order to transmit a message.
Motion Pictures Expert Group (MPEG)

An international standards setting group working to develop standards for compressed full-motion
video, still image, audio, and other associated information.
MPEG-2
An international standard (ISO/IEC 13818) for delivering compressed digital video. MPEG-2 is
broadcast quality at 704x480 pixels at 30 frames per second (fps) in North America and 704x576
fps at 25 fps in Europe. MPEG-2 is typically compressed at higher than 5Mbs and intended for
higher quality broadcast uses.
Multi-channel Multi-point Distribution Service (MMDS)
A wireless service with the capability of transmitting more than one TV signal. Also known as
wireless cable.
Multimedia Cable Network System (MCNS)

In 1994 several MSOs formed a holding company (MCNS). The committee was established for the
purpose of creating a standard specification for data communications over HFC networks. The
group divided specifications into different phases and worked with the vendor community to
develop a "safe" specification that would provide the industry interoperability and ultimately a
retail-driven market.
Multi-path fading
Found with AML or broadcast transmissions. Occurs when atmospheric conditions or other causes
attenuate the main transmission signal or boost the reflected signal to the point where they cancel
each other out, thus causing a partial or complete loss of signal at the receiver.
multiple channel events

Events that are carried on more than on channel (e.g., an Olympic Events Package).
Multiple System Operator (MSO)
A company that owns more than one cable television system.
multiplexer (MUX)
A device that combines and carries multiple signals simultaneously.

Glossary 45
multiplexing
A function that permits two or more data sources to share a common transmission medium such that
each data source has its own channel.
multi-splits
Distributing signals in a multitude of directions.
N/C
No connection, i.e., open circuit.
narrowband
A relative term referring to a system that carries a narrow frequency range (sometimes used to refer
to frequency bandwidths below 1 MHz). In a telephone/television context, telephone would be
considered narrowband (3 kHz), and television would be considered broadband (6 MHz). Contract
to Broadband.
National Cable Television Association (NCTA)

The major trade association for the cable TV industry.
National Control
The ability to control authorization of set-top terminals and services in several cable television
systems from one central site. Contrast to Local Control.
National Electric Safety Code (NESC)
Safety regulations and procedures issued by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) to
safeguard persons during the installation, operation and maintenance of electric supply and
communications lines.
National Technical Standards Commission (NTSC)

Industry standard video television signal. 525 interlaced lines scanned at a horizontal rate of 15,734
Hz and a vertical field rate of 59.94 Hz. The color sub carrier of 3.58 MHz contains hue and
amplitude (saturation) information.
Near Video On-Demand (NVOD)
Provides subscriber-controlled PPV services. Control is similar to VCR functions such as FF,
REW, or pause.
network criteria
Essential information about the network.
Network Data Processor
Component of INTS that multiplexes data into the autoband stream.
Network Driver Interface Specification (NDIS)
Specification for a generic, hardware- and protocol-independent device driver for network interface
cards. NDIS provides protocol multiplexing so that multiple protocol stacks can be used at the same
time in the same computer.

46 Glossary
network performance
The measurement of noise levels, composite triple beat and cross modulation at the extremity of
the network stated in dB.
network services
Video, audio, or data programs delivered in MPEG-compliant packet-based digital data streams.
Each network service is comprised of one or more elementary streams plus a control stream that
specifies all streams in the service. If the network service is encrypted for access control, it might
also include an ECM data stream describing the access requirements for the service.
Network Termination Device (NTD)

A device mounted on the side of the premises where telephony signals are coupled/decoupled from
the broadband network.
node
A branching or exchange point in the network where light is converted to electrical energy.
node launch amplifier
The electronic amplifier located immediately after the light/electrical conversion takes place.
node spotting
Locating the node placement based upon customer serving.

noise
Unwanted or erroneous signals present on a medium or communication channel. Noise interferes
with detection of the information on the channel or medium. Static on a telephone line is an
example.
Nyquist
A standard data sampling frequency equal to two times the highest frequency in the sampled signal.
Used to avoid aliasing in the sampled data.
OAM&P
Operation, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning. The OAM&P port is a network

(Ethernet) port through which a device communicates with the headend network. The OAM&P
port is assigned a hardware (MAC) address at the factory; this MAC address is used for
communication with the bootp server before the ports network (IP) address has been assigned.
ODVARC
A demultiplexer and on-screen graphics chip.
ohm
A measure of the electrical resistance of a circuit. If the resistance of a circuit is one ohm, one
ampere of electrical current will flow through the circuit when a potential difference of one volt is
impressed across it.

Glossary 47
Ohms Law
The relationship among voltage, current, and resistance stating that the voltage drop across a resistor
is equal to the product of the resistance of the resistor and the current (I) flowing through the
resistor.
one-way
No Return Path used. Downstream data only.
Out-of-Band (OOB) Transport
Where messages are delivered on an independent stand alone transport stream, separately
tuned and modulated. (DCTs with out-of-band capabilities usually receive control messages
both in-band and out-of-band.)
Operational Support Systems (OSS)
A relational database used by telcos to deliver services, charge billings and interact with the
network.
Operations Center
Provider of national access control, located at the NDTC. Formally known as TAC; also known as
HITS Op Center.
Optical Carrier (OC)
The optical specification over SONET. An OC level is the optical equivalent of an STS signal.
Transmission rates are based on 51.84 Mbps (OC-1). A c following an OC level identifies
concatenation of payload (for example, OC-3c).
optical couplers
A passive component used to split or divine the optical power for distribution to receive nodes.
optical hub location

A point in the distribution network where the optical signal is received.
optical receiver node
Location in the network where optical light energy is detected and converted to RF energy.
optical transmitter
An electronic device that connects electrical energy to light.
Optical Transition Node (OTN)

An environmentally controlled enclosure containing an Optical Receiver and Transmitter. A fiber-
optic repeater.
OSI reference model

48 Glossary
Open Systems Interconnection reference model - Seven-layer network architecture model of

data communication protocols developed by ISO and CCITT. Each layer specifies particular
network functions: Layer 7, the application layer, the highest layer of the model, defines the way
applications interact with the network. Layer 6, the presentation layer, includes protocols that
are part of the operating system, and defines how information is formatted for display or printing
and how data is encrypted, and translation of other character sets. Layer 5, the session layer,
coordinates communication between systems, maintaining sessions for as long as needed and
performing security, logging, and administrative functions. Layer 4, the transport layer, controls
the movement of data between systems, defines protocols for structuring messages, and
supervises the validity of transmissions by performing error checking. Layer 3, the network
layer, defines protocols for routing data by opening and maintaining a path on the network.
output channel
The Channel that the television must be tuned to in order to receive set-top terminal signals.
output converter
An electronic device that up converts an intermediate frequency to a desired frequency. Generally
the output stage of a headend modulator or processor.
owner profile
The set of default Features, Functions, Authorizations, and Packages assigned to any specific
category of Office Owner.
packet
A collection of contiguous bits of data. Each packet has a header that defines the attributes of the
information in the packet. DigiCipher II packet format follows the MPEG format of a 188-byte data
structure consisting of a short header field followed by a longer data (payload) field. Also called
transport packet.
packet identifier (PID)

A component of the MPEG specification. A number assigned to MPEG transport packets to
identify the information stream to which they belong. The PID number is assigned in the packet
header, and all packets from the same stream have the same PID number.
PID0 provides multiplex definition information for a transport multiplex (SSTM or HSTM). The
PID0 stream carries the service association table. PID1 points to data streams containing
access control information for an HSTM.
packet stream
A sequential flow of packets.
Packetized Elementary Stream (PES)
A data stream composed of end-to-end PES packets, which are variable length and typically far
longer than a transport packet.
pad
A flat loss device used to alternate signals at an amplifier.
passive device
Static in operation, not capable of amplification or oscillation, requires no power to function. For
example, splitters, taps, coupler, attenuators.

Glossary 49
Pay-Per-View (PPV)
Used in cable TV programming where the user is charged a price for individual programs.
Permissions, Resource and Object Signatory (PROS)
The PROS is a PC that is used to sign DCT 5000 code objects to secure them.
persistence of vision
When viewing the two fields that make up a television image, the brain memorizes the first
field, and because the two consecutive fields follow each other in such rapid sequence, the brain
sees a complete frame or picture instead of two separate fields.
phase
A fraction, expressed in degrees, of one complete cycle of a waveform or orbit.
phase distortion
Lack of direct proportionally of phase shift to frequency over the required frequency range.
Phase-Lock Loop (PLL)

An electronic servo system controlling an oscillator so that it maintains a constant phase angle
relative to a reference signal source.
phase modulation
A form of modulation where the phase of the transmitted signal is changed as the value of the
information changes.
Phase Shift-Key
A form of modulation where digital information is conveyed by changing the phase of the signal.
Phased-Array Antenna
A radio frequency (RF) transmission and/or reception antenna that uses several smaller antenna
elements to create special transmission and/or reception characteristics. For example, phased-array
antennas, used in radar applications, create one or more pencil beams to track specific targets,
without the use of traditional radar rotating elements. Or, phased-array antennas (arranged in a flat
configuration) can replace cumbersome parabolic antennas. Special electronics are used to control
and combine the multiple signals to and from each antenna element. Phased-array antennas are
much more expensive than many other types of antennas.
Phase-Locked Modulator
Permits fixed modulator output to be phase locked to an interfering local off air station, resulting in
significantly reduced or eliminated interference.
photodetector receiver
An optical detector
pilot carrier
Signals on cable television systems used to operate attenuation (gain) and frequency response
(slope) compensating circuitry in amplifiers.

50 Glossary
pilot subcarrier
A subcarrier serving as a control signal for use in the reception of the stereophonic broadcasts.
pilot tone
A modulated or unmodulated tone used in lieu of video carriers to control automatic gain and slope
control circuitry in CATV amplifiers.
PING
Packet INternet Grouper - A utility program used to test reach ability of destinations by sending
them an ICMP echo request and waiting for a reply. Ping is used as a verb: "Ping the host to see if
it is available"
poll
The act of instigating a return message from a set-top terminal.

pooled set-top terminals
set-top terminals that are considered to be assigned to all headend controllers in an office.
post amplifier
Output gain stage of an amplifier.

power conditioner
A passive or active electrical device that conditions the incoming line power, typically this unit will
reduce or eliminate power anomalies such as sages, surges and short duration over voltage spikes.
power divider
A device used to divide received satellite signals.
power doubling
An amplification technique where two amplifying devices are operated parallel to gain an increase
in output.
power inserter
A device used to couple power into antenna downlead to power LNB from a remote location.
power supply
As used in cable television systems, 1. A step down AC transformer that supplies low voltage AC
(usually 60 volts) to operate amplifiers in the system, and 2. The module located in the amplifier
housing that converts the low voltage AC to regulated DC for actual operation of the electronic
devices inside the housing.
premium channel
A Static Channel offered as a supplement to basic Services (e.g. HBO, Cinemax). This Service is
an additional fee to the Subscriber.
premium service

Glossary 51
Continuous broadcasts as well as a-la-carte Events that are offered for a specific period of time, or
programs sold off a Premium Service.
Presentation Time-Stamp (PTS)
A field that may be present in a PES packet header that indicates the time that a presentation
unit is presented in the system target DCT.
preview
The time period at the beginning of an Event when promotional material can be shown on the same
Channel as the Event, but unscrambled. Offices can determine whether to have Previews.
processor
Used to receive an off-air signal. The processor down converts the signal to an intermediate
frequency, amplifies and upconverts to an output frequency.
product ID
A unique number assigned by NDTC to any entity that can be purchased through PPV. Examples
include a product, a premium service, and possibly in the future, consumer goods, products sold on
QVC
Program Association Table (PAT)
A table carried in the PID0 stream of transport multiplex that lists the service number of all services
in the multiplex and indexes each number to a service control channel (SCC).
Program Clock Reference (PCR)

Represents the absolute time in 27 MHz clock cycles (ticks) of the 27 MHz clock that is defined to
be the timebase for this service. The multiplexing process must correct any movement of the packet
that contains the PCR from the absolute time with respect to the timebase that was used to set its
value.
Program Event Scheduler

Allows users to send the events for particular services to the UCS. This program communicates
with the AC database and UCS Maintenance to determine which services are available for the
particular UCS.
program map
Same as service map. A data structure describing all the service components that make up a service,
including the reference number (PID) of the packets that carry each components, and other related
information. MPEG-2 uses program instead of service to describe this map, which is more
typically defined for a series of programs.

52 Glossary
program map table
A table that lists the PID numbers of data streams in a network service. This includes all
elementary streams, the stream carrying the services timing reference (called the PCR), and the
stream carrying the service ECM messages. Each service in an HSTM has a SCC stream that
carries the program map table; the service association table lists all SCC streams. An SSTM
carries the program map table in the PID0 control stream.
programmer
A Programmer as defined for this specification is the entity that controls or manages the source of
the video, audio or data that makes up a service.
program-specific information
Information provided with a specific service to support special user-interface features related to that
service. PSI includes such information as tier level, purchasability, price, and rating code.
proof-of-performance
Evaluating the performance of an RF transmission system by measuring all parameters (i.e.-

noise, frequency response, triple beat etc.). Test equipment is required to conduct these Proof
of Performance studies.
proprietary information
Information that is the property of a given party or company and is not to be shared or disseminated
to other parties or companies. Most commonly associated with technology, trade secrets, business
plans, etc.
protocol
Formal specification of rules and conventions that governs how devices on a network exchange
information; it defines format, timing, sequence, and error checking to be used.
Protocol Data Unit (PDU)

A general term for a message which is formatted specifically for a given protocol stack. This is
often prefixed by T for Transport, S for Session, or A for Application.
PSTN
Public-Switched Telephone Network
purchase unit
Motorola BCSs definition of the internal price per product stored in the set-top terminal. Used to
establish and maintain credit limits.
purge
The process of removing Event information from the set-top terminals after an Event is over.
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM)

Glossary 53
A data modulation technique used to convert digital program information for delivery in cable TV
systems over in-band frequencies. A form of double-sideband modulation. The data stream is split
into two half-rate streams. One of the data streams modulates a sine wave carrier, the other a cosine
carrier at the same frequency. The resultant signal resembles a vestigial sideband signal with no
pilot carrier present.
Quadrature Phase Shift-Key (QPSK)

A digital modulation method that combines two carriers that are 90 degrees out of phase (in
quadrature), resulting in four possible phase states.
QPSK Modulator
Receives data from the IRT or DAC 6000 and multiplexes it with other OOB data. Outputs the
multiplexed data onto the 75.25 MHz guard band.
quantizer
A component of a digital communications system whose function is to assign a discrete set of
values to the amplitude of each successive sample of a signal.
Quantum Reach (QR)
A type of coaxial cable.
quiet time
The time when Event operations can be grouped and performed together during a less busy time
period for the computers.
Radio Frequency (RF)

An electromagnetic spectrum above the audio and below the infrared frequencies, generally
between 3 KHz and 300 GHz. It is the band of frequencies at which coherent electromagnetic
radiation is possible
Radio Frequency Interference (RFI)

The introduction of electromagnetic radiation of radio frequency signals into operating circuits. RFI
is also referred to as electromagnetic interference (EMI).
radio service
A stereo audio channel that is encrypted using a different encryption key than the stereo audio
channel(s) associated with the video programming.
randomization
The method used to randomize the pattern of bits to ensure a properly shaped power spectral
density.
real-time
An immediate (interactive) response; it does not involve a queue. RT puts messages and commands
into the data stream with a Real Time reference. This is done for the 10-12 analog streams. RT was
developed since the current Wagner HW for analog on Paris did not put out the right timing for the
SDA box. The Real Time box resolves the timing and framing issues.
redundancy

54 Glossary
Incorporation of duplicate components into a system so that a duplicate component immediately

takes over if the primary component fails.
Reed-Solomon encoder
A block-based encoding technique used for FEC.
Reiss Media
A Broadcast Service Provider (Request Channel).
reminder
A DCT function that will remind the viewer in advance of a selected program.
Remote Addressable DANIS/DLS (RADD 6000)
A headend device that works in conjunction with the DAC 6000 to manage DCTs. It executes
various real-time message operations such as polling and downloads to DCTs.
remote headend
A secondary headend that is attached to a main headend via AML, fiber, or other connection.
replaceable security
Replaceable security refers to the ability to replace the DigiCipher II access control system.
Encryption cannot be replace.
retune event
Defined as the successful tuning from one channel to another. A Pending retune event is defined as
the retune information being present within the DCT 1000, an active countdown timer approaching
the retune event, and the retune event time not yet occurred.
return path
The path from customers and subscribers via the INTS network through which impulse
purchases and poll information is transported to the addressable controller.
reverse cable tilt
In short-spaced design applications; where the high frequencies are greater in amplitude than the
low frequencies.
RF channel
The assigned frequency allocation for the transmission of information (video, audio, or data).
RF filter
Radio frequency filter that filters out low and high pass, notch and bandpass frequencies.
RF scrambling
A scrambling technology effectuated by suppressing elements of the signals radio frequency. RF
scrambling is generally not as secure as Baseband Scrambling is.

Glossary 55
riser
Pole location in network where the cable plant alternately changes from underground to aerial.
RMS Voltmeter
Testing device capable of measuring true RMS voltage(s).

roll-off frequency
The frequency at which gradual or sharp change in gain versus frequency occurs. Found at either or
both ends of the transmission bandpass.
Rule of Frequency
See Cable Loss Ratio (CLR)
run-length coding
After digital video is compressed with spatial and temporal techniques, the resulting data is
examined for long strings of successive ones and zeros. The number of times a one or zero is
repeated is counted, and then represented by a shorter code. This technique is run-length coding.
SABRE
SONET/ATM BiCMOS Receiver/Transmitter. A processor in the ITEM 1000 that detects SONET
frames and delineates ATM cells carried in the frame payloads.
sag allowance
A percentage of fiber footage added to the design for future maintenance or emergency restoration
issues.
SAR processor
Segmentation And Reassembly processor. A processor in the ITEM 1000 that reconstructs AAL5-
CP protocol data units (PDUs) from ATM cell payloads and recovers MPEG packets from the PDU
payloads.
schedule
This is a list of Events for which Devices will need to be authorized by the Event beginning and de-
authorized after the Event end.
schedule rule
Rules that determine when the service is on or off for the channel.
scheduling request
A PPV participation request initiated by an Office.
Scientific-Atlanta (SA)
The manufacturer of one of two types of Controllers and set-top terminals used in the current TAC
system.

56 Glossary
scramble
Changing a signal so that it contains information, which allows only authorized set-top terminals
to Descramble and view.
semaphores
A flag that prevents two or more processes from accessing the same resource at the same time.
Semaphores will be used to control access to shared memory.
Sequential Couleur Avec Memoire (SECAM)
The television display technology that is standard in France, the countries of the former Soviet
Union, and certain other countries. It is one of the three world TV standards, together with NTSC
(United States) and PAL (Europe other than France).
serial interface
An interface or connection in which a serial (that is, bit-by-bit) communication protocol is used.
Found on back of DCT and most personal computers.
serial number
A unique 10-digit number assigned to each terminal at the factory. It is programmed into non-
volatile memory, making it available to the terminal's CPU. Its value is important during
initialization, since the addressable controller uses it to assign a logical address to the terminal.
serial transmission
Transmission at successive intervals of signal elements constituting the same telegraph or data
signal. The sequential elements may be transmitted with or without interruption, provided they are
not transmitted simultaneously. The bit-by-bit transfer of data along a single path. This method is
slower than parallel transmission, but is much cheaper when transmission is required over a
distance.
service association table

A data structure describing the correspondence between a service and the PID value of the packets
that carry the message stream that includes the service map.
service components
Any of the up to 8 components that comprise a digital signal. (Combination of audio, video, or
text services.)
Service Control Channel (SCC)
The message stream that conveys the service map message and other service related information
messages relating solely to a single service. The SCC is packetized and assigned a single PID; this
is the PID value referenced in the Service Association Table.
Service Handle
A number assigned by the DAC 6000 to coordinate delivery of ECM messages to the ITEM 1000.
Service Map

Glossary 57
A data structure describing all the service components that make up a service, including the
reference number (PID) of the packets that carry each component, and other related information.
Service Number
An MPEG number used to identify video services provided by the cable system. Currently this
field has a range of 1-8192. A number assigned to each service in a transport multiplex (SSTM or
HSTM) to identify the collection of data streams that make up the service and distinguish it from
other services. Within an HSTM, each service number must be unique.
Service Providers
Same as Broadcast Service Providers and Outside Service Providers (see Broadcast Service
Providers).
Service Units
A unit used by the set-top terminal to store the value of a Product.
set-top terminal
A digital Terminal or analog Device that the Subscriber uses to receive programming on a cable
system. It is the last Device used before the Product is consumed.
set-top terminal address
An address that identifies a set-top terminal.
shared memory
The same memory segment is mapped into the address space of two or more processes
shared services
Allows different programs to run on the same Channel for a pre-determined time, on a Schedule
created by the requester.
shielding
The outer conductor of the coaxial cable.

signal
A visible, audible, or other conveyor of information; the embodiment of electrical impulses being
transmitted.
signal leakage
Undesired emission of signals out of a CATV system. Usually through cracks in the cable, corrosion
or loose connections.
signal level
Amplitude of signal voltage measured across 75 ohms, usually expressed in decibel millivolts.
signal-to-noise ratio (S/N)
The ratio of signal power to noise power at some point in a circuit, often expressed in decibels (dB).
A measurement widely used to judge the quality of a received signal. For example, the analog
television picture reception is said to be snowy when the S/N is low. The relative power of the
signal to the noise in a channel, usually measured in decibels.

58 Glossary
signature
Peak/Valley response of an amplifier type.

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
Standardized method of managing and monitoring network devices on TCP/IP-based internets.
sine wave
A waveform with deviation that can be expressed as the sine and cosine of a linear function of time
or space or both.
Single Service Transport Multiplex (SSTM)
A self-defining, MPEG-2 compliant, packet-based digital data stream composed of multiple
component streams. Component streams include one or more elementary streams plus a PID0
control stream.
skin effect
When Alternating Current (AC) flows through a metallic conductor more electrons will flow
through the conductor in the area near the outer surface of the conductor than will flow through the
center of the conductor.
sleep timer
A programmable timer that can be set to automatically turn the DCT on or off.
SONET
Synchronous Optical Network - High-speed, synchronous network designed to run on fiber at
digital transmission rates from 51.84 Mbps to beyond 2.4 Gbps (gigabits per second).
spectrum
In telecommunications, a specified range of electromagnetic frequencies or, in some cases, the
whole range of frequencies considered to constitute electromagnetic signals.
spectrum allocation
A Federal Communications Commission allocation, or setting aside, of portions of the available
electromagnetic spectrum for specific purposes, such as for personal communication service.
spectrum analyzer
Equipment that automatically scans through a selected frequency spectrum and displays input
signals on a chart of amplitude versus frequency.
splitter
Equipment used to divide a signal into two or more identical, lower power signals.
stacked antenna array

A group of identical antennas physically grouped and electrically connected for greater gain and
directivity.
standby generator
A fuel-power (for example, gasoline, propane, diesel) generator used to back up electrical power in
the event of an electrical power failure.

Glossary 59
standby mode
The mode that a Motorola BCS Encoder should be in if there is no Event. No scrambling or control.
standby power supply
A step down alternating current (AC) transformer that converts 120 volts AC to a lower AC voltage
(30 or 60 volts) to be carried on the coaxial cable along with the cable signals to power active
devices in the distribution plant. In addition, batteries and an inverter are included to provide backup
power in the event of an electrical power (120 volts AC) failure.
Start-Time Order
An ordering of NVOD movies wherein each movie appears in a list starting from the next closest
start time and continuing in the order of start times as far into the future as is required. Depending
on how far into the future this list is prepared, many of the movies may appear multiple times.
start-up phase
The period of time during which a new NVOD movie is introduced into the system. At the
beginning of this time period, only one playback machine starts to deliver video. Subsequently, at
the beginning of each new show channel increment, a new machine starts to deliver video. At the
end of the startup time, the last machine assigned to the movie begins to deliver video.
static service
Continuous subscription service.
status monitoring
A method of monitoring or alternately testing system parameters. P.C. based system that
communicates with transponders.
store-and-forward
set-top terminals store authorized Subscriber purchase(s) and forwards the information to the main
Headend or Data Collector when requested.
stream
A stream of data is a continuous receipt of packets that have an identical packet ID. Packets are
guaranteed to arrive in order, but their locations can move somewhat through the multiplexing
process. This movement represents packet location jitter. A packet stream carries one service
component.
Subscriber Authorization System

A system that controls authorization of set-top terminals for selected services. Includes both
national and local control.
subscriber ID
An identification number stored in the Business System and ACC 4000D that identifies the
subscriber.
surge
A transient wave of current, potential, or power in an electrical circuit.
surge arrester

60 Glossary
A protective device for limiting surge voltages in equipment by discharging or bypassing surge
current. prevents continued flow of current to ground and is capable of repeating these functions as
specified. Synonymous with Lightning Arrester.
surge protector
A protective device, consisting of one or more surge arresters, a mounting assembly, optional fuses
and short circuiting devices, etc., which is used for limiting surge voltages on electrical and
electronic equipment or circuits.
Sybase
The relational SQL database used within the DAC 4000 to maintain information on set-top
terminals, subscribers, pay services, etc.
symbolic rate
A measurement of digital transmission speed. In telephone modems, referred to as Baud Rate.
synchronous
The term synchronous refers to the instantaneous alignment of two or more events in time.
Events may occur at irregular intervals, though at the same instant and still be synchronous.
Using this definition, synchronous data only implies that the data and the clock occur at the
same instant, not that the clock is regular.
Synchronous Transport Signal (STS)
The logical signal specification for SONET frame structure. This specifies electrical transmission
rates based on 51.84 Mbps (STS-1). OC-3 is 155.52 Mbps.
Synchronous Video Random Access Memory (SVRAM)

SVRAM combines SDRAM and serial access memory using synchronous operations to improve
VRAM total performance. SVRAM has a block write mode and write-per-bit capability
T Carrier
There is a hierarchy of T carrier systems, which were designed to transmit digital voice signals but
now also handles data transmission. In North America, the designations (T-1, T-3, etc.) correspond
to the designations for the digital signal hierarchy:
T-1 = DS-1, 1.544 Mbps, 24 voice channels

T-1c = 3.152, Mbps, 48 voice channels
T-2 = DS-2, 6.312 Mbps. 96 voice channels
T-3 = DS-3, 44.736 Mbps, 672 voice channels

T-4 = DS-4, 274.176 Mbps, 4,032 voice channels
T-1 uses two pairs of twisted pair copper and is used to connect networks across distances. T-3 runs
on fiber optic cable and is often called FT-3. T-4 can operate on coaxial cable, microwave, and
fiber optics.

Glossary 61
tags
A number inserted on the audio while modifying the vertical and horizontal pulses on the video
by a pulse waveform. If the set-top terminal has this tag number in its authorization mask, the
Service is Descrambled (see also Event Tag Number). Analog tags range from 1-253, while
digital Tags range from 1-XX.
tasks
Individual procedures stored in the database that run at specific times, based on the start and end
times of an Event, to prepare for the Event and clean up after the Event is over.
TAXI
Transparent Asynchronous Xmit/Receive Interface. A clock-encoded serial data format that

uses two signals: data and strobe.
TCP/IP
Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol allows sharing of applications among computers
in a high-speed environment; corresponding to the transport and network layers of the OSI model.
Telco
The collection of purchase information via telephone line.

telephony
Use or operation of an apparatus for transmission of sounds between widely removed points with or
without connecting wires.
teletext
Equipment used to generate textual information for broadcast.
Television Receive Only (TVRO)
Associated with the type of antenna used to receive the satellite assigned.
Telnet
A terminal emulation program for TCP/IP networks such as the Internet. The Telnet program runs
on your computer and connects your PC to a server on the network. You can then enter commands
through the Telnet program and they will be executed as if you were entering them directly on the
server console.
temperature compensation
A method of maintaining system levels that fluctuate due to changes in cable attenuation with
temperature.
terminal device
This is a digital device that the subscriber uses to receive programming on a cable system. It is
the last device used before the product is consumed. The preferred term is set-top terminal.
terminal multiplexer

62 Glossary
Generates SONET signals from multiplexed Asynchronous signals

terminator
A resistive load for an open coaxial line used to eliminate reflections and to terminate a line in its
impedance.
thermal noise
Caused by the random activity of electrons within metal. The equivalent theoretical standard is -
59.2 dBmV for a 4 MHz Channel.
thermal pads
An attenuator that varies its loss dependent upon temperature.
tier
Refers to the level of services offered to subscribers by the Cable System, such as Basic or
Extended Basic.
tilt
The frequency vs. gain characteristics of amplifiers and other devices. Amplifiers most often
have a higher gain at higher frequencies to offset the greater attenuation of cable at higher
frequencies. The different in the amplifier gain at the highest system frequency and the lowest
system frequency is the tilt.
time base
The starting point of a schedule day. Varies by Service Provider.
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
This involves the use of a single frequency/space slot by further dividing time into slots and
allocating those time slots to multiple users. Works by assigning each caller a unique timeslot and
then sends packets of data during that slot versus CDMA and FDMA. (CED 4/94)
time-out counter
The number of hours that a set-top terminal can operate without receiving the control data channel
information. Once this time is reached, the set-top terminal shuts down.
timed viewing
The ability of a customer to purchase programming for a selected time period only.
token ring
As defined in IEEE 802.5, a communications method that uses a token to control accesses to the
LAN. The difference between a token bus and a Token Ring is that a Token Ring LAN does not
use a master controller to control the token. Instead, each computer knows the address of the
computer that should receive the token next. When a computer with the token has nothing to
transmit, it passes the token to the next computer in line.

Glossary 63
traffic system
An automated system that handles all areas of a services business functions: sales, spot
placement, billing, historical reporting, etc. Examples include Columbine, Enterprise, and
Savant.
transaction number
A unique identifier used to track a requests as they pass through the NDTC AC System.
transceiver
A terminal that can both transmit and receive data.
transcoder
A device that converts data between two different coding formats.
transducer
A device that converts energy from one form to another.

transient suppression
The process of guarding against damage to electronic equipment or circuits caused by high voltage
or current transients.
transmission
The sending of information (signals) from one point to another.
transmission channel
The transmission channel is the physical link layer defined in the ISO network model that is used to
carry the data link layer. For example, the satellite signal path and cable signal paths are
transmission channels. MPEG-2 transport is a data link layer that is carried on this physical
medium. FDDI, SONET and DS3 are all other examples of a transmission channel.
transmitter
Equipment used to generate, amplify, modulate and radiate an RF carrier signal into space.
transponder
The part of a satellite that receives and transmits a signal. A particular frequency on a particular
satellite relay device which receives a signal from a ground station, amplifies the signal then
broadcasts the signal at a different frequency back to earth.
transport
Transport is the carriage of data from one point to another using a specific protocol. In the
DigiCable System the transport protocol is packet based.
transport multiplex (transport stream)
A collection of transport packetized components whose data represent a single service or multiple
services, arranged as a multiplex and defined by a single service association table.

64 Glossary
TSODA
Transport Sync OSD (On-Screen Display) DES (Data Encryption Standard) Audio. The TSODA is
an element that provides the system security handling. This security functionality exists on the
encoder and key server as Encryption Engine Element (EEE), on the IRT as TSODA, and on the
set-top terminal as Access Control Element (ACE). The hardware is the same in all places, but
the firmware changes. As the security element, the TSODA provides the encryption/decryption in
all of the indicated devices. The TSODA function on the IRT is to encrypt and decrypt the
packets--encrypt services on the satellite side and decrypt services on the cable side.
Trellis
A type of coding used with digital modulation that allows errors to be detected and corrected at the
receiver.
triple beat
An unwanted distortion component caused by the third order, non-linear transfer characteristics of
transistors and other active devices. Triple beat distortion is composed of the sum and difference
distortion products
trunk or express cable

The main distribution lines leading from the headend to various areas where feeder lines are
attached to distribute signals to subscribers.
turnaround
A service provider uplinked and downlinked at NDTC without further NDTC intervention.
TVPassCard
Technology for enhanced management and decryption of services.

two-way
A Return Path is used. It can be upstream RF on cable of via the public switched telephone
network.
UCS maintenance
The Forte based Uplink Control System Maintenance program allows a user to dictate such details
as the encoder names, active TSPs (Television Service Providers), defined services and attributes.
Ultra High Frequency (UHF)
Corresponding to electromagnetic signals in the range from 300 to 3000 MHz; channels 14-69 are
commonly referred to as UHF channels on the television dial.
UMS Server
The Uplink Manager System Server controls the interface/messages between different programs and
the UCS. When a user is logged into the Uplink Control System (UCS), no one else is able to
communicate with that UCS.
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
A backup power supply that, if activated, provides continuation of power without interruption.
unity gain
When the gain of an amplifier equals the loss of the cable preceding it.

Glossary 65
UNIX
Operating system, originally designed by AT&T, used for communicating, multi-user, 32-bit
minicomputers. It has become widely accepted because of its versatility.
Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP)
Cabling that does not require the fixed spacing between connections that is necessary with coaxial-
type connections; used for rates between 1 and 4 Mbps.
upconverter
Shifts the IF signal to a usable transmission frequency.

uplink
Earth to satellite transmission. The transmission of a signal from its earth station source up to a
satellite in orbit. The opposite of downlink, which goes from orbit to earth.
Uplink Control System (UCS)

A VAX-based system created by Motorola BCS to control encoders for DigiCipher II. The UCS is
the actual system, which controls the encoders and the services on them. However in the HITS
design, this is done by sending the UCS messages via the UMS. Using such programs as UCS
Maintenance, Program Event Scheduler (PES), Encoder Management System (EMS) and
Authorization Station (AS), a user can control everything on the UCS without being physically
logged on.
Uplink Facility
Transmits program information up to a geosynchronous satellite.

Uplink Management System (UMS)
Automated system that coordinates playback of video, audio, and digital service; disperses the
scheduled services to other control mediums necessary to access the system.
upstream
Upstream as it applies to cable systems includes all signal flow from set-top terminal units back
to cable headends.
1. User Datagram Protocol (UDP)
2. A transmission protocol that uses an IP address to identify the destination host and a port
number to identify the destination application.
3. Velocity of Propagation (VoP)
4. Velocity of signal transmission along a coaxial cable relative to the speed of light in free space.
5. Very High Frequency (VHF)
6. Corresponding to electromagnetic signals in the range from 30 to 300 MHz.
7. video band
8. The frequency band utilized to transmit a composite video signal (4.2 MHz).

66 Glossary
Video On-Demand (VOD)

Video delivered immediately when requested by customers. Usually refers to pre-recorded movies
or information.
video signals
30 Hz to 4.2 MHz Includes color, luminance, vertical and horizontal information.
video units
A contiguous finite time segment that a set-top terminal may be authorized to view and/or that must
be controlled separately. Examples of Video Units within an Event are: 1. The Preview period; 2.
The purchasability period; and 3. The period after the Preview and purchasability periods (which
may overlap) to the end of the Event.
virtual channel
The ability to dynamically build a Channel at uplink through the UMS. Through the set-top
terminal, the Subscriber is provided transparent switching of digital Services, creating a desired
collection of programming for purchase.
Virtual Channel Indicator (VCI)

Identifies a service. This value is embedded in the SONET/ATM optical input to the ITEM. The
ITEM uses this value to rebuild an SSTM from the optical input. This value, along with the Virtual
Path Indicator (VPI), identifies an ATM connection.
virtual channel map

A data structure describing a service, or a subset of a service, usually meaningful to a user, and a
reference number called the virtual channel number (VCN).
virtual channel mapping

New channel map that is downloaded by the headend.
virtual fast forward
Offered in conjunction with NVOD, the ability to fast-forward and resume viewing. Resumption
of viewing is achieved by the DCT automatically switching to a channel with a later start time.
Virtual Path Indicator (VPI)
Identifies a service provider. This value is embedded in the SONET/ATM optical input to the
ITEM. The ITEM currently ignores this value. This value, along with the Virtual Channel
Indicator (VCI), identifies an ATM connection.
virtual pause
Offered in conjunction with NVOD, the ability to pause and resume viewing at a later time.
Resumption of viewing is achieved by the DCT automatically switching to a channel with a later
start time.
virtual rewind
Offered in conjunction with NVOD, the ability to rewind and resume viewing. Resumption of
viewing is achieved by the DCT automatically switching to a channel with an earlier start time.

Glossary 67
Viterbi decoder
A decoder in the signal receiving equipment (in this case, the digital terminal) that decodes 4/5
convolutionally encoded data.
voltage regulation
A voltage sensitive device that automatically initiates a corrective change in its output voltage to
provide a constant voltage to provide a constant voltage to a circuit.
walk-out information
Information gathered preceding a system design strand distance verification, natural and man made
obstacles, M.D.Vs etc.
waveform
The characteristic shape of a signal, usually displayed as a plot of amplitude over a period of
time.
wavelength
Distance between two points of corresponding phase in consecutive cycles in a periodic wave.
Weatherstar
A device used by the local operator to interface local weather information and data into the
modulator of the National Weather Channel.
WireLink
A protocol/command set defined by Motorola BCS Inc. for communications between customer
billing systems and addressable controllers.

Basic DAC 6000 (V3 (1) .1) Operation, Rev 1

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Basic DAC 6000 (V3 (1) .1) Operation, Rev 1

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Basic DAC 6000 (V3.

All rights reserved.

Section 1 Digital Addressable System Overview

Section 2 Data Communications and Networking Principles

Basic DAC 6000 (V3.1) Operation, Rev. 1.2

Data Transports ................................................................................................................ 2-8

Section 3 Manage System and Users

Basic DAC 6000 (V3.1) Operation, Rev. 1.2

View the hosts file and ping the OM ............................................................................ 3-30

Section 4 Business System Overview

Section 5 Define and Configure Devices

Basic DAC 6000 (V3.1) Operation, Rev. 1.2

Change a RADD .......................................................................................................... 5-6

Basic DAC 6000 (V3.1) Operation, Rev. 1.2

Configure SEM Input Ports .......................................................................................... 5-57

Basic DAC 6000 (V3.1) Operation, Rev. 1.2

Learning Exercise 5 .......................................................................................................... 5-100

Section 6 Manage Plants & Device Linkage

Basic DAC 6000 (V3.1) Operation, Rev. 1.2

Section 7 Schedule Services and Programs

Basic DAC 6000 (V3.1) Operation, Rev. 1.2

Assign a Service to Decrypting TSODA ....................................................................... 7-64

Section 8 Manage Channel Maps

Section 9 Manage Terminals

Basic DAC 6000 (V3.1) Operation, Rev. 1.2

Define Multicast 16 Address Sets .................................................................................. 9-24

Section 10 CableCARD/Host Support

Section 11 Manage Operations

Basic DAC 6000 (V3.1) Operation, Rev. 1.2

Define Operations Diagnostic Poll ............................................................................ 11-31

Section 12 Downloading Overview

Basic DAC 6000 (V3.1) Operation, Rev. 1.2

Step 8 Add the Code Suite(s) [if desired] ................................................................... 12-32

Basic DAC 6000 (V3.1) Operation, Rev. 1.2

Display Detail Assignment ........................................................................................... 12-81

Section 13 OCAP Overview

Section 14 System Maintenance

Basic DAC 6000 (V3.1) Operation, Rev. 1.2

Appendix A Linux Command Summary

Appendix B Generate Reports

Appendix C Manage Time Zones

Basic DAC 6000 (V3.1) Operation, Rev. 1.2

Basic DAC 6000 (V3.1) Operation, Rev 1.2

Basic DAC 6000 (V3.1) Operation, Rev 1.2

Course Completion Certificate

Basic DAC 6000 (V3.1) Operation, Rev 1.2

Basic DAC 6000 (V3.1) Operation, Rev 1.2

An Introduction to Digital Technology

Digital Signal Conversion and Compression

Basic DAC 6000 (V3.1) Operation, Rev 1.2

Digital Television Delivery System Overview

Figure 1-1 Digital System Uplink/Downlink Diagram

Basic DAC 6000 (V3.1) Operation, Rev 1.2

Digital Headend Facility and Customers Home

Basic DAC 6000 (V3.1) Operation, Rev 1.2

Basic DAC 6000 (V3.1) Operation, Rev 1.2

Digital Addressable System Overview

Basic DAC 6000/RADD 6000 Functions

DAC 6000 Compatible Hardware

ML 570 G3 Hardware Platform

Basic DAC 6000 (V3.1) Operation, Rev 1.2

36/72GB DAT drive

DAC 6000 Operating Software